Be sure to read this manual and the addendum before using the machine.
We recommend that you keep these documents nearby for future reference.
Operation Manual
Embroidery and Sewing Machine
Product Code: 882-W07
Trademarks
FlashFX
®
is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
FlashFX
®
Copyright 1998-2007 Datalight, Inc.
U.S.Patent Office 5,860,082/6,260,156
FlashFX
®
Pro™ is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Datalight
®
is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Copyright 1989-2007 Datalight, Inc., All Rights Reserved
Video powered by Mobiclip™ encoding and playback technology.
IMPORTANT:
READ BEFORE DOWNLOADING, COPYING, INSTALLING OR USING.
By downloading, copying, installing or using the software you agree to this license. If you do not agree
to this license, do not download, install, copy or use the software.
Intel License Agreement For Open Source Computer Vision Library
Copyright © 2000, Intel Corporation, all rights reserved. Third party copyrights are property of their respective owners.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
• Redistribution’s of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
• Redistribution’s in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
• The name of Intel Corporation may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
This software is provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties,
including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are
disclaimed. In no event shall Intel or contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary,
or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use,
data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict
liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of this software, even if
advised of the possibility of such damage.
All information provided related to future Intel products and plans is preliminary and subject to change at any time, without notice.
Secure Digital (SD) Card is a registered trademark or a trademark of SD Card Association.
CompactFlash is a registered trademark or a trademark of Sandisk Corporation.
Memory Stick is a registered trademark or a trademark of Sony Corporation.
SmartMedia is a registered trademark or a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.
MultiMediaCard (MMC) is a registered trademark or a trademark of Infineon Technologies AG.
xD-Picture Card is a registered trademark or a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd.
IBM is a registered trademark or a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
“Adobe” and “Adobe Reader” are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the
United States and/or other countries.
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License Agreement specific to its proprietary programs.
All other brands and product names mentioned in this manual are registered trademarks of their respective companies. However, the
explanations for markings such as ® and ™ are not clearly described within the text.
INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing this embroidery and sewing machine. Before using this machine, carefully read
the “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS”, and then study this manual for the correct operation of the
various functions.
In addition, after you have finished reading this manual, store it where it can quickly be accessed for
future reference.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Please read these safety instructions before attempting to use the machine.
DANGER - To reduce the risk of electric shock
1Always unplug the machine from the electrical outlet immediately after using, when cleaning, when making any
user servicing adjustments mentioned in this manual, or if you are leaving the machine unattended.
WARNING - To reduce the risk of burns, fire, electric shock, or injury to
persons.
2Always unplug the machine from the electrical outlet when removing covers, or when making any adjustments
mentioned in the instruction manual.
• To unplug the machine, switch the machine to the symbol “O” position to turn it off, then grasp the plug and pull
it out of the electrical outlet. Do not pull on the cord.
• Plug the machine directly into the electrical outlet. Do not use an extension cord.
• Always unplug your machine if the power is cut.
3Electrical Hazards:
• This machine should be connected to an AC power source within the range indicated on the rating label. Do not
connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure what kind of power source you have, contact a
qualified electrician.
• This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only.
4Never operate this machine if it has a damaged cord or plug, if it is not working properly, if it has been dropped
or damaged, or water is spilled on the unit. Return the machine to the nearest authorized dealer for examination,
repair, electrical or mechanical adjustment.
• While the machine is stored or in use if you notice anything unusual, such as an odor, heat, discoloration or
deformation, stop using the machine immediately and unplug the power cord.
• When transporting the sewing machine, be sure to carry it by its handle. Lifting the sewing machine by any other
part may damage the machine or result in the machine falling, which could cause injuries.
• When lifting the sewing machine, be careful not to make any sudden or careless movements, otherwise you may
injure your back or knees.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
2
5Always keep your work area clear:
• Never operate the machine with any air openings blocked. Keep ventilation openings of the sewing machine and
foot control free from the build up of lint, dust, and loose cloth.
• Do not store objects on the foot controller.
• Do not use extension cords. Plug the machine directly into the electrical outlet.
• Never drop or insert any object into any opening.
• Do not operate where aerosol (spray) products are being used or where oxygen is being administered.
• Do not use the machine near a heat source, such as a stove or iron; otherwise, the machine, power cord or
garment being sewn may ignite, resulting in fire or an electric shock.
• Do not place this sewing machine on an unstable surface, such as an unsteady or slanted table, otherwise the
sewing machine may fall, resulting in injuries.
6Special care is required when sewing:
• Always pay close attention to the needle. Do not use bent or damaged needles.
• Keep fingers away from all moving parts. Special care is required around the machine needle.
• Switch the sewing machine to the symbol “O” position to turn it off when making any adjustments in the needle
area.
• Do not use a damaged or incorrect needle plate, as it could cause the needle to break.
• Do not push or pull the fabric when sewing, and follow careful instruction when free motion stitching so that
you do not deflect the needle and cause it to break.
7This machine is not a toy:
• Your close attention is necessary when the machine is used by or near children.
• The plastic bag that this sewing machine was supplied in should be kept out of the reach of children or disposed
of. Never allow children to play with the bag due to the danger of suffocation.
• Do not use outdoors.
8For a longer service life:
• When storing this machine, avoid direct sunlight and high humidity locations. Do not use or store the machine
near a space heater, iron, halogen lamp, or other hot objects.
• Use only neutral soaps or detergents to clean the case. Benzene, thinner, and scouring powders can damage the
case and machine, and should never be used.
• Always consult the operation manual when replacing or installing any assemblies, the presser feet, needle, or
other parts to assure correct installation.
9For repair or adjustment:
• If the light unit is damaged, it must be replaced by an authorized dealer.
• In the event a malfunction occurs or adjustment is required, first follow the troubleshooting table in the back of
the operation manual to inspect and adjust the machine yourself. If the problem persists, please consult your
local authorized Brother dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
3
Use this machine only for its intended use as described in the manual.
Use accessories recommended by the manufacturer as contained in this manual.
Use only the interface cable (USB cable) included with this machine.
Use only the USB mouse included with this machine.
Use only the pen tablet included with this machine.
The contents of this manual and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.
For additional product information and updates, visit our website at www.brother.com
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
This machine is intended for household use.
This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced
physical, sensory or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge,
unless they have been given supervision or instruction concerning use of the
appliance by a person responsible for their safety. Children should be supervised
to ensure that they do not play with the appliance.
This appliance can be used by children aged from 8 years and above and persons
with reduced physical, sensory or mental capabilities or lack of experience and
knowledge if they have been given supervision or instruction concerning use of the
appliance in a safe way and understand the hazards involved. Children shall not
play with the appliance. Cleaning and user maintenance shall not be made by
children without supervision.
FOR USERS IN THE UK, EIRE, MALTA
AND CYPRUS ONLY
IMPORTANT
• In the event of replacing the plug fuse, use a fuse approved by ASTA to BS 1362, i.e. carrying the mark,
rating as marked on plug.
• Always replace the fuse cover. Never use plugs with the fuse cover omitted.
• If the available electrical outlet is not suitable for the plug supplied with this equipment, you should contact your
authorized dealer to obtain the correct lead.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
4
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Declaration of Conformity (For USA Only)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
• The included interface cable should be used in order to ensure compliance with the limits for a Class B digital
device.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Brother Industries, Ltd. could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Responsible Party: Brother International Corporation
200 Crossing Boulevard
P.O. Box 6911
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA
TEL : (908) 704-1700
declares that the product
Product Name:
Model Number:
Brother Sewing Machine
NV6750D
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
5
WARNING LABEL
The following warning label is on the included side cutter. Be sure to observe the precaution.
Label location
CAUTION
• When using the side cutter, sew between low and mid-speed and do not touch the knives or
operation lever of the side cutter while sewing to avoid equipment damage or injury.
a Guide plate (lower knife)
b Upper knife
c Operation lever
6
OUTSTANDING FEATURES
Display the Fabric While
Aligning the Embroidering
Position
The fabric hooped in the embroidery frame can be
displayed on the LCD so that the embroidery
position can be easily aligned.
This feature allows you to easily combine patterns
while checking the final image.
See “Display the Fabric While Aligning the
Embroidering Position” on page 211.
Change the Pattern Size While
Maintaining the Desired Thread
Density (Stitch Recalculator)
In the embroidery edit screen, the size of the
pattern can be changed while the desired thread
density is maintained.
With this function, the pattern will be enlarged or
reduced at a larger ratio than with normal pattern
resizing.
See “Changing the Pattern Size While Maintaining
the Desired Thread Density (Stitch Recalculator)”
on page 270.
Expand Your Creativity With
Bobbin Work
Example with decorative stitches
You can create bobbin work, which gives a three-
dimensional appearance to the surface of the
fabric, by winding the bobbin with heavy weight
thread or ribbon too thick to be fed through the
sewing machine needle and sewing on the wrong
side of the fabric.
Bobbin work is sewn using the special bobbin case
(gray) included with this machine.
See “How to Create Bobbin Work” on page 307.
Multi-Function Foot Controller
Allows You Easy Sewing
The multi-function foot controller allows you
various sewing machine operations in addition to
starting/stopping sewing, such as thread cutting
and reverse stitching, can be specified to be
performed. See Operation Manual Addendum.
7
Find New Color Schemes With
the Color Shuffling Function
With the color shuffling function, the machine
suggests new color schemes for the embroidery
pattern that you have selected. After you select the
desired effect from one of the four available color
schemes (“RANDOM”, “VIVID”, “GRADIENT”
and “SOFT”) the sample for the selected effect is
displayed.
See “Find New Color Schemes With the Color
Shuffling Function” on page 283.
LED Pointer Shows You the
Needle Drop Position
Included Embroidery foot with LED pointer
indicates the needle position with a red LED point.
The LED pointer shows you the location of the
needle penetration so that it is easier to adjust the
embroidery position.
See “Attaching Embroidery Foot “W2”” on
page 186 of this guide, and Operation Manual
Addendum.
Create Patterns With My Custom
Design
Any image that you draw in the LCD screen area
of your machine can immediately become an
embroidery pattern. Specify colors and sewing
settings as you desire.
Compose embroidery from children’s drawings or
of your signature to add to your original artwork.
This is a function that everyone will enjoy using.
The included pen tablet makes this function even
easier to use.
Refer to the instruction manual (PDF format) stored
in the My Custom Design CD.
Easily Perform My Custom
Design Operations With the
Included Pen Tablet
The included pen tablet can be used to perform
My Custom Design operations effectively, along
with normal screen operations. Since the range of
operation with the pen tablet is wider than the
machine’s LCD screen, you can easily perform
intricate procedures.
See “Using the Pen Tablet” on page 23 and “Using
the Pen Tablet” on page 34.
8
WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE
Getting Ready
To learn the operation of the principal parts and the
screens
Sewing Basics
To learn how to prepare for sewing and basic sewing
operations
Chapter 1
Page 25
Chapter 2
Page 71
Utility Stitches
Pre-programmed with more than 100 frequently used
stitches
Character/Decorative
Stitches
The variety of stitches widen your creativity
Chapter 3
Page 89
Chapter 4
Page 155
Embroidery
Maximum 30 cm × 20 cm (approx. 12 × 8 inches) for
large embroidery designs
Embroidery Edit
Designs can be combined, rotated or enlarged
Chapter 5
Page 185
Chapter 6
Page 263
How to Create Bobbin
Work
To learn how to create bobbin work
My Custom Stitch
Create original decorative stitches
Chapter 7
Page 307
Chapter 8
Page 325
Appendix
Caring for your machine and dealing with errors and
malfunctions
Chapter 9
Page 337
9
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Chapter 1 and Chapter 2 explain your sewing machine’s basic operation procedures for someone who is
using the sewing machine for the first time. If you want to sew utility stitches or character/ decorative
stitches, read Chapter 1 and Chapter 2, then go on to Chapter 3 (Utility Stitches) or Chapter 4 (Character/
Decorative Stitches).
When you are ready to begin using the embroidery function after reading Chapter 1 and Chapter 2,
proceed to Chapter 5 (Embroidery). Once you understand the steps explained in Chapter 5, go on to
Chapter 6 (Embroidery Edit) for an explanation about the embroidery edit functions.
In the screens appearing in the step-by-step instructions, the parts referred to in the operations are marked
with . Compare the screen in the directions with the actual screen, and carry out the operation.
If, while using the machine, you experience something you do not understand, or there is a function you
would like to know more about, refer to the index at the back of the operation manual in conjunction
with the table of contents to find the section of the manual you should refer to.
To sew utility stitches
To sew character or
decorative stitches
To do machine
embroidery
Chapter 1 Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 5 Chapter 6
CONTENTS
10
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION..................................................1
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS .................1
OUTSTANDING FEATURES ..................................6
WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE ......8
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..............................9
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR
FUNCTIONS .........................................................13
Machine................................................................................13
Needle and Presser Foot Section ...........................................14
Embroidery Unit....................................................................15
Operation Buttons .................................................................15
Using the Flat Bed Attachment ..............................................16
Using the Accessory Case......................................................16
Storing Bobbin Clips..............................................................17
Using the Embroidery Unit Carrying Case .............................17
Included Accessories.............................................................17
Options.................................................................................20
Using the Spool Stand ...........................................................21
Using the Pen Tablet .............................................................23
Chapter 1 Getting Ready 25
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF....................26
LCD SCREEN .......................................................28
USB Connectivity ..................................................................32
Using the Machine Setting Mode Key ...................................35
Using the Sewing Machine Help Key ...................................44
Using the Operation Guide Function.....................................45
Using the Sewing Guide Function .........................................46
Using the Pattern Explanation Function .................................47
LOWER THREADING ..........................................48
Winding the Bobbin ..............................................................48
Setting the Bobbin .................................................................54
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread ...............................................55
UPPER THREADING............................................57
Upper Threading ...................................................................57
Using the Twin Needle Mode................................................60
Using the Spool Stand ...........................................................63
Using Threads that Unwind Quickly .....................................64
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT .......................65
Removing the Presser Foot ....................................................65
Attaching the Presser Foot .....................................................65
Attaching the Walking Foot ...................................................66
CHANGING THE NEEDLE...................................67
About the Needle ..................................................................69
Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations .....................................69
Chapter 2 Sewing Basics 71
SEWING ..............................................................72
Sewing a Stitch......................................................................72
Sewing Reinforcement Stitches..............................................74
Sewing Curves.......................................................................74
Changing Sewing Direction...................................................75
Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics.................................................75
Sewing Hook-and-Loop Fastener...........................................76
Sewing Lightweight Fabrics ...................................................76
Sewing Stretch Fabrics...........................................................77
STITCH SETTINGS...............................................78
Setting the Stitch Width .........................................................78
Setting the Stitch Length ........................................................79
Setting the Thread Tension ....................................................79
USEFUL FUNCTIONS..........................................81
Automatic Reinforcement Stitching .......................................81
Automatic Thread Cutting .....................................................82
Using the Knee Lifter .............................................................83
Pivoting.................................................................................84
Automatic Fabric Sensor System (Automatic Presser Foot
Pressure) ............................................................................... 85
Needle Position – Stitch Placement....................................... 86
Locking the Screen ............................................................... 86
Checking the Needle Location in the Screen......................... 87
Chapter 3 Utility Stitches 89
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES .......................... 90
Selecting a Stitch .................................................................. 91
Saving Your Stitch Settings.................................................... 92
SEWING THE STITCHES ..................................... 94
Straight Stitches .................................................................... 94
Dart Seam............................................................................. 99
Gathering ............................................................................. 99
Flat Fell Seam ..................................................................... 100
Pintuck ............................................................................... 101
Zigzag Stitches.................................................................... 102
Elastic Zigzag Stitches......................................................... 104
Overcasting ........................................................................ 105
Quilting .............................................................................. 110
Blind Hem Stitches ............................................................. 122
Appliqué............................................................................. 125
Shelltuck Stitches................................................................ 126
Scallop Stitches................................................................... 127
Crazy Quilting .................................................................... 127
Smocking Stitches............................................................... 128
Fagoting.............................................................................. 128
Tape or Elastic Attaching .................................................... 129
Heirloom............................................................................ 130
One-step Buttonholes ......................................................... 132
Four-step Buttonholes ......................................................... 136
Bar Tacks............................................................................ 140
Button Sewing .................................................................... 142
Eyelet.................................................................................. 144
Multi-directional Sewing (Straight Stitch and Zigzag Stitch)
..... 145
Zipper Insertion .................................................................. 146
Edge Sewing ....................................................................... 148
Chapter 4 Character/Decorative Stitches 155
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS ........................ 156
Selecting Decorative Stitch Patterns/7mm Decorative Stitch
Patterns/Satin Stitch Patterns/7mm Satin Stitch Patterns/
Cross Stitch/Utility Decorative Stitch Patterns ..................... 158
Alphabet Characters ........................................................... 158
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS ............................ 161
Sewing Attractive Finishes .................................................. 161
Basic Sewing ...................................................................... 161
Making Adjustments ........................................................... 162
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS............................ 164
Changing the Size............................................................... 166
Changing the Length (for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only)
.... 166
Creating a Vertical Mirror Image......................................... 166
Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image .................................... 167
Sewing a Pattern Continuously ........................................... 167
Changing Thread Density (for Satin Stitch Patterns Only) .... 167
Returning to the Beginning of the Pattern............................ 168
Checking the Image ............................................................ 168
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS..................... 170
Before Combining............................................................... 170
Combining Various Stitch Patterns ...................................... 170
Combining Large and Small Stitch Patterns ......................... 171
Combining Horizontal Mirror Image Stitch Patterns ............ 172
Combining Stitch Patterns of Different Length..................... 173
Making Step Stitch Patterns (for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only)
..... 174
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION .................. 176
Stitch Data Precautions....................................................... 176
Saving Stitch Patterns in the Machine’s Memory ................. 177
Saving Stitch Patterns to USB Media ................................... 178
CONTENTS
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Saving Stitch Patterns in the Computer................................ 179
Retrieving Stitch Patterns from the Machine’s Memory........ 180
Recalling from USB Media.................................................. 181
Recalling from the Computer .............................................. 182
Chapter 5 Embroidery 185
BEFORE EMBROIDERING .................................186
Embroidery Step by Step ..................................................... 186
Attaching Embroidery Foot “W2”........................................ 186
Attaching the Embroidery Unit............................................ 188
SELECTING PATTERNS......................................190
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Brother “Exclusives”/
Greek Alphabet Patterns/Floral Alphabet Patterns/
Utility Embroidery Patterns ................................................. 193
Selecting Alphabet Character Patterns................................. 194
Selecting Frame Patterns ..................................................... 196
Selecting Patterns from Embroidery Cards ........................... 197
Selecting Patterns from USB Media/Computer..................... 197
VIEWING THE SEWING SCREEN......................198
PREPARING THE FABRIC..................................200
Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers (Backing) to the Fabric ........... 200
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame ...................... 202
Embroidering Small Fabrics or Fabric Edges ........................ 205
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME..........206
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION.........208
Aligning the Embroidering Position Using the Built-In Camera
...... 208
Display the Fabric While Aligning the Embroidering Position
..... 211
Using the Built-In Camera to Align the Embroidering Position
.... 213
Checking the Pattern Position ............................................. 216
Previewing the Completed Pattern ...................................... 217
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN ..............218
Sewing Attractive Finishes................................................... 218
Sewing Embroidery Patterns................................................ 219
Sewing Embroidery Patterns Which Use Appliqué .............. 221
PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING
EMBROIDERY PATTERNS AND PRINTED
DESIGNS) .........................................................223
Selecting a Pattern .............................................................. 224
Outputting the Background Image and Positioning Image ... 225
Printing the Background and Embroidery Position Sheet ..... 226
Sewing Embroidery Patterns................................................ 227
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY
PROCESS ............................................................229
If the Bobbin Runs Out of Thread........................................ 229
If the Thread Breaks During Sewing .................................... 230
Restarting from the Beginning ............................................. 231
Resuming Embroidery After Turning Off the Power ............. 231
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS ..........233
Adjusting Thread Tension ................................................... 233
Adjusting the Alternate Bobbin Case (with No Color on the
Screw)................................................................................. 234
Using the Automatic Thread Cutting Function
(END COLOR TRIM)........................................................... 235
Using the Thread Trimming Function (JUMP STITCH TRIM)
.... 236
Adjusting the Embroidery Speed ......................................... 237
Changing the Thread Color Display .................................... 237
Changing the Embroidery Frame Display ............................ 238
REVISING THE PATTERN ..................................240
Moving the Pattern.............................................................. 240
Aligning the Pattern and the Needle.................................... 240
Changing the Size of the Pattern ......................................... 241
Rotating the Pattern............................................................. 242
Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image .................................... 243
Changing the Density (Alphabet Character and Frame
Patterns Only) ..................................................................... 244
Changing the Colors of Alphabet Character Patterns ........... 245
Embroidering Linked Characters ......................................... 245
Uninterrupted Embroidering (Using a Single Color)............. 248
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION...................249
Embroidery Data Precautions.............................................. 249
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Machine’s Memory ........ 251
Saving Embroidery Patterns to USB Media...........................252
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Computer .......................253
Retrieving Patterns from the Machine’s Memory..................254
Recalling from USB Media ..................................................255
Recalling from the Computer...............................................256
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS ......................... 258
Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (1)...................258
Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (2)...................259
Sewing Split Embroidery Patterns ........................................261
Chapter 6 Embroidery Edit 263
EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS...................... 264
SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT ...................... 265
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Brother “Exclusives”/
Greek Alphabet Patterns/Floral Alphabet Patterns/
Utility Embroidery Patterns/Frame Patterns ..........................266
Selecting Alphabet Character Patterns .................................266
EDITING PATTERNS ......................................... 268
Moving the Pattern ..............................................................270
Rotating the Pattern .............................................................270
Changing the Size of the Pattern..........................................270
Changing the Pattern Size While Maintaining the Desired
Thread Density (Stitch Recalculator)....................................270
Deleting the Pattern.............................................................272
Displaying Patterns in the Screen Magnified by 200%.........272
Changing the Configuration of Alphabet Character Patterns
.....273
Changing Alphabet Character Spacing ................................273
Reducing Character Spacing................................................274
Separating Combined Character Patterns.............................275
Changing the Color of Each Alphabet Character in a Pattern
....276
Embroidering Linked Characters ..........................................277
Changing the Thread Color .................................................277
Creating a Custom Thread Table .........................................278
Choosing a Color from the Custom Thread Table ................282
Find New Color Schemes With the Color Shuffling Function
......283
Designing Repeated Patterns ...............................................285
Embroidering the Pattern Repeatedly...................................291
Duplicating a Pattern...........................................................293
After Editing ........................................................................294
COMBINING PATTERNS .................................. 295
Editing Combined Patterns ..................................................295
Sewing Combined Patterns..................................................298
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS ........ 299
Uninterrupted Embroidering (Using a Single Color) .............299
Basting Embroidery .............................................................299
Creating an Appliqué Piece .................................................300
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION .................. 306
PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING
EMBROIDERY PATTERNS AND PRINTED
DESIGNS) ........................................................ 306
Chapter 7 How to Create Bobbin Work 307
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK................................... 308
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK.................... 309
Required Materials ..............................................................309
Upper Threading .................................................................310
Preparing the Bobbin Thread...............................................310
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING)............ 314
Positioning the Fabric and Sewing.......................................314
Bobbin Work Free Motion Sewing.......................................317
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY)
....... 318
Selecting the Pattern............................................................318
Start Embroidering...............................................................320
ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION............... 322
TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................... 323
Chapter 8 MY CUSTOM STITCH 325
DESIGNING A STITCH..................................... 326
ENTERING STITCH DATA ................................ 328
USING STORED CUSTOM STITCHES............... 334
CONTENTS
12
Storing Custom Stitches in Your List ....................................334
Retrieving Stored Stitches ....................................................335
Chapter 9 Appendix 337
CARE AND MAINTENANCE..............................338
Restrictions on oiling...........................................................338
Precautions on storing the machine.....................................338
Cleaning the LCD Screen ....................................................338
Cleaning the Machine Casing..............................................338
Cleaning the Race ...............................................................338
Cleaning the Cutter in the Bobbin Case Area.......................340
About the Maintenance Message.........................................341
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN.................................342
Adjusting the Brightness of the Screen Display ....................342
Touch Panel is Malfunctioning............................................342
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................343
Frequent troubleshooting topics ..........................................343
Upper thread is too tight......................................................343
Tangled thread on wrong side of fabric ...............................344
Incorrect thread tension.......................................................346
Fabric is caught in the machine and cannot be removed .....347
List of Symptoms .................................................................350
ERROR MESSAGES ............................................354
SPECIFICATIONS ..............................................362
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE
.......363
Upgrade Procedure Using USB Media.................................363
Upgrade Procedure Using Computer...................................364
STITCH SETTING CHART..................................365
INDEX ...............................................................374
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
13
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
The names of the various parts of the sewing machine and their functions are described below. Before
using the sewing machine, carefully read these descriptions to learn the names of the machine parts.
Machine
■ Front View
a Top cover
Open the top cover to thread the machine and wind the bobbin.
b Pre-tension disk
Pass the thread around the pre-tension disk when winding the
bobbin thread. (page 48)
c Thread guide for bobbin winding
Pass the thread through this thread guide when winding the
bobbin thread. (page 48)
d Spool pin
Place a spool of thread on the spool pin. (page 57)
e Spool cap
Use the spool cap to hold the spool of thread in place. (page 57)
f Supplemental spool pin
Use this spool pin to wind the bobbin thread, or to sew with the
twin needle. (page 48, 60)
g Bobbin winder
Use the bobbin winder when winding the bobbin. (page 48)
h LCD (liquid crystal display)
Settings for the selected stitch and error messages appear in
the LCD. (page 28)
i Knee lifter
Use the knee lifter to raise and lower the presser foot. (page 83)
j Knee lifter slot
Insert the knee lifter into the slot. (page 83)
k Operation buttons (6 buttons) and sewing speed
controller
Use these buttons and the slide to operate the sewing machine.
(page 15)
l Flat bed attachment with accessory compartment
Store presser feet and bobbins in the accessory compartment
of the flat bed attachment. When sewing cylindrical pieces,
remove the flat bed attachment. (page 16)
m Thread cutter
Pass the threads through the thread cutter to cut them. (page
59)
n Thread guide plate
Pass the thread around the thread guide plate when threading
upper thread. (page 57)
■ Right-side/Rear View
a Handle
Carry the sewing machine by its handle when transporting the
machine.
b Presser foot lever
Raise and lower the presser foot lever to raise and lower the
presser foot. (page 65)
c Main power switch
Use the main power switch to turn the sewing machine ON and
OFF. (page 26)
d Multi-function foot controller
Various sewing machine operations can be programmed into
the multi-function foot controller. (Operation Manual
Addendum.)
e Power cord receptacle
Insert the power cord into the machine receptacle. (page 26)
f Air vent
The air vent allows the air surrounding the motor to circulate. Do
not cover the air vent while the sewing machine is being used.
g Foot controller jack and external port
Insert the foot controller plugs where indicated. (page 73,
Operation Manual Addendum)
h Speaker
i USB port for computer
In order to import/export patterns between a computer and the
machine, plug the USB cable into the USB port. (page 32, 179,
253)
j USB port for mouse (page 32)
k Primary (top) USB port for media
In order to send patterns from/to USB media, plug the USB
media directly into the USB port. (page 178, 252)
l Touch pen holder
Use the touch pen holder to hold the touch pen when not in use.
m Handwheel
Rotate the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) to raise
and lower the needle. The wheel should be turned toward the
front of the machine.
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
14
Needle and Presser Foot Section
a Buttonhole lever
The buttonhole lever is used with the one-step buttonhole foot
to create buttonholes. (page 132)
b Presser foot holder
The presser foot is attached to the presser foot holder. (page
65)
c Presser foot holder screw
Use the presser foot holder screw to hold the presser foot in
place. (page 66)
d Presser foot
The presser foot consistently applies pressure to the fabric as
sewing takes place. Attach the appropriate presser foot for the
selected stitch. (page 65)
e Feed dogs
The feed dogs feed the fabric in the sewing direction.
f Bobbin cover
Open the bobbin cover to set the bobbin. (page 54, 103)
g Needle plate cover
Remove the needle plate cover to clean the race. (page 97,
219)
h Needle plate
The needle plate is marked with guides to help sew straight
seams. (page 96)
i Needle bar thread guide
Pass the upper thread through the needle bar thread guide.
(page 57)
j Needle clamp screw
Use the needle clamp screw to hold the needle in place. (page
66)
Measurements on the needle plate, bobbin cover
(with mark) and needle plate cover
The measurements on the bobbin cover are
references for patterns with a middle (center)
needle position. The measurements on the needle
plate and the needle plate cover are references for
stitches with a left needle position.
a For stitches with a middle (center) needle position
b For stitches with a left needle position
c Left needle position on the needle plate <inch>
d Left needle position on the needle plate <cm>
e Middle (center) needle position on the bobbin cover
(with mark) <inch>
f Left needle position on the needle plate cover <inch>
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
15
Embroidery Unit
a Carriage
The carriage moves the embroidery frame automatically when
embroidering. (page 188)
b Release button (located under the embroidery unit)
Press the release button to remove the embroidery unit. (page
189)
c Embroidery frame holder
Insert the embroidery frame into the embroidery frame holder to
hold the frame in place. (page 206)
d Frame-securing lever
Press the frame-securing lever down to secure the embroidery
frame. (page 206)
e Embroidery unit connection
Insert the embroidery unit connection into the connection port
when attaching the embroidery unit. (page 188)
Operation Buttons
a “Start/Stop” button
Press this button and the machine will sew a few stitches at a
slow speed and then begin sewing at the speed set by the
sewing speed controller. Press the button again to stop the
machine. Hold the button in to sew at the machine’s slowest
speed. The button changes color according to the machine’s
operation mode.
b “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button
Use this button to sew reinforcement stitches at the beginning
and end of sewing. Press this button, and the machine sews 3
stitches in the same spot and stops automatically. For straight
and zigzag stitch patterns that take reverse stitches, the
machine will sew reverse stitches at low speed only while
holding down the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button (the
stitches are sewn in the opposite direction).
c “Needle Position” button
Use this button when changing sewing direction or for detailed
sewing in small areas. Press this button to raise or lower the
needle position. With this button, you can lower and raise the
needle to sew a single stitch.
d “Thread Cutter” button
Press this button after sewing to automatically trim the excess
thread.
e “Presser Foot Lifter” button
Press this button to lower the presser foot and apply pressure to
the fabric. Press this button again to raise the presser foot.
f Sewing Speed controller
Use this controller to adjust the sewing speed. Move the slide to
the left to sew at slower speeds. Move the slide to the right to
sew at higher speeds. Beginners should sew at a slow speed.
g “Automatic Threading” button
Use this button to automatically thread the needle.
CAUTION
• After the embroidery frame is set in the frame
holder, be sure the frame-securing lever is
correctly lowered.
Green: The machine is ready to sew or is sewing.
Red: The machine cannot sew.
CAUTION
• Do not press the thread cutter button after the
threads have been cut. The needle may break
and threads may become tangled, or damage
to the machine may occur.
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
16
Using the Flat Bed Attachment
Pull the top of the flat bed attachment to open the
accessory compartment.
Using the Accessory Case
■ Opening the Accessory Case
Fully slide the bar on each side of the accessory
case, and then lift off the lid to open the case.
The case can only be opened or locked correctly if
both bars are slid in the same direction.
a Bars
■ Closing the Accessory Case
a
Fully slide the bar on each side of the
accessory case lid to align the notches in
the lid with the notches in the bars.
b
Place the lid on top of the case so that the
notches in the lid align with the tabs on the
case, and then slide the bar on each side
back to the center of the accessory case.
a Bars
■ Using the Accessory Trays
Two presser foot storage trays are stored in the
included accessory case. One is for presser feet for
utility sewing, and the other is for presser feet for
embroidery and machine quilting.
a For presser feet for utility sewing
b For presser feet for embroidery and machine
quilting
For your convenience, a presser foot storage tray
can be stored in the accessory compartment of the
flat bed attachment.
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
17
a Storage space of the flat bed attachment
b Presser foot storage space of the flat bed
attachment
c Presser foot storage trays
Storing Bobbin Clips
Bobbin clips can be stored inside of the accessory
case cover.
Using the Embroidery Unit
Carrying Case
Included accessories 45-48 are contained in the
embroidery unit carrying case. To open the
embroidery unit carrying case, raise each lock and
move the latches out of position. To re-hook the
latches and securely close the case, position the
latch on the catch of the unit lid and lower the
lock till it snaps.
a Latches
Included Accessories
See table on the next page about included
accessories.
Memo
• Placing bobbin clips on bobbins helps pre-
vent the thread from unwinding from the
bobbin. In addition, snapping bobbin clips
together allows the bobbins to be conve-
niently stored and prevents them from rolling
around if they are dropped.
a
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
18
12345 67
8 9 101112131415
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31 32 33 34 35 36 37
38 39 40 41 42 43 44
45
*
46* 47* 48*
49 50 51 52 53
54 55 56 57
58
**
59 60
*Included Accessories 45-48 are contained in the embroidery unit carrying case.
75/11 2 needles
90/14 2 needles
90/14 2 needles:
Ball point needle (gold colored)
2.0/11 needle
75/11
2 needles
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
19
61 62 63 64
**In some countries or regions, this is not included in the enclosed accessories.
No. Part Name
Part Code
Americas Others
1 Zigzag foot “J” (on machine) XC3021-051
2 Monogramming foot “N” X53840-351
3 Overcasting foot “G” XC3098-051
4 Zipper foot “I” X59370-051
5 Buttonhole foot “A” X57789-251
6 Blind stitch foot “R” X56409-051
7 Button fitting foot “M” 130489-001
8 Walking foot SA140 F033N:
XC2214-052
9 Side cutter foot SA177 F054: XC3879-152
10 Straight stitch foot SA167 F042N:
XC1973-052
11 Free motion quilting foot “C” XE0765-101
12 Free motion echo quilting
foot “E”
XE0766-001
13 Free motion open toe
quilting foot “O”
SA187 F061: XE1097-001
14 Embroidery foot “W2” with
LED pointer
XF6319-001
15 Vertical stitch alignment foot
“V”
SA189 F063: XE5224-001
16 Needle set XE4962-001
17 Twin needle XE4963-001
18 Ball point needle set XD0705-051
19 Bobbin × 10
(One is on machine.)
SA156 SFB: XA5539-151
20 Seam ripper XF4967-001
21 Scissors XC1807-121
22 Cleaning brush X59476-051
23 Eyelet punch XZ5051-001
24 Screwdriver (small) X55468-051
25 Screwdriver (large) XC4237-021
26 Disc-shaped screwdriver XC1074-051
27 Spool cap (small) 130013-154
28 Spool cap (medium) × 2
(One is on machine.)
X55260-153
29 Spool cap (large) 130012-054
30 Spool cap (special) XA5752-121
31 Spool stand See page 21
32 Bobbin clip × 10 XE3060-001
33 Spool felt X57045-051
34 Spool net × 2 XA5523-050
35 Embroidery needle plate
cover
XE5131-001
36 Touch pen (stylus) XA9940-051
37 Knee lifter SA599 KL1: XE5902-001
38 USB cable XD0745-051
39 Alternate bobbin case
(no color on the screw)
XC8167-551
40 Bobbin case
(gray, for bobbin work)
XE8298-001
41 Straight stitch needle plate XE4908-301
42 Cord guide bobbin cover
(with single hole)
XE8991-101
43 Bobbin cover (with mark) XF0750-101
44 Multi-function foot controller See Operation Manual
Addendum
45 Embroidery frame set (small)
H 2 cm × W 6 cm
(H 1 inch × W 2-1/2 inches)
SA437 EF73: XC8479-152
46 Embroidery frame set
(medium) H 10 cm × W 10
cm (H 4 inches × W 4
inches)
SA438 EF74: XC8480-152
47 Embroidery frame set (quilt)
H 20 cm × W 20 cm
(H 8 inches × W 8 inches)
SA446 EF91: XE5068-101
48 Embroidery frame set
(extra large)
H 30 cm × W 20 cm
(H 12 inches × W 8 inches)
SA447 EF92: XE5071-001
49 Embroidery bobbin thread SA-EBT XC6283-001
50 Embroidery positioning
sticker sheets
SAEPS2 EPS2: XF0763-001
51 Edge sewing sheet × 6 SAESS1 ESS1: XE5094-001
52 Stabilizer material SA519 BM3: XE0806-001
53 Grid sheet set SA507 GS3: X81277-151
54 Chalk pencil XE8568-001
55 USB mouse XE5334-101
56 Pen tablet See page 23
57 LCD cleaning cloth XE4913-001
58 Soft cover XE5111-001
59 Embroidery unit carrying
case
XE3791-001
60 Accessory case XF7275-001
61 Operation manual This manual
62 Operation manual
addendum
XF6300-001
63 Quick reference guide XF6299-001
64 My Custom Design CD XF6585-001
Memo
• Foot controller: Model V
This foot controller can be used on the
machine with product code 882-W07. The
product code is mentioned on the machine
rating plate.
Memo
• Always use accessories recommended for
this machine.
• The screw for the presser foot holder is
available through your authorized dealer
(Part code XA4813-051).
• Included accessories 38, 44, 61 and 62 can
be stored in the machine’s soft cover case.
(In some countries or regions, the soft cover
case is not included in the enclosed
accessories.)
No. Part Name
Part Code
Americas Others
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
20
Options
The following are available as optional accessories
to be purchased separately from your authorized
Brother dealer.
123
456
789
10 11 12
13 14 15
16
No. Part Name
Part Code
Americas Others
1 Border embroidery frame
H 30 cm × W 10 cm
(H 12 inches × W 4 inches)
with Kit 3 upgrade
SABF6000D2 NV1UGK3
2 Border embroidery frame set
H 18 cm × W 10 cm
(H 7 inches × W 4 inches)
SABF6000D BF2:
XE5059-001
3 10 spool stand SA560 TS4:
XE5065-101
4 Wide table and free motion
grip
SATFM6000D
TFM-3:
XE5062-001
5 Embroidery frame set (large)
H 18 cm × W 13 cm
(H 7 inches × W 5 inches)
SA439 EF75:
XC8481-152
6 Embroidery card reader SAECRI
7 Embroidery card –
8 Stabilizer material SA519 BM3:
XE0806-001
Water soluble stabilizer SA520 BM5:
XE0615-001
9 1/4 quilting foot with guide SA185 F057:
XC7416-252
10 Embroidery bobbin thread
(white)
SAEBT EBT-CEN:
X81164-001
Embroidery bobbin thread
(black)
SAEBT999 EBT-CEBN:
XC5520-001
11 Seam guide SA538 SG1:
XC8483-052
12 Embroidery positioning
sticker sheets
SAEPS2 EPS2:
XF0763-001
13 Edge sewing sheet × 5 SAESS1 ESS1:
XE5094-001
14 Protective sheet SAPS6000D PS1:
XF2653001
15 Square embroidery frame
H 15 cm x W 15 cm (H 6
inches x W 6 inches)
SA448
(U.S.A.)
SA448C
(Canada)
SEF150:
XF4163-001
16 Embroidery foot “W” XC8156-651
Memo
• All specifications are correct at the time of
printing. Please be aware that some
specifications may change without notice.
Note
• Embroidery cards purchased in foreign
countries may not work with your machine.
• Visit your nearest authorized Brother dealer
for a complete listing of optional accessories
and embroidery cards available for your
machine.
No. Part Name
Part Code
Americas Others
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
21
Using the Spool Stand
The included spool stand is useful when using
thread spools with a large diameter (cross-wound
thread). The spool stand can hold two spools of
thread.
■ How to assemble the spool stand
a
Fully extend the telescopic thread guide
shaft, and then rotate the shaft until the two
internal stoppers click into place.
b
Insert the telescopic thread guide into the
round hole at the center of the spool
support, and then use a screwdriver to
securely tighten the screw (a) from the
reverse side.
a Screw
123
456
789
No. Part Name Part Code
1 Telescopic thread guide XE0776-001
2 Spool support XE4637-001
3 Spool pin × 2 XA6313-051
4 Screw and washer XC7568-051
5 Spool cap (XL) × 2 XE0779-001
6 Spool holder × 2 XA0679-050
7 Spool cap base × 2 XE0780-001
8 Spool felt × 2 XC7134-051
9 Ring × 4 026030-136
CAUTION
• Do not lift the handle of the machine while the
spool stand is installed.
• Do not push or pull the telescopic thread
guide or spool pins with extreme force,
otherwise damage may result.
• Do not place any object other than spools of
thread on the spool support.
• Do not try to wind thread on the bobbin while
sewing using the spool stand.
Note
• Make sure that the stoppers on the tele-
scopic thread guide shaft are firmly in place
and that the top of the thread guide is
directly above the spool pins. In addition,
check that the shaft is securely tightened in
the spool support.
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
22
c
Firmly insert the two spool pins into the two
holes in the spool support.
d
Open the upper cover of the machine. From
the back of the machine, press in the upper
cover latches (one on each side), and then
pull the upper cover up to remove it from
the machine.
e
Insert the spool stand onto the notches of
the machine.
■ How to remove
a
From the back of the machine, press in the
spool stand latches (one on each side), and
then pull the spool stand up to remove it
from the machine.
b
Attach the upper cover to the machine.
Memo
• See page 52 about the bobbin winding using
the spool stand.
• See page 63 about the upper threading
using the spool stand.
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
23
Using the Pen Tablet
■ Installing a battery in the tablet pen
A battery for the tablet pen is not included with your
machine. Use a new AAA alkaline battery (LR03).
a
Unscrew the upper barrel of the tablet pen.
b
Install a new AAA alkaline battery (LR03) in
the tablet pen with the positive end (+)
pointing up.
c
Screw the upper barrel to the tablet pen.
■ Replacing the pen tip
When the pen tip is worn out, replace with a new
one included with your pen tablet.
a
Grasp the old pen tip firmly with the
included pen tip clip.
Memo
• See page 34 about connecting the pen tab-
let with the sewing machine.
123
45
No. Part Name Part Code
1 Pen tablet XF0178-001
2 Tablet pen XF2797-001
3 Tablet pen holder XF0185-001
4 Extra pen tips (4) XF0183-001
5 Pen tip clip XF0184-001
WARNING
• Do not disassemble or modify the tablet pen/
battery.
• Do not use metallic objects, such as tweezers
or a metallic pen, when changing the battery.
• Do not throw the battery into fire or expose to
heat.
• Remove battery immediately and stop using
the machine if you notice abnormal odor,
heat, discoloration, deformation or anything
unusual while using or storing it.
CAUTION
• Remove the battery if you do not intend to use
tablet pen for an extended period of time.
• Do not set the positive and negative ends of
the battery in the wrong direction.
Note
• Unscrew the upper barrel slowly, so that the
tablet pen will not be damaged.
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
24
b
Gently pull the pen tip straight out.
c
Push in the new pen tip until it is flush with
the tablet pen.
■ Using with My Custom Design
a
Select a favorite picture for creating
embroidery pattern.
b
Insert the picture under the tablet sheet.
c
Activate My Custom Design, then trace the
picture with the tablet pen.
For detailed instructions about operating My
Custom Design, refer to the Operation Manual
(PDF format) stored on the My Custom Design CD.
Note
• When you create the embroidery pattern by
tracing the picture using the pen tablet, the
actual size of the pattern will be bigger than
the tracing picture. Check the size of the
pattern before embroidering, then change
the size of the pattern if needed.
• The pen tablet cannot be used as the USB
mouse while tracing the picture. Operate
with your finger or touch pen (stylus) while
tracing.
Chapter 1
Getting Ready
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF...............26
LCD SCREEN...................................................28
■ Home Page Screen ................................................................... 28
■ Utility Stitch LCD Screen ......................................................... 29
■ Key Functions........................................................................... 30
USB Connectivity.............................................................. 32
■ Using USB Media or Embroidery Card Reader/
USB Card Writer Module*........................................................ 32
■ Connecting the Machine to the Computer ............................... 33
■ Using a USB Mouse.................................................................. 33
■ Clicking a Key .......................................................................... 33
■ Changing Pages ........................................................................ 33
■ Using the Pen Tablet ................................................................34
Using the Machine Setting Mode Key ............................... 35
■ Saving a Settings Screen Image to USB Media.......................... 39
■ Changing the Pointer Shape When a USB Mouse Is Used ........ 39
■ Changing the Screen Saver Image ............................................ 40
■ Selecting the Initial Screen Display ..........................................41
■ Choosing the Display Language................................................ 41
■ Changing the Background Colors
of the Embroidery Patterns.......................................................42
■ Specifying the Size of Pattern Thumbnails................................43
Using the Sewing Machine Help Key ................................ 44
Using the Operation Guide Function................................ 45
Using the Sewing Guide Function..................................... 46
Using the Pattern Explanation Function............................ 47
LOWER THREADING .....................................48
Winding the Bobbin.......................................................... 48
■ Using the Supplemental Spool Pin............................................ 48
■ Using the Spool Pin ..................................................................51
■ Using the Spool Stand ..............................................................52
■ Untangling Thread from Beneath the Bobbin Winder Seat....... 53
Setting the Bobbin ............................................................ 54
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread........................................... 55
UPPER THREADING.......................................57
Upper Threading............................................................... 57
Using the Twin Needle Mode ........................................... 60
Using the Spool Stand....................................................... 63
■ Using the Spool Stand ..............................................................63
Using Threads that Unwind Quickly................................. 64
■ Using the Spool Net .................................................................64
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT ..................65
Removing the Presser Foot................................................ 65
Attaching the Presser Foot ................................................ 65
Attaching the Walking Foot .............................................. 66
CHANGING THE NEEDLE..............................67
About the Needle.............................................................. 69
Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations................................ 69
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF
26
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF
WARNING
• Use only regular household electricity for the power source. Using other power sources may result in fire,
electric shock, or damage to the machine.
• Make sure that the plugs on the power cord are firmly inserted into the electrical outlet and the power
cord receptacle on the machine.
• Do not insert the plug on the power cord into an electrical outlet that is in poor condition.
• Turn the main power to OFF and remove the plug in the following circumstances:
When you are away from the machine
After using the machine
When the power fails during use
When the machine does not operate correctly due to a bad connection or a disconnection
During electrical storms
CAUTION
• Use only the power cord included with this machine.
• Do not use extension cords or multi-plug adapters with many other appliances plugged in to them. Fire or
electric shock may result.
• Do not touch the plug with wet hands. Electric shock may result.
• When unplugging the machine, always turn the main power to OFF first. Always grasp the plug to remove
it from the outlet. Pulling on the cord may damage the cord, or lead to fire or electric shock.
• Do not allow the power cord to be cut, damaged, modified, forcefully bent, pulled, twisted, or bundled.
Do not place heavy objects on the cord. Do not subject the cord to heat. These things may damage the
cord, or cause fire or electric shock. If the cord or plug is damaged, take the machine to your authorized
dealer for repairs before continuing use.
• Unplug the power cord if the machine is not to be used for a long period of time. Otherwise, a fire may
result.
• When leaving the machine unattended, either the main switch of the machine should be turned to OFF or
the plug must be removed from the socket-outlet.
• When servicing the machine or when removing covers, the machine must be unplugged.
• For U.S.A only
This appliance has a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). To reduce the risk of electrical
shock, this plug is intended to fit in a polarized outlet only one way.
If the plug does not fit fully in the outlet, reverse the plug. If it still does not fit, contact a qualified
electrician to install the proper outlet. Do not modify the plug in any way.
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF
Getting Ready
27
1
a
Insert the power supply cord into the power
cord receptacle, then insert the plug into a
wall outlet.
a Main power switch
b Power supply cord
b
Turn the main power switch to “I” to turn
on the machine.
a OFF
b ON
c
Turn the main power switch to “O” to turn
off the machine.
Memo
• When the machine is turned on, the needle
and the feed dogs will make sound when
they move; this is not a malfunction.
LCD SCREEN
28
LCD SCREEN
When the machine is turned on, the opening movie is played. Touch anywhere on the screen for the
home page screen to be displayed. Touch the LCD screen or a key with your finger or the included touch
pen to select a machine function.
■ Home Page Screen
Note
• When the straight stitch needle plate is on the machine, the needle will automatically move to the mid-
dle position.
Memo
• Only touch the screen with your finger or the included touch pen. Do not use a sharp pencil, screw-
driver, or other hard or sharp object. It is not necessary to press hard on the screen. Pressing too hard
or using a sharp object may damage the screen.
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
a Sewing key Press this key to sew utility stitches or character or decorative stitch
patterns.
See the “Key
Functions” table.
30
b Embroidery key Attach the embroidery unit and press this key to embroider patterns. 186
c Embroidery Edit key Press this key to combine embroidery patterns. With the embroidery
edit functions, you can also create original embroidery patterns or frame
patterns.
264
b
c
a
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
29
1
■ Utility Stitch LCD Screen
Press a key with your finger to select the stitch pattern, to select a machine function, or to select an
operation indicated on the key.
a Shows single or twin needle mode setting, and the needle stop position.
b Shows the name and code number of the selected stitch.
c Shows the presser foot code. Attach the presser foot indicated in this display before sewing.
d Shows a preview of the selected stitch.
When shown at 100%, the stitch appears in the screen at nearly its actual size.
e Shows the stitch patterns.
f Shows additional pages that can be displayed (Illustration shows page 1 of 2.).
* All key functions of the LCD are explained in the “Key Functions” table on the following page.
Single needle/down position Single needle/up position
Twin needle/down position Twin needle/up position
a
b
c
d
e
f
LCD SCREEN
30
■ Key Functions
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
a Utility stitch key Press this key to select a straight stitch, zigzag stitch, buttonhole, blind hem
stitch, or other stitches commonly used in garment construction.
91
b Character/Decorative
stitch key
Press this key to select character or decorative stitch patterns. 156
c Screen lock key Press this key to lock the screen.When the screen is locked, the various
settings, such as the stitch width and stitch length, are locked and cannot be
changed. Press this key again to unlock the settings.
86
d Image key Press this key to display an enlarged image of the selected stitch pattern. 92
e Home page screen
key
Press this key anytime it is displayed to return to the home page screen and
select a different category - “Sewing”, “Embroidery” or “Embroidery edit”.
28
f Stitch selection
display
Press the key for the pattern you want to sew. Use
to change to different stitch groups.
91
g Edge sewing key Using the built-in camera, press this key to measure the width of the area from
the edge of the fabric to the stitch and set the camera for edge sewing.
148
h Needle mode
selection key (single/
double)
Press this key to select twin needle sewing mode. The sewing mode changes
between single needle mode and twin needle mode each time you press the
key. If the key display is light gray, the selected stitch pattern cannot be sewn in
the twin needle mode.
60
i Retrieve key Press this key to retrieve a saved pattern. 93
j Manual memory key Change the stitch pattern settings (zigzag width and stitch length, thread
tension, automatic thread cutting or automatic reinforcement stitching, etc.),
then save them by pressing this key. Five sets of settings can be saved for a
single stitch pattern.
92
k Reset key Press this key to return the selected stitch pattern saved settings to the default
settings.
78-79
a
b e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
mno
v
q
s
p
u
r
t
c
x
d
w
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
31
1
l Presser foot/Needle
exchange key
Press this key before changing the needle, the presser foot, etc. This key locks
all key and button functions to prevent operation of the machine.
65-68
m Sewing machine help
key
Press this key to see explanations on how to use the machine. 44
n Camera view key Touch this key to check the needle location as it is shown on the screen through
the built in camera.
87
o Machine setting mode
key
Press this key to change the needle stop position, change the volume of
operation beep, adjust the pattern or screen, and change other machine
settings.
35
p Stitch width and stitch
length key
Shows the zigzag width and stitch length settings of the currently selected stitch
pattern. You can use the plus and minus keys to adjust the zigzag width and
stitch length settings.
78
q Thread tension key Shows the automatic thread tension setting of the currently selected stitch
pattern. You can use the plus and minus keys to change the thread tension
settings.
79
r Mirror image key Press this key to create a mirror image of the selected stitch pattern. If the key
display is light gray, a mirror image of the selected stitch pattern cannot be
sewn.
91
s Automatic thread
cutting key
Press this key to set the automatic thread cutting function. Set the automatic
thread cutting function before sewing to have the machine automatically sew
reinforcement stitches at the beginning and end of sewing (depending on the
pattern, the machine may sew reverse stitches) and trim the threads after
sewing.
82
t Automatic
reinforcement stitch
key
Press this key to use the automatic reinforcement stitching (reverse stitching)
setting. If you select this setting before sewing, the machine will automatically
sew reinforcement stitches at the beginning and end of sewing (depending on
the pattern, the machine may sew reverse stitches).
81
u Free motion mode key Press this key to enter free motion sewing mode.
The presser foot is raised to an appropriate height and the feed dog is lowered
for free motion quilting.
116
v Pivot key Press this key to select the pivot setting. When the pivot setting is selected,
stopping the machine lowers the needle and slightly raises the presser foot
automatically. In addition, when sewing is restarted, the presser foot is
automatically lowered.
• If this key appears as , the pivot function cannot be used.
• Be sure the needle position on page 36 of Machine Settings is set to the
down position.
84
w Pattern display size Shows the approximate size of the pattern selected.
: Nearly the same size as the sewn pattern
: 1/2 the size of the sewn pattern
: 1/4 the size of the sewn pattern
* The actual size of the sewn pattern may differ depending on the type of
fabric and thread that is used.
91
x Scroll key
Press or , to move one page at a time, or touch anywhere on the bar
to jump ahead for additional pages of stitches.
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
LCD SCREEN
32
USB Connectivity
You can perform many functions using the USB
ports on the machine. Connect the appropriate
devices according to the feature of each ports.
a Primary (top) USB port for media or card Reader/
USB card writer module* (USB2.0)
* If you have purchased the PE-DESIGN Ver5 or later,
PE-DESIGN Lite or PED-BASIC, you can plug the
included USB card writer module into the machine
as an embroidery card reader, and recall patterns.
b USB port for mouse (USB1.1)
c USB port for computer
■ Using USB Media or Embroidery
Card Reader/USB Card Writer
Module*
When sending or reading patterns using the USB
media or the embroidery card Reader/USB card
writer module*, connect the device to the primary
(top) USB port.
The primary (top) USB port processes the data faster
than the other ports.
* If you have purchased the PE-DESIGN Ver5 or later,
PE-DESIGN Lite or PED-BASIC, you can plug the
included USB card writer module into the machine
as an embroidery card reader, and recall patterns.
a Primary (top) USB port
b USB media
a Primary (top) USB port
b Embroidery card Reader/USB card writer module*
Note
• The processing speed may vary by port
selection and quantity of data.
• Do not insert anything other than USB
media into the USB media port. Otherwise,
the USB media drive may be damaged.
Note
• Two USB media cannot be used with this
machine at the same time. If two USB media
are inserted, only the USB media inserted
first is detected.
• Use only an embroidery card reader
designed for this machine. Using an
unauthorized embroidery card reader may
cause your machine to operate incorrectly.
• Embroidery patterns cannot be saved from
the machine to an embroidery card inserted
into a connected USB card writer module.
Memo
• USB media is widely used, however some
USB media may not be usable with this
machine. Please visit our website for more
details.
• Depending on the type of USB media being
used, either directly plug the USB device
into the machine’s USB port or plug the USB
media Reader/Writer into the machine’s
USB port.
• You can plug the optional embroidery card
Reader/USB card writer module* into the
primary (top) or center port, when the mouse
or the pen tablet is not connected.
• You can plug a USB media into the center
port, but the primary (top) USB port
processes the data faster. It is
recommended to use the primary (top) USB
port.
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
33
1
■ Connecting the Machine to the
Computer
Using the included USB cable, the sewing machine
can be connected to your computer.
a USB port for computer
b USB cable connector
■ Using a USB Mouse
The USB mouse, connected to the sewing
machine, can be used to perform a variety of
operations in the screens.
Connect a USB mouse to the USB 1.1 port marked
with . You can also connect a USB mouse to
the other USB port (USB 2.0).
a USB port for mouse
b USB mouse
■ Clicking a Key
When the mouse is connected, the pointer appears
on the screen. Move the mouse to position the
pointer over the desired key, and then click the left
mouse button.
a Pointer
■ Changing Pages
Rotate the mouse wheel to switch through the tabs
of the pattern selection screens.
Note
• The connectors on the USB cable can only
be inserted into a port in one direction. If it is
difficult to insert the connector, do not insert
it with force. Check the orientation of the
connector.
• For details on the position of the USB port
on the computer (or USB hub), refer to the
instruction manual for the corresponding
equipment.
Note
• Do not perform operations with the mouse at
the same time that you are touching the
screen with your finger or the included touch
pen.
• A USB mouse can be connected or discon-
nected at any time.
• Only the left mouse button and its wheel can
be used to perform operations. No other but-
tons can be used.
• The mouse pointer does not appear in the
camera view window, the screen saver or
the home page screen.
Memo
• Double-clicking has no effect.
Memo
• If page numbers and a vertical scroll bar for
additional pages are displayed, rotate the
mouse wheel or click the left mouse button
with the pointer on / or
/ to
display the previous or next page.
a
LCD SCREEN
34
■ Using the Pen Tablet
The included pen tablet, connected to the sewing
machine, can be used when creating your original
embroidery pattern with My Custom Design. Also,
you can use the pen tablet as a USB mouse when
operating your sewing machine. Connect the pen
tablet to the USB 1.1 port marked with . You can
also connect the pen tablet to the other USB port
(USB 2.0) when not using the My Custom Design
program.
a USB port for mouse
b Pen tablet
After connecting the pen tablet to the sewing
machine, it is activated when the pointer appears on
the screen.
The blue LED light on the tablet is the main
indicator for hardware operation. The LED normally
stays off, and will turn on when you touch the
surface of the pen tablet with the tablet pen.
a Working area of the pen tablet
b Blue LED light
Note
• The pen tablet can be connected or
disconnected at any time.
• Do not perform any operations with the pen
tablet at the same time that you are touching
the machine’s LCD screen with your finger
or the included touch pen (stylus).
a
Memo
• Working area of the pen tablet differs
depending on performing functions of the
sewing machine.
a Working area for normal machine operation
b Working area when drawing with the pen tablet
using the My Custom Design program
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
35
1
Using the Machine Setting Mode Key
Press to change the default machine settings (needle stop position, embroidery speed, opening
display, etc.). To display the different settings screens, press for “Sewing settings”, for
“General settings” or for “Embroidery settings”.
Sewing settings
* Refer to Operation Manual Addendum, for the detailed instruction of the multi-function foot controller setting.
a Select whether to use the sewing speed controller to determine the zigzag width (see page 115).
b Make adjustments to character or decorative stitch patterns (see page 162).
c Adjust the presser foot height. (Select the height of the presser foot when the presser foot is raised.)
d Adjust the presser foot pressure. (The higher the number, the greater the pressure will be. Set the pressure at “3” for
normal sewing.)
e Select whether “1-01 Straight stitch (Left)” or “1-03 Straight stitch (Middle)” is the utility stitch that is automatically
selected when the machine is turned on.
f Change the height of the presser foot when sewing is stopped when the pivot setting is selected (see page 84).
Adjust the presser foot to one of the three heights (3.2 mm, 5.0 mm and 7.5 mm).
g Change the height of the presser foot when the machine is set to free motion sewing mode (see page 116).
h When set to “ON”, the thickness of the fabric is automatically detected by an internal sensor while sewing. This
enables the fabric to be fed smoothly (see pages 76 and 85).
i Press to save a settings screen image to USB media (see page 39).
Memo
• Press or to display a different settings screen.
a
b
c
d
e
i
f
g
h
i
LCD SCREEN
36
General settings
a Select the needle stop position (the needle position when the machine is not operating) to be up or down. Select the
down position when using the pivot key.
b Select the operation of the “Needle Position - Stitch Placement” button from the following two sequences (see page
86).
Each press of the “Needle Position - Stitch Placement” button:
“ON” – raises the needle, stops it at a nearly lowered position, then lowers it
“OFF” – raises the needle, then lowers it
c Change the brightness of the Needle Area and Work Area Lights.
d Change the speaker volume.
e Change the shape of the pointer when a USB mouse is used (see page 39).
f Turn both the upper and bobbin thread sensor “ON” or “OFF”. If it is turned “OFF”, the machine can be used without
thread.
g Select the length of time until the screen saver appears. A setting between “OFF” (0) and “60” minutes can be set in
1-minute increments.
h Change the image of the screen saver (see page 40).
i Select the initial screen that is displayed when the machine is turned on (see page 41).
j Press “ON” when using the embroidery data creation software My Custom Design. Refer to the instruction manual
(PDF format) stored in the My Custom Design CD included in this machine.
k Change the display language (see page 41).
l Change the screen display brightness (see page 342).
CAUTION
• If “Upper and Bobbin Thread Sensor” is set to “OFF”, remove the upper thread. If the machine is used
with the upper thread threaded, the machine will not be able to detect if the thread has become tangled.
Continuing to use the machine with tangled thread may cause damage.
a
d
e
f
b
c
g
i
j
k
h
l
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
37
1
m Use to certify your sewing machine when you
purchase one of the upgrade kits.
n Display the service count which is a reminder to
take your machine in for regular servicing. (Contact
your authorized dealer for details.)
o Display the total number of stitches sewn on this
machine.
p The “No.” is the internal machine number for the
embroidery and sewing machine.
q Display the program version. “Version 1” shows the
program version of the LCD panel, “Version 2”
shows the program version of the machine.
r Press to save a settings screen image to USB
media (see page 39).
Embroidery settings
* Refer to Operation Manual Addendum, for the detailed instruction of the embroidery foot “W2” setting.
a Select from among 14 embroidery frame displays
(see page 238).
b Change the thread color display on the embroidery
screen; thread number, color name (see page
237).
c When the thread number “#123” is selected, select
from six thread brands (see page 237).
d Adjust the maximum embroidery speed setting
(see page 237).
e Adjust the upper thread tension for embroidering
(see page 233).
f Select the height of the embroidery foot during
embroidering (see page 200).
n
q
p
m
r
o
Memo
• The latest version of software is installed in your machine. Check with your local authorized Brother
dealer or at “ http://solutions.brother.com ” for available updates (see page 363).
a
d
e
f
b
c
LCD SCREEN
38
g Change the display units (mm/inch).
h Change the initial mode of the display (embroidery/embroidery edit).
i Change the color of the background for the embroidery display area (see page 42).
j Change the color of the background for the thumbnail area (see page 42).
k Adjust the distance between the pattern and the basting stitching (see page 299).
l Adjust the distance between the appliqué pattern and the outline (see page 300).
m Use to display the fabric while aligning the embroidery position (see page 211).
n Press to specify the size of pattern thumbnails (see page 43).
o Press to save a settings screen image to USB media (see page 39).
g
k
l
h
i
j
o
m
n
o
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
39
1
■ Saving a Settings Screen Image to
USB Media
An image of the settings screen can be saved as a
BMP file.
A maximum of 100 images can be saved on a single
USB media at one time.
a
Insert the USB media into the primary (top)
USB port on the right side of the machine.
a Primary (top) USB port
b USB media
b
Press .
→ The Sewing settings screen appears. Select the
settings screen page that you want to save the screen
image of.
c
Press .
→ The image file will be saved to the USB media.
d
Remove the USB media, and then check the
saved image using a computer.
The files for Settings screen images are saved with the
name “S**.BMP”.
* “**” in the name “S**.BMP” will automatically be
replaced with a number between 00 and 99.
■ Changing the Pointer Shape When a
USB Mouse Is Used
In the settings screen, the shape can be selected for
the pointer that appears when a USB mouse is
connected. Depending upon the background color,
select the desired shape from the three that are
available.
a
Press .
→ The Sewing settings screen appears.
b
Press .
→ The General settings screen appears.
c
Display 3/8 (page 3 of 8) of the General
settings screen.
d
Use and to choose the pointer
shape from the three settings available
(, and ).
e
Press to return to the original screen.
Note
• If 100 image files have already been saved
on the USB media, the following message
appears. In this case, delete a file from the
USB media or use different USB media.
Memo
• For details on changing the background
color, refer to “Changing the Background
Colors of the Embroidery Patterns” on page
42.
Memo
• The setting remains selected even if the
machine is turned off.
LCD SCREEN
40
■ Changing the Screen Saver Image
Instead of the default image, you can select your
own personal images for the screen saver of your
machine.
Before changing the screen saver image, prepare the
image on your computer or USB media.
Compatible image files
a
Press .
→ The Sewing settings screen appears.
b
Press .
→ The General settings screen appears.
c
Display 4/8 (page 4 of 8) of the General
settings screen.
d
Press .
e
Press .
f
Connect the USB media or the computer
(using a USB cable) that contains your
personal image to the USB port of the
machine.
* See page 32 about USB connectivity.
g
Press to select the first image.
* The images will appear in a list in this screen. Select
the desired number to specify the image.
h
Select the device that is connected.
* Press when connecting USB media to the
primary (top) USB port.
* Press when connecting USB media to the
center USB port.
* Press when connecting a computer using a
USB cable, and then copy your personal images into
“Removable Disk”, which appears on the desktop of
the computer.
→ A list of your personal images appear on the screen.
Format
JPEG format (.jpg)
File size
Max. 150 KB for each image
File dimension
480 × 800 pixels or less, (If the width is
more than 480 pixels, the image imported
will be reduced to a width of 480 pixels.)
Number allowed
5 or less
Note
• When using USB media, make sure that it
contains only your own personal images to
be selected for the screen saver.
• Folders are recognized. Open the folder that
holds your personal images.
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
41
1
* Press to delete the selected image.
* Press to view the previous page.
i
Press a file name to select image and then
press .
→ The selected image is stored on your machine.
* Press to view the previous page.
j
Repeat the procedure from step g to select
the remaining images.
k
Press to return to the original screen.
■ Selecting the Initial Screen Display
The Initial screen that appears on the machine can
be changed.
a
Press .
→ The Sewing settings screen appears.
b
Press .
→ The General settings screen appears.
c
Display 4/8 (page 4 of 8) of the General
settings screen.
d
Use and to select the setting for the
initial screen display.
* Opening Screen: When the machine is turned on,
the home page screen appears after the opening
movie screen is touched.
* Home Page: When the machine is turned on, the
home page screen appears.
* Sewing/Embroidery Screen: When the machine is
turned on, the Embroidery screen appears if the
embroidery unit is attached to the machine, or the
sewing screen appears if the embroidery unit is not
attached to the machine.
e
Press to return to the original screen.
■ Choosing the Display Language
a
Press .
→ The Sewing settings screen appears.
b
Press .
→ The General settings screen appears.
c
Display 4/8 (page 4 of 8) of the General
settings screen.
d
Use and to choose the display
language.
a Display language
a
LCD SCREEN
42
e
Press to return to the original screen.
■ Changing the Background Colors of
the Embroidery Patterns
In the settings screen, the background colors can be
changed for the embroidery pattern and pattern
thumbnails. Depending on the pattern color, select
the desired background color from the 66 settings
available. Different background colors can be
selected for the embroidery pattern and pattern
thumbnails.
a
Press .
→ The Sewing settings screen appears.
b
Press .
→ The Embroidery settings screen appears.
c
Display 7/8 (page 7 of 8) of the Embroidery
settings screen.
d
Press .
a Embroidery pattern background
b Pattern thumbnails background
e
Select the background color from the 66
settings available.
a Embroidery pattern background
b Selected color
a Pattern thumbnails background
b Selected color
f
Press to return to the original screen.
Memo
• When using the Embroidery or Embroidery
Edit, touch to directly access the
Embroidery settings screen.
a
b
Memo
• The setting remains selected even if the
machine is turned off.
b
a
b
a
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
43
1
■ Specifying the Size of Pattern
Thumbnails
The thumbnails for selecting an embroidery pattern
can be set to be displayed at the normal size or a
larger size. The larger size is 1.5 times the normal
size.
a
Press .
→ The Sewing settings screen appears.
b
Press .
→ The Embroidery settings screen appears.
c
Display 8/8 (page 8 of 8) of the Embroidery
settings screen.
d
Press or to select the desired
thumbnail size.
Note
• When thumbnail size setting has been
changed the pattern selection screen will not
immediately reflect the chosen size. To view
the patterns with the new thumbnail size,
return to the category selection screen, and
then select the pattern category again.
LCD SCREEN
44
Using the Sewing Machine Help Key
Press to open the sewing machine help screen. Three functions are available from the screen
shown below.
a Press this key to see explanation for upper threading, winding the bobbin, changing the presser foot, preparing to
embroider a pattern, and how to use the machine (see page 47).
b Press this key to select utility stitches when you are not sure which stitch to use or how to sew the stitch (see page
45).
c Press this key to see an explanation of the stitch selected (see page 46).
a
b
c
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
45
1
Using the Operation Guide Function
Press to open the screen shown below. Six categories are displayed at the top of the screen.
Press a key to see more information about that category.
displays information about
the main parts of the machine and their
functions. This is the first screen displayed
when you press .
displays information about
the operation buttons.
displays information about
threading the machine, changing presser feet,
etc. Some of the functions are described in
the movies. Watch these movies for a better
understanding of the functions.
displays information about
attaching the embroidery unit, preparing
fabric for embroidering, etc.
Some of the functions are described in the
movies. Watch these movies for a better
understanding of the functions.
displays troubleshooting
information.
displays information about
cleaning the machine, etc.
Some of the functions are described in the
movies. Watch these movies for a better
understanding of the functions.
LCD SCREEN
46
Example: Displaying information about
upper threading
a
Press .
b
Press .
c
Press .
→ The lower half of the screen will change.
d
Press (upper threading).
→ The screen shows instructions for threading the
machine.
e
Read the instructions.
* Press to see a video of the displayed
instructions.
Press under movie to go back to the
beginning. Press to pause. Press to
restart after pause. Press to close out the
movie.
* Press to view the next page.
* Press to view the previous page.
f
Press to return to the original screen.
Using the Sewing Guide Function
The sewing guide function can be used to select
patterns from the Utility Stitch screen.
Use this function when you are not sure which
stitch to use for your application, or to get advice
about sewing particular stitches. For example, if
you want to sew overcasting, but you do not know
which stitch to use or how to sew the stitch, you
can use this screen to get advice. We recommend
that beginners use this method to select stitches.
a
Enter Utility Stitch category from the home
page.
b
Press .
c
Press .
→ The advice screen is displayed.
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
47
1
d
Press the key of the category whose sewing
instructions you wish to view.
* Press to return to the original screen.
e
Read the explanations and select the
appropriate stitch.
→ The screen displays directions for sewing the
selected stitch. Follow the directions to sew the
stitch.
Using the Pattern Explanation
Function
If you want to know more about the uses of a stitch
pattern, select the pattern and press and
then to see an explanation of the
stitch selection.
Example: Displaying information about
a
Press .
b
Press .
c
Press .
→ The screen shows information.
d
Press to return to the original screen.
Note
• With the pattern explanation function,
descriptions can be displayed for the
patterns available on the Utility Stitch and
Character/Decorative Stitch screens.
• Descriptions are displayed for each pattern
in the Utility Stitch screen. Description for
the Character/Decorative Stitch category is
also displayed.
• If the key appears in gray, the
pattern explanation function cannot be used.
Memo
• The settings remain displayed to allow you
to fine tune the stitch.
LOWER THREADING
48
LOWER THREADING
Winding the Bobbin
Press → → →
→ in this order to display a
video example of bobbin winding on the LCD (see
page 46). Follow the steps explained below to
complete the operation.
■ Using the Supplemental Spool Pin
With this machine, you can wind the bobbin during
sewing. While using the main spool pin to sew
embroidery, you can conveniently wind the bobbin
using the supplemental spool pin.
a Supplemental spool pin
a
Turn the main power to ON and open the
top cover.
b
Align the groove in the bobbin with the
spring on the bobbin winder shaft, and set
the bobbin on the shaft.
a Groove in the bobbin
b Spring on the shaft
CAUTION
• The included bobbin was designed specifically
for this sewing machine. If bobbins from other
models are used, the machine will not operate
correctly. Use only the included bobbin or
bobbins of the same type (part code: SA156,
(SFB: XA5539-151)).
* Actual size
a This model
b Other models
c 11.5 mm (approx. 7/16 inch)
LOWER THREADING
Getting Ready
49
1
c
Set the supplemental spool pin in the “up”
position.
a Supplemental spool pin
d
Place the spool of thread on the
supplemental spool pin, so that thread
unrolls from the front. Push the spool cap
onto the spool pin as far as possible to
secure the thread spool.
a Spool cap
b Spool pin
c Thread spool
e
With your right hand, hold the thread near
the thread spool. With your left hand, hold
the end of the thread, and use both hands to
pass the thread through the thread guide.
a Thread guide
f
Pass the thread around the pre-tension disk
making sure that the thread is under the
pre-tension disk.
a Pre-tension disk
→ Make sure that the thread passes under the pre-
tension disk.
b Pre-tension disk
c Pull it in as far as possible.
→ Check to make sure thread is securely set between
pre-tension disks.
CAUTION
• If the thread spool and/or spool cap are set
incorrectly, the thread may tangle on the spool
pin and cause the needle to break.
• Use the spool cap (large, medium, or small)
that is closest in size to the thread spool. If a
spool cap smaller than the thread spool is
used, the thread may become caught in the slit
on the end of the spool and cause the needle
to break.
Memo
• When sewing with fine, cross-wound thread,
use the small spool cap, and leave a small
space between the cap and the thread
spool.
a Spool cap (small)
b Thread spool (cross-wound thread)
c Space
• If a spool of thread whose core is 12 mm
(1/2 inch) in diameter and 75 mm (3 inches)
high is inserted onto the spool pin, use the
mini spool cap.
a Spool cap (special)
b 12 mm (1/2 inch)
c 75 mm (3 inches)
LOWER THREADING
50
g
Wind the thread clockwise around the
bobbin 5-6 times.
h
Pass the end of the thread through the guide
slit in the bobbin winder seat, and pull the
thread to the right to cut the thread with
the cutter.
a Guide slit (with built-in cutter)
b Bobbin winder seat
i
Set the bobbin winding switch to the left,
until it clicks into place.
a Bobbin winding switch
→ The bobbin winding window appears.
j
Press .
→ Bobbin winding starts automatically. The bobbin
stops rotating when bobbin winding is completed.
The bobbin winding switch will automatically return
to its original position.
CAUTION
• Be sure to follow the process described. If the
thread is not cut with the cutter, and the
bobbin is wound, when the thread runs low it
may tangle around the bobbin and cause the
needle to break.
Memo
• Sliding the bobbin winding switch to the left
switches the machine into bobbin winding
mode.
Note
• changes to while the bobbin
is winding.
• Stay near the machine while winding the
bobbin to make sure the bobbin thread is
being wound correctly. If the bobbin thread
is wound incorrectly, press immedi-
ately to stop the bobbin winding.
• The sound of winding the bobbin with stiff
thread, such as nylon thread for quilting,
may be different from the one produced
when winding normal thread; however, this
is not a sign of a malfunction.
Memo
• You can change the winding speed by
pressing (to decrease) or (to
increase) in the bobbin winding window.
• Press to minimize the bobbin winding
window. Then, you can perform other
operations, such as selecting a stitch or
adjusting the thread tension, while the
bobbin is being wound.
• Press (in top right of the LCD screen)
to display the bobbin winding window again.
LOWER THREADING
Getting Ready
51
1
k
Cut the thread with cutter and remove the
bobbin.
■ Using the Spool Pin
You can use the main spool pin to wind the bobbin
before sewing. You cannot use this spool pin to
wind the bobbin while sewing.
a
Turn the main power to ON and open the
top cover.
b
Align the groove in the bobbin with the
spring on the bobbin winder shaft, and set
the bobbin on the shaft.
a Groove in the bobbin
b Spring on the shaft
c
Pivot the spool pin so that it angles upward.
Set the thread spool on the spool pin so that
the thread unwinds from the front of the
spool.
a Spool pin
b Spool cap
c Thread spool
d Spool felt
d
Push the spool cap onto the spool pin as far
as possible, then return the spool pin to its
original position.
e
While holding the thread with both hands,
pull the thread up from under the thread
guide plate.
a Thread guide plate
Memo
• When removing the bobbin, do not pull on
the bobbin winder seat. Doing so could
loosen or remove the bobbin winder seat,
and could result in damage to the machine.
CAUTION
• Setting the bobbin improperly may cause the
thread tension to loosen, breaking the needle
and possibly resulting in injury.
LOWER THREADING
52
f
Pass the thread through the thread guide.
a Thread guide
g
Pass the thread around the pre-tension disk
making sure that the thread is under the
pre-tension disk.
a Thread guide
b Pre-tension disk
h
Follow steps g through k on page 50
through 51.
■ Using the Spool Stand
To wind thread on the bobbin while the spool stand
is installed, pass the thread from the spool through
the thread guide on the telescopic thread guide, and
then wind the bobbin according to steps
e through
k of “Using the Supplemental Spool Pin”on
page 49 to page 51.
Memo
• See page 21 to assemble the spool stand.
• See page 63 to thread the machine using
the spool stand.
CAUTION
• When winding thread on the bobbin, do not
cross the bobbin winding thread with the
upper thread in the thread guides.
LOWER THREADING
Getting Ready
53
1
■ Untangling Thread from Beneath the
Bobbin Winder Seat
If the bobbin winding starts when the thread is not
passed through the pre-tension disk correctly, the
thread may become tangled beneath the bobbin
winder seat.
Wind off the thread according to the following
procedure.
a Thread
b Bobbin winder seat
a
If the thread becomes tangled under the
bobbin winder seat, press once to
stop the bobbin winding.
b
Cut the thread with scissors near the pre-
tension disk.
a Pre-tension disk
c
Push the bobbin winder switch to the right,
and then raise the bobbin at least 10 cm
(4 inches) from the shaft.
d
Cut the thread near the bobbin and hold the
thread end with your left hand. Unwind the
thread clockwise near the bobbin winder
seat with your right hand as shown below.
e
Wind the bobbin again.
CAUTION
• Do not remove the bobbin winder seat even if
the thread becomes tangled under the bobbin
winder seat. It may result in injuries.
Note
• Make sure that the thread passes through
the pre-tension disk correctly (page 49).
LOWER THREADING
54
Setting the Bobbin
Press → → →
→ in this order to display a
video example of the operation on the LCD (see
page 46). Follow the steps explained below to
complete the operation.
a
Press to lock all keys and buttons.
b
Slide the bobbin cover latch to the right.
a Bobbin cover
b Latch
→ The bobbin cover opens.
c
Remove the bobbin cover.
d
Hold the bobbin with your right hand and
hold the end of the thread with your left
hand.
e
Set the bobbin in the bobbin case so that
the thread unwinds to the left.
f
Hold the bobbin lightly with your right
hand, and then guide the thread with your
left hand.
CAUTION
• Use a bobbin thread that has been correctly
wound. Otherwise, the needle may break or
the thread tension will be incorrect.
• The included bobbin was designed specifically
for this sewing machine. If bobbins from other
models are used, the machine will not operate
correctly. Use only the included bobbin or
bobbins of the same type (part code: SA156,
(SFB: XA5539-151)).
* Actual size
a This model
b Other models
c 11.5 mm (approx. 7/16 inch)
• Before inserting or changing the bobbin, be
sure to press in the LCD, otherwise
injuries may occur if the “Start/Stop” button
or any other button is pressed and the
machine starts sewing.
LOWER THREADING
Getting Ready
55
1
g
Pass the thread through the guide, and then
pull the thread out toward the front.
a Cutter
→ The cutter cuts the thread.
h
Insert the tab in the lower-left corner of the
bobbin cover (1), and then lightly press
down on the right side to close the cover
(2).
i
Press to unlock all keys and
buttons.
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread
There may be some sewing applications where
you want to pull up the bobbin thread; for
example, when making gathers, darts, or doing
free motion quilting or embroidery.
a
Guide the bobbin thread through the
groove, following the arrow in the
illustration.
* Do not cut the thread with the cutter.
* Do not replace the bobbin cover.
b
While holding the upper thread, press the
“Needle Position” button to lower the
needle.
a “Needle Position” button
c
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.
d
Press to lock all keys and buttons.
e
Gently pull the upper thread. A loop of the
bobbin thread will come out of the hole in
the needle plate.
Note
• If the thread is not correctly inserted through
the tension spring of the bobbin case, it may
cause incorrect thread tension. (see page
79)
a Tension spring
CAUTION
• Be sure to hold down the bobbin with your
finger and unwind the bobbin thread
correctly. Otherwise, the thread may break or
the thread tension will be incorrect.
Memo
• You can pull up the bobbin thread after
threading the upper thread (“UPPER
THREADING” on page 57).
LOWER THREADING
56
f
Pull up the bobbin thread, pass it under the
presser foot and pull it about
100 mm (approx. 3-4 inches) toward the
back of the machine, making it even with
the upper thread.
a Upper thread
b Bobbin thread
g
Replace the bobbin cover.
h
Press to unlock all keys and
buttons.
UPPER THREADING
Getting Ready
57
1
UPPER THREADING
Upper Threading
Press → → →
→ in this order to display a
video example of the operation on the LCD (see
page 46). Follow the steps explained below to
complete the operation.
a
Turn the main power to ON.
b
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
raise the presser foot.
→ The upper thread shutter opens so the machine can
be threaded.
a Upper thread shutter
c
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.
CAUTION
• Be sure to thread the machine properly.
Improper threading can cause the thread to
tangle and break the needle, leading to injury.
• When using the walking foot, the side cutter or
accessories not included with this machine,
attach the accessory to the machine after
threading the machine.
Memo
• The automatic threading function can be
used with sewing machine needle sizes 75/
11 through 100/16.
• Thread such as transparent nylon monofila-
ment thread and thread with a thickness of
130/20 or thicker cannot be used with the
automatic threading function.
• The automatic threading function cannot be
used with the wing needle or the twin nee-
dle.
Memo
• This machine is equipped with an upper
thread shutter, allowing you to check that
the upper threading is performed correctly.
Note
• If you try to thread the needle automatically
without raising the needle, the thread may
not thread correctly.
UPPER THREADING
58
d
Pivot the spool pin so that it angles upward.
Set the thread spool on the spool pin so that
the thread unwinds from the front of the
spool.
a Spool pin
b Spool cap
c Thread spool
d Spool felt
e
Push the spool cap onto the spool pin as far
as possible, then return the spool pin to its
original position.
f
While holding the thread with both hands,
pull the thread up from under the thread
guide plate.
a Thread guide plate
g
While holding the thread in your right
hand, pass the thread through the thread
guide in the direction indicated.
h
Guide the thread down, up, then down
through the groove, as shown in the
illustration.
CAUTION
• If the thread spool and/or spool cap are set
incorrectly, the thread may tangle on the spool
pin and cause the needle to break.
• Use the spool cap (large, medium, or small)
that is closest in size to the thread spool. If a
spool cap smaller than the thread spool is
used, the thread may become caught in the slit
on the end of the spool and cause the needle
to break.
Memo
• When sewing with fine, cross-wound thread,
use the small spool cap, and leave a small
space between the cap and the thread
spool.
a Spool cap (small)
b Thread spool (cross-wound thread)
c Space
• If a spool of thread whose core is 12 mm
(1/2 inch) in diameter and 75 mm (3 inches)
high is inserted onto the spool pin, use the
mini spool cap.
a Spool cap (special)
b 12 mm (1/2 inch)
c 75 mm (3 inches)
UPPER THREADING
Getting Ready
59
1
i
Pass the thread through the needle bar
thread guide (marked “6”) by holding the
thread with both hands and guiding it as
shown in the illustration.
a Needle bar thread guide
j
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
lower presser foot.
k
Pass the thread through the thread guide
disks (marked “7”). Make sure that the
thread passes through the groove in the
thread guide.
a Groove in thread guide
l
Pull the thread up through the thread cutter
to cut the thread, as shown in the
illustration.
a Thread cutter
m
Press the “Automatic Threading” button to
have the machine automatically thread the
needle.
→ The thread passes through the eye of the needle.
Memo
• Look in the upper groove area to check if the
thread catches on the take-up lever visible
inside the upper groove area.
a Look in the upper groove area
Note
• When using thread that quickly winds off the
spool, such as metallic thread, it may be dif-
ficult to thread the needle if the thread is cut.
Therefore, instead of using the thread cutter,
pull out about 80 mm (approx. 3 inches) of
thread after passing it through the thread
guide disks (marked “7”).
a 80 mm (approx. 3 inches) or more
Memo
• When the “Automatic Threading” button is
pressed, the presser foot will be automati-
cally lowered. After threading is finished, the
presser foot moves back to the position
before the “Automatic Threading” button
was pressed.
UPPER THREADING
60
n
Carefully pull the end of the thread that was
passed through the eye of the needle.
* If a loop was formed in the thread passed through
the eye of the needle, carefully pull on the loop of
thread through to the back of the needle.
o
Pull out about 10-15 cm (approx. 4-6
inches) of the thread, and then pass it under
the presser foot toward the rear of the
machine.
→ Raise the presser foot lever if the presser foot is
lowered.
a About 10-15 cm (approx. 4-6 inches)
Using the Twin Needle Mode
The twin needle can only be used for patterns that
show after being selected. Before you select a
stitch pattern, make sure the stitch can be sewn in
the twin needle mode (refer to the “STITCH
SETTING CHART” at the end of this manual).
Note
• Pulling the loop of thread gently will avoid
needle breakage.
Memo
• If the needle could not be threaded or the
thread was not passed through the needle
bar thread guides, perform the procedure
again starting from step
c.
Then, pass the thread through the eye of the
needle after step
i.
Note
• Some needles cannot be threaded with the
needle threader. In this case, instead of
using the needle threader after passing the
thread through the needle bar thread guide
(marked “6”), manually pass the thread
through the eye of the needle from the front.
CAUTION
• Twin needle (part code XE4963-001) is
recommended for this machine. Contact your
authorized dealer for replacement needles
(size 2.0/11 is recommended).
• Be sure to set the twin needle mode when
using the twin needle. Using the twin needle
while the machine is in single needle mode
could cause the needle to break, resulting in
damage.
• Do not sew with bent needles. The needle
could break and cause injury.
• When using the twin needle, it is
recommended to use presser foot “J”.
• When the twin needle is used, bunched
stitches may occur depending on the types of
fabric and thread that are used.
Use monogramming foot “N” for decorative
stitches.
• Before changing the needle or threading the
machine, be sure to press
on the LCD
Screen, otherwise injuries may occur if the
“Start/Stop” button or any other button is
pressed and the machine starts sewing.
UPPER THREADING
Getting Ready
61
1
a
Press to lock all keys and buttons
and then install the twin needle
(“CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page 67).
b
Thread the machine for the first needle
according to the procedure for threading a
single needle (“Upper Threading” on
page 57).
c
Pass the thread through the needle bar
thread guides on the needle bar, then
thread the needle on the left side manually.
a Needle bar thread guide
d
Pull up the supplemental spool pin and set it
in the up position.
a Supplemental spool pin
e
Place the additional spool of thread on the
supplemental spool pin, so that the thread
unwinds from the front. Push the spool cap
onto the spool pin as far as possible to
secure the thread spool.
a Spool cap
b Spool pin
c Thread spool
f
Hold the thread from the spool with both
hands, and place the thread in the thread
guide.
* Do not place the thread in the pre-tension disks.
a Thread guide
Note
• The “Automatic Threading” button cannot be
used. Manually thread the twin needle from
front to back. Using the “Automatic Thread-
ing” button may result in damage to the
machine.
UPPER THREADING
62
g
While holding the thread from the spool,
pull the thread through the lower notch in
the thread guide plate, then through the
upper notch. Hold the end of the thread
with your left hand, and then guide the
thread through the groove, following the
arrows in the illustration.
h
Continue threading however do not pass
the thread in the needle bar thread guide
“6” on the needle bar. Thread the needle on
the right side.
a Needle bar thread guide
i
Press to unlock all keys and
buttons.
j
Select a stitch pattern. (Example: )
* Refer to the “STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end
of this manual for the proper stitch to use with
presser foot “J”.
→ The selected stitch is displayed.
k
Press to select the twin needle mode.
a Single needle/twin needle setting
→ appears.
l
Start sewing.
Sample of Twin Needle Sewing
Note
• If the key is light gray after selecting
the stitch, the selected stitch cannot be
sewn in the twin needle mode.
CAUTION
• Be sure to set the twin needle mode when
using the twin needle. Using the twin needle
while the machine is in single needle mode
could cause the needle to break, resulting in
damage.
Memo
• To change direction when sewing with the
twin needle, raise the needle from the fabric,
raise the presser foot lever, and then turn
the fabric.
a
UPPER THREADING
Getting Ready
63
1
Using the Spool Stand
The included spool stand is useful when using
thread on spools with a large diameter (cross-
wound thread). This spool stand can hold two
spools of thread.
■ Using the Spool Stand
• Be sure to use a spool cap that is slightly larger
than the spool.
If the spool cap that is used is smaller or much
larger than the spool, the thread may catch and
sewing performance may suffer.
• When using thread on a thin spool, place the
included spool felt on the spool pin, place the
thread spool on the spool pin so that the center
of the spool is aligned with the hole at the center
of the spool felt, and then insert the spool cap
onto the spool pin.
a Spool felt
• When using thread on a cone spool, use the
spool holder.
a Spool holder
• Depending on the size of spool or the amount of
thread remaining, choose the appropriate sized
spool cap (large or medium). Spool cap (small)
cannot be used with the spool cap base.
a Spool cap
b Spool cap base
a
Attach the spool stand to the machine. (see
page 21.)
b
Place the spool of thread on the spool pin
so that the thread feeds off the spool
clockwise. Firmly insert the spool cap onto
the spool pin.
Memo
• See page 21 to assemble the spool stand.
• See page 52 to wind the bobbin when using
the spool stand.
UPPER THREADING
64
c
Pull the thread off the spool. Pass the thread
from the back to the front through the
thread guides at the top.
When using thread that quickly feeds off the spool,
such as metallic thread, use the enclosed ring to
prevent the thread from becoming entangled.
Threading sequence; Pull the thread from the spool,
place the thread through the ring from the bottom up
(1), into the thread guide (2) and through the ring
from the top down (3).
d
Pass the thread through the machine's
thread guide from the right to the left.
a Thread guide
e
Thread the machine according to the steps
f to o of “Upper Threading” on page 57.
Using Threads that Unwind
Quickly
■ Using the Spool Net
If using transparent nylon monofilament thread,
metallic thread, or other strong thread, place the
included spool net over the spool before using it.
When using specialty threads, threading must be
done manually.
If the spool net is too long, fold it once to match it to
the spool size before placing it over the spool.
Note
• When using 2 spools of thread, make sure
that both spools are feeding in the same
direction.
• Make sure that the spools do not touch each
other, otherwise the thread will not feed off
smoothly, the needle may break, or the
thread may break or become tangled. In
addition, make sure that the spools do not
touch the telescopic thread guide at the cen-
ter.
• Make sure that the thread is not caught
under the spool.
Note
• Guide the thread so that it does not become
entangled with the other thread.
• After feeding the thread as instructed, wind
any excess thread back onto the spool, oth-
erwise the excess thread will become tan-
gled.
2
13
a Spool net
b Thread spool
c Spool pin
d Spool cap
Memo
• When threading the spool with the spool net
on, make sure that 5-6 cm (approx. 2 - 2-1/2
inches) of thread are pulled out.
• It may be necessary to adjust the thread ten-
sion when using the spool net.
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
Getting Ready
65
1
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
Removing the Presser Foot
Press → → →
→ in this order to display a
video example of the operation on the LCD (see
page 46). Follow the steps explained below to
complete the operation.
a
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.
b
Press to lock all keys and buttons.
* If the message “OK to automatically lower the
presser foot?” appears on the LCD screen, press OK
to continue.
→ The entire screen becomes white, and all keys and
operation buttons are locked.
c
Raise the presser foot lever.
d
Press the black button on the presser foot
holder and remove the presser foot.
a Black button
b Presser foot holder
Attaching the Presser Foot
a
Place the new presser foot under the
holder, aligning the foot pin with the notch
in the holder. Lower the presser foot lever
so that the presser foot pin snaps into the
notch in the holder.
a Notch
b Pin
CAUTION
• Always press on the screen before changing the presser foot. If is not pressed and the
“Start/Stop” button or another button is pressed, the machine will start and may cause injury.
• Always use the correct presser foot for the selected stitch pattern. If the wrong presser foot is used, the
needle may strike the presser foot and bend or break, and may cause injury.
• Only use presser feet made for this machine. Using other presser feet may lead to accident or injury.
CAUTION
• Make sure that the presser foot is installed in
the correct direction, otherwise the needle
may strike the presser foot, breaking the
needle and causing injuries.
b
a
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
66
b
Press to unlock all keys and
buttons.
c
Raise the presser foot lever.
Attaching the Walking Foot
The walking foot holds the fabric between the
presser foot and the feed dogs to feed the fabric.
This enables you to have better fabric control
when sewing difficult fabrics (such as quilted
fabrics or velvet) or fabrics that slip easily (such as
vinyl, leather, or synthetic leather).
a
Follow the steps in “Removing the Presser
Foot” on the previous page.
b
Loosen the screw of the presser foot holder
to remove the presser foot holder.
c
Set the operation lever of the walking foot
so that the needle clamp screw is set
between the fork. Position the shank of the
walking foot on the presser foot bar.
a Operation lever
b Needle clamp screw
c Fork
d Walking foot shank
e Presser foot bar
d
Lower the presser foot lever. Insert the
screw, and tighten the screw securely with
the screwdriver.
Note
• Thread the needle manually when using the
walking foot, or only attach the walking foot
after threading the needle using the
“Automatic Threading” button.
• When sewing with the walking foot, sew at
medium to low speeds.
Memo
• The walking foot can only be used with
straight or zigzag stitch patterns. Reverse
stitches cannot be sewn with the walking
foot. Only select straight or zigzag stitch pat-
terns with reinforcement stitches. (see page
74.)
CAUTION
• Use the included screwdriver to tighten the
screw securely. If the screw is loose, the
needle may strike the presser foot and cause
injury.
• Be sure to rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to check that the needle
does not strike the presser foot. If the needle
strikes the presser foot, injury may result.
CHANGING THE NEEDLE
Getting Ready
67
1
CHANGING THE NEEDLE
Press → → →
→ in this order to display a
video example of the operation on the LCD (see
page 46). Follow the steps explained below to
complete the operation.
a
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.
b
Press to lock all keys and buttons.
* If the message “OK to automatically lower the
presser foot?” appears on the LCD screen, press OK
to continue.
→ The entire screen becomes white, and all keys and
operation buttons are locked.
c
Use the screwdriver to turn the screw
toward the front of the machine and loosen
the screw. Remove the needle.
CAUTION
• Always press on the screen before changing the needle. If is not pressed and the Start/
Stop button or another operation button is pressed accidentally, the machine will start and injury may
result.
• Use only sewing machine needles made for home use. Other needles may bend or break and may cause
injury.
• Never sew with a bent needle. A bent needle will easily break and may cause injury.
Memo
• To check the needle correctly, place the flat
side of the needle on a flat surface. Check
the needle from the top and the sides. Throw
away any bent needles.
a Parallel space
b Level surface (bobbin cover, glass, etc.)
Note
• Before replacing the needle, cover the hole
in the needle plate with fabric or paper to
prevent the needle from falling into the
machine.
Note
• Do not apply pressure to the needle clamp
screw. Doing so may damage the needle or
machine.
CHANGING THE NEEDLE
68
d
With the flat side of the needle facing the
back, insert the new needle all the way to
the top of the needle stopper (viewing
window) in the needle clamp. Use a
screwdriver to securely tighten the needle
clamp screw.
a Needle stopper
b Hole for setting the needle
c Flat side of needle
e
Press to unlock all keys and
buttons.
CAUTION
• Be sure to push in the needle until it touches
the stopper, and securely tighten the needle
clamp screw with a screwdriver. If the needle
is not completely inserted or the needle clamp
screw is loose, the needle may break or the
machine may be damaged.
CHANGING THE NEEDLE
Getting Ready
69
1
About the Needle
The sewing machine needle is probably the most important part of the sewing machine. Choosing the
proper needle for your sewing project will result in a beautiful finish and fewer problems. Below are some
things to keep in mind about needles.
• The smaller the needle number, the finer the needle. As the numbers increase, the needles get thicker.
• Use fine needles with lightweight fabrics, and thicker needles with heavyweight fabrics.
• To avoid skipped stitches, use ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14 with stretch fabrics.
• To avoid skipped stitches, use ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14 when sewing character or decorative
stitches.
• Use needle 75/11 for embroidery. Use ball point needle 75/11 for embroidering patterns with short jump
stitches such as alphabet characters when the thread trimming function is turned on.
• Ball point needles (golden colored) 90/14 are not recommended for embroidery, as they may bend or break,
causing injury.
• It is recommended that a 90/14 needle should be used when embroidering on heavyweight fabrics or
stabilizing products (for example, denim, puffy foam, etc.). A 75/11 needle may bend or break, which could
result in injury.
• A home sewing machine needle 75/11 is inserted in the sewing machine.
Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations
The following table provides information concerning the appropriate thread and needle for various
fabrics. Please refer to this table when selecting a thread and needle for the fabric you wish to use.
Fabric type/Application
Thread
Size of needle
Type Size
Medium weight fabrics Broadcloth Cotton thread
60 - 90
75/11 - 90/14Taffeta Synthetic thread
Flannel, Gabardine Silk thread 50
Thin fabrics Lawn Cotton thread
60 - 90
65/9 - 75/11Georgette Synthetic thread
Challis, Satin Silk thread 50
Thick fabrics Denim Cotton thread 30
90/14 - 100/16
50
Corduroy Synthetic thread
50 - 60
Tweed Silk thread
Stretch fabrics Jersey Thread for knits
50 - 60
Ball point needle
(gold colored)
75/11 - 90/14
Tr i cot
Easily frayed fabrics Cotton thread
50 - 90
65/9 - 90/14Synthetic thread
Silk thread 50
For top-stitching Synthetic thread
50 90/14 - 100/16
Silk thread
Memo
• For transparent monofilament nylon thread, always use needle sizes 90/14 or 100/16.
The same thread is usually used for the bobbin thread and upper thread.
CAUTION
• Be sure to follow the needle, thread, and fabric combinations listed in the table. Using an improper
combination, especially a heavyweight fabric (i.e., denim) with a small needle (i.e., 65/9 - 75/11), may
cause the needle to bend or break, and lead to injury. Also, the seam may be uneven, the fabric may
pucker, or the machine may skip stitches.
CHANGING THE NEEDLE
70
Chapter 2
Sewing Basics
SEWING ..............................................................................................72
Sewing a Stitch........................................................................................................72
■ Using the Multi-Function Foot Controller .......................................................................73
Sewing Reinforcement Stitches ...............................................................................74
Sewing Curves.........................................................................................................74
Changing Sewing Direction.....................................................................................75
■ Sewing a Seam Allowance of 0.5 cm or Less ...................................................................75
Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics...................................................................................75
■ If the Fabric does not Fit under the Presser Foot .............................................................75
■ If the Fabric does not Feed ..............................................................................................76
Sewing Hook-and-Loop Fastener.............................................................................76
Sewing Lightweight Fabrics .....................................................................................76
Sewing Stretch Fabrics ............................................................................................77
STITCH SETTINGS...............................................................................78
Setting the Stitch Width ..........................................................................................78
Setting the Stitch Length .........................................................................................79
Setting the Thread Tension......................................................................................79
■ Proper Thread Tension ....................................................................................................79
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight...............................................................................................80
■ Upper Thread is Too Loose..............................................................................................80
USEFUL FUNCTIONS..........................................................................81
Automatic Reinforcement Stitching ........................................................................81
Automatic Thread Cutting.......................................................................................82
Using the Knee Lifter...............................................................................................83
Pivoting ...................................................................................................................84
Automatic Fabric Sensor System (Automatic Presser Foot Pressure) .......................85
Needle Position – Stitch Placement.........................................................................86
Locking the Screen ..................................................................................................86
Checking the Needle Location in the Screen...........................................................87
SEWING
72
SEWING
Sewing a Stitch
a
Turn the main power to ON and press
to display the utility stitches, and
push the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.
b
Press the key of the stitch you want to sew.
→ The symbol of the correct presser foot will be
displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD screen.
c
Install the presser foot (“CHANGING THE
PRESSER FOOT” on page 65).
d
Set the fabric under the presser foot. Hold
the fabric and thread in your left hand, and
rotate the handwheel to set the needle in
the sewing start position.
e
Lower the presser foot.
* You do not have to pull up the bobbin thread.
CAUTION
• To avoid injury, pay special attention to the needle while the machine is in operation. Keep your hands
away from moving parts while the machine is in operation.
• Do not stretch or pull the fabric during sewing. Doing so may lead to injury.
• Do not use bent or broken needles. Doing so may lead to injury.
• Do not attempt to sew over basting pins or other objects during sewing. Otherwise, the needle may break
and cause injury.
• If stitches become bunched, lengthen the stitch length setting before continuing sewing. Otherwise, the
needle may break and cause injury.
CAUTION
• Always use the correct presser foot. If the
wrong presser foot is used, the needle may
strike the presser foot and bend or break,
possibly resulting in injury.
Refer to page 365 for presser foot
recommendations.
Memo
• The black button on the left side of presser
foot “J” should be pressed only if the fabric
does not feed or when sewing thick seams
(see page 76). Normally, you can sew with-
out pressing the black button.
SEWING
Sewing Basics
73
2
f
Adjust the sewing speed with the speed
control slide.
* You can use this slide to adjust sewing speed during
sewing.
a Slow
b Fast
g
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
sewing.
* Guide the fabric lightly by hand.
h
Press the “Start/Stop” button again to stop
sewing.
i
Press the “Thread Cutter” button to trim
the upper and lower threads.
→ The needle will return to the up position
automatically.
j
When the needle has stopped moving, raise
the presser foot and remove the fabric.
■ Using the Multi-Function Foot
Controller
You can also use the included multi-function foot
controller to start and stop sewing.
Memo
• When the foot controller is being used, you
cannot start sewing by pressing the “Start/
Stop” button.
CAUTION
• Do not press the “Thread Cutter” button after
the threads have been cut. Doing so could
tangle the thread or break the needle and
damage the machine.
• Do not press the “Thread Cutter” button when
there is no fabric set in the machine or during
machine operation. The thread may tangle,
possibly resulting in damage.
Note
• When cutting thread thicker than #30, nylon
monofilament thread, or other decorative
threads, use the thread cutter on the side of
the machine.
Memo
• This machine is equipped with a bobbin
thread sensor that warns you when the bob-
bin thread is almost empty. When the bobbin
thread is nearly empty, the machine auto-
matically stops. However, if the “Start/Stop”
button is pressed, a few stitches can be
sewn. When the warning displays, re-thread
the machine immediately.
CAUTION
• Do not allow fabric pieces and dust to collect
in the foot controller. Doing so could cause a
fire or an electric shock.
SEWING
74
a
Insert the plugs for the main foot controller
into the foot controller jack and the
external port on the right side of the
machine.
* Refer to Operation Manual Addendum for detailed
instructions of connecting the multi-function foot
controller.
* Before connecting the multi-function foot controller,
be sure to assemble the controller according to
Operation Manual Addendum.
a Foot controller jack
b External port
b
Slowly depress the foot controller to start
sewing.
Pressing down on the foot controller increases the
sewing speed; releasing the pressure on the foot
controller decreases the sewing speed.
c
Release the foot controller to stop the
machine.
Sewing Reinforcement Stitches
Reverse/reinforcement stitches are generally
necessary at the beginning and end of sewing. You
can use the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button
to sew reverse/reinforcement stitches manually
(see page 15).
If the automatic reinforcement stitch is selected on
the screen, reverse stitches (or reinforcement
stitches) will be sewn automatically at the
beginning of sewing when the “Start/Stop” button
is pressed. Press the “Reverse/Reinforcement
Stitch” button to sew reverse stitches (or
reinforcement stitches) automatically at the end of
sewing (see page 81).
a Reverse stitch
b Reinforcement stitch
If the stitch which you select has a double mark
“ ” at the top of the key display, you can sew
reverse stitches by holding the “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
If the stitch which you select has a dot mark “ ” at
the top of the key display, you can sew
reinforcement stitches by holding the “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
Sewing Curves
Sew slowly while keeping the seam parallel with
the fabric edge as you guide the fabric around the
curve.
Memo
• Refer to Operation Manual Addendum for
the detailed instructions of the multi-function
foot controller.
• When the foot controller is being used, you
cannot start sewing by pressing the “Start/
Stop” button.
• The foot controller cannot be used when
embroidering.
• The foot controller can be used for sewing
utility and decorative stitches when the
embroidery unit is attached.
Memo
• The speed that is set using the sewing
speed controller is the foot controller’s maxi-
mum sewing speed.
SEWING
Sewing Basics
75
2
Changing Sewing Direction
Stop the machine. Leave the needle in the fabric,
and press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to raise
the presser foot. Using the needle as a pivot, turn
the fabric so that you can sew in the new
direction. Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
lower the presser foot and start sewing.
The pivot setting is useful when changing the
sewing direction. When the machine is stopped at
the corner of the fabric, the machine stops with the
needle in the fabric and the presser foot is
automatically raised so the fabric can easily be
rotated (“Pivoting” on page 84).
■ Sewing a Seam Allowance of 0.5 cm
or Less
Baste the corner before sewing, and then, after
changing the sewing direction at the corner, pull the
basting thread toward the back while sewing.
a 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics
The sewing machine can sew fabrics up to 6 mm
(approx. 1/4 inch) thick. If the thickness of a seam
causes sewing to occur at an angle, help guide the
fabric by hand and sew on the downward slope.
■ If the Fabric does not Fit under the
Presser Foot
If the presser foot is in the up position, and you are
sewing heavyweight or multiple layers of fabric
which do not fit easily under the presser foot, use
the presser foot lever to raise the presser foot to its
highest position. The fabric will now fit under the
presser foot.
CAUTION
• Do not forcefully push fabrics more than
6 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) thick through the
sewing machine. This may cause the needle to
break and cause injury.
• Thicker fabrics require a larger needle
(“CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page 67).
Memo
• You cannot use the presser foot lever after
the presser foot has been raised using the
“Presser Foot Lifter” button.
SEWING
76
■ If the Fabric does not Feed
If the fabric does not feed when starting to sew or
when sewing thick seams, press the black button on
the left side of presser foot “J”.
a
Raise the presser foot.
b
While keeping the black button on the left
side of presser foot “J” pressed in, press the
“Presser Foot Lifter” button to lower the
presser foot.
c
Release the black button.
→ The presser foot remains level, enabling the fabric to
be fed.
Sewing Hook-and-Loop Fastener
Make sure that the needle passes through the
hook-and-loop fastener by rotating the handwheel
and lower the needle into the hook-and-loop
fastener before sewing. Sew the edge of the hook-
and-loop fastener at a slow speed.
If the needle does not pass through the hook-and-
loop fastener, replace the needle with the needle
for thick fabrics (page 69).
a Edge of the hook-and-loop fastener
Sewing Lightweight Fabrics
Place thin paper or tear away embroidery
stabilizer under thin fabrics to make sewing easier.
Gently tear off the paper or the stabilizer after
sewing.
a Thin paper
Memo
• Once the trouble spot has been passed, the
foot will return to its normal position.
• When “Automatic Fabric Sensor System”
(Automatic Presser Foot Pressure) in the
machine settings screen is set to “ON”, the
thickness of the fabric is automatically
detected by the internal sensor so the fabric
can be fed smoothly for best sewing results.
(see page 85 for details.)
CAUTION
• Do not use adhesive backed hook-and-loop
fastener designed for sewing. If the adhesive
sticks to the needle or the bobbin hook race, it
may cause malfunction.
• If the hook-and-loop fastener is sewn with a
fine needle (65/9-75/11), the needle may bend
or break.
Note
• Before starting to sew, baste the fabric and
hook-and-loop fastener together.
SEWING
Sewing Basics
77
2
Sewing Stretch Fabrics
First, baste together the pieces of fabric, and then
sew without stretching the fabric.
In addition, a better result can be achieved by
using thread for knits or a stretch stitch.
a Basting stitching
Memo
• For best results when sewing stretch fabrics,
decrease the pressure of the presser foot
(“Using the Machine Setting Mode Key” on
page 35).
STITCH SETTINGS
78
STITCH SETTINGS
When you select a stitch, your machine automatically selects the appropriate stitch width, stitch length,
and upper thread tension. However, if needed, you can change any of the individual settings.
Setting the Stitch Width
Follow the steps below when you want to change
the zigzag stitch pattern width.
Example:
Press to narrow the zigzag stitch pattern
width.
→ The value in the display gets smaller.
Press to widen the zigzag stitch pattern width.
→ The value in the display gets bigger.
Note
• Settings for some stitches cannot be changed (refer to the “STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual).
• If you turn off the machine or select another stitch without saving stitch setting changes (“Saving Your
Stitch Settings” on page 92), the stitch settings will return to their default settings.
Memo
• For an alternate method of changing the
stitch width using the speed controller, see
page 115.
Memo
• Press to return the stitch width to the
original setting.
Note
• After adjusting the stitch width, slowly rotate
the handwheel toward you (counterclock-
wise) and check that the needle does not
touch the presser foot. If the needle hits the
presser foot, the needle may bend or break.
STITCH SETTINGS
Sewing Basics
79
2
Setting the Stitch Length
Follow the steps below when you want to change
the stitch pattern length.
Example:
Press to shorten the stitch length.
→ The value in the display gets smaller.
Press to lengthen the stitch length.
→ The value in the display gets bigger.
Setting the Thread Tension
You may need to change the thread tension,
depending on the fabric and thread being used.
Follow the steps below to make any necessary
changes.
■ Proper Thread Tension
The upper thread and the bobbin thread should
cross near the center of the fabric. Only the upper
thread should be visible from the right side of the
fabric, and only the bobbin thread should be visible
from the wrong side of the fabric.
a Wrong side
b Surface
c Upper thread
d Bobbin thread
Memo
• Press to check changes made to the
stitch.
• Press to return the stitch length to
the original setting.
CAUTION
• If the stitches get bunched together, lengthen
the stitch length and continue sewing. Do not
continue sewing without lengthening the stitch
length. Otherwise, the needle may break and
cause injury.
STITCH SETTINGS
80
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight
If the bobbin thread is visible from the right side of
the fabric, the upper thread is too tight.
a Bobbin thread
b Upper thread
c Surface
d Locks appear on surface of fabric
Press , to loosen the upper thread.
■ Upper Thread is Too Loose
If the upper thread is visible from the wrong side of
the fabric, the upper thread is too loose.
a Upper thread
b Bobbin thread
c Wrong side
d Locks appear on wrong side of fabric
Press , to tighten the upper thread.
Note
• If the bobbin thread was incorrectly
threaded, the upper thread may be too tight.
In this case, refer to “Setting the Bobbin”
(page 54) and rethread the bobbin thread.
Memo
• When you finish sewing, remove the bobbin
cover and then make sure that the thread is
shown as below. If the thread is not shown
as below, the thread is not inserted through
the tension-adjusting spring of the bobbin
case correctly. Reinsert the thread correctly.
For details, refer to page 54.
Note
• If the upper thread was incorrectly threaded,
the upper thread may be too loose. In this
case, refer to “Upper Threading” (page 57)
and rethread the upper thread.
Memo
• Press to return the thread tension to
the original setting.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
Sewing Basics
81
2
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
Automatic Reinforcement
Stitching
After selecting a stitch pattern, turn on the
automatic reinforcement stitching function before
sewing, and the machine will automatically sew
reinforcement stitches (or reverse stitches,
depending on the stitch pattern) at the beginning
and end of sewing.
a
Select a stitch pattern.
b
Press to set the automatic
reinforcement stitching function.
→ The key will display as .
c
Set the fabric in the start position and start
sewing.
a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
→ The machine will automatically sew reverse stitches
(or reinforcement stitches) and then continue
sewing.
d
Press the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch”
button.
a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
→ The machine will sew reverse stitches (or
reinforcement stitches) and stop.
Memo
• Some stitches, such as buttonholes and bar
tacks, require reinforcement stitches at the
beginning of sewing. If you select one of
these stitches, the machine will automati-
cally turn on this function (the key appears
as when the stitch is selected).
Memo
• If you press the “Start/Stop” button to pause
sewing, press it again to continue. The
machine will not sew reverse/reinforcement
stitches again.
Memo
• To turn off the automatic reinforcement
stitching function, press again, so it
appears as .
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
82
Automatic Thread Cutting
After selecting a stitch pattern, turn on the
automatic thread cutting function before sewing,
and the machine will automatically sew
reinforcement stitches (or reverse stitches,
depending on the stitch pattern) at the beginning
and end of sewing, and trim the threads at the end
of sewing. This function is useful when sewing
buttonholes and bar tacks.
a
Select a stitch pattern.
b
Press to set the automatic thread
cutting function.
→ The key will display as .
c
Set the fabric in the start position and start
sewing.
a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
→ The machine will automatically sew reverse stitches
(or reinforcement stitches) and then continue
sewing.
d
Press the “Reverse/Reinforcement
Stitching” button.
a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
→ The machine will sew reverse stitches (or
reinforcement stitches), then trim the thread.
Memo
• This function is set automatically when sew-
ing embroidery.
Memo
• If you press the “Start/Stop” button to pause
sewing, press the same button again to con-
tinue. The beginning reverse/reinforcement
stitches will not be sewn again.
Memo
• To turn off the automatic thread cutting func-
tion, press again, so it appears as
.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
Sewing Basics
83
2
Using the Knee Lifter
Using the knee lifter, you can raise and lower the
presser foot with your knee, leaving both hands
free to handle the fabric.
a
Change the operating position of the knee
lifter handle before inserting into the
machine.
Slide up the knee lifter handle slightly and
rotate it while releasing pressure so handle
will click into position.
* The knee lifter can be adjusted to three different
angles.
a Knee lifter handle
→ Rotate knee lifter handle till it clicks into the
selected position that is most comfortable for you.
b
Align the tabs on the knee lifter with the
notches in the knee lifter slot on the front of
the machine. Insert the knee lifter bar as far
as possible.
c
Use your knee to move the knee lifter bar to
the right in order to raise the presser foot.
Release the knee lifter to lower the presser
foot.
CAUTION
• Only change position of the knee lifter handle
when knee lifter is not on the machine,
otherwise the knee lifter may damage the
mounting slot on front of the machine.
Note
• If the knee lifter bar is not pushed into the
mounting slot as far as possible, it may
come out during use.
CAUTION
• Be sure to keep your knee away from the knee
lifter during sewing. If the knee lifter is pushed
during machine operation, the needle may
break or the thread tension may loosen.
Memo
• When the presser foot is in the up position,
move the knee lifter to the far right and then
release to return the presser foot to the
down position.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
84
Pivoting
If the pivot setting is selected, the machine stops
with the needle lowered (in the fabric) and the
presser foot is automatically raised to an
appropriate height when the “Start/Stop” button is
pressed. When the “Start/Stop” button is pressed
again, the presser foot is automatically lowered
and sewing continues. This function is useful for
stopping the machine to rotate the fabric.
a
Select a stitch.
b
Press to select the pivot setting.
→ The key appears as .
CAUTION
• When the pivot setting is selected, the
machine starts when the “Start/Stop” button is
pressed or the foot controller is pressed down
even if the presser foot has been raised. Be
sure to keep your hands and other items away
from the needle, otherwise injuries may occur.
Memo
• When the pivot setting is selected, the
height of the presser foot when sewing is
stopped can be changed according to the
type of fabric being sewn. Press to
display “Pivoting Height” on 2/8 of the
settings screen. Press or to select
one of the three heights (3.2 mm, 5.0 mm or
7.5 mm). To raise the presser foot further,
increase the setting. (Normally, 3.2 mm is
set.)
Note
• The “Needle Position – UP/DOWN” (3/8 of
the settings screen) must be set in the down
position
for the pivot function to be
used. When “Needle Position – UP/DOWN”
is set in the raised position, appears
as light gray and cannot be used.
• The pivot function can only be used with
stitches where presser foot J or N is
indicated in the upper-left corner of the
screen. If any other stitch is selected,
appears as light gray and is not available.
• Use the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to make
sure the presser foot is lowered, and then
press the “Start/Stop” button to continue
sewing.
• If the pivot setting is selected, and
beside “Presser Foot Height” in the settings
screen are not available and the setting
cannot be changed.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
Sewing Basics
85
2
c
Place the fabric under the presser foot with
the needle at the starting point of the
stitching, and then press the “Start/Stop”
button. The machine will begin sewing.
d
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop the
machine at the point where the sewing
direction changes.
→ The machine stops with the needle in the fabric, and
the presser foot is raised.
e
Rotate the fabric, and then press the “Start/
Stop” button.
→ The presser foot is automatically lowered, and
sewing continues.
Automatic Fabric Sensor System
(Automatic Presser Foot
Pressure)
The thickness of the fabric is automatically
detected and the presser foot pressure is
automatically adjusted with an internal sensor
while sewing, to insure that your fabric is fed
smoothly. The fabric sensor system works
continuously while sewing. This function is useful
for sewing over thick seams (see page 75), or
quilting (see page 113).
a
Press .
→ The settings screen appears.
b
Set “Automatic Fabric Sensor System” to
“ON”.
c
Press to return to the original screen.
Memo
• If you press the “Start/Stop” button to pause
sewing, press it again to continue, reverse
stitches (or reinforcement stitches) will not
be sewn.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
86
Needle Position – Stitch
Placement
When the “Needle Position – Stitch Placement” is
on, the needle will be partially lowered for precise
stitch placement and then press the “Needle
Position” button to lower the needle completely.
Each press of the “Needle Position” button
changes the needle to the next position. When the
“Needle Position – Stitch Placement” is turned off,
each press of the “Needle Position” button simply
raises and then lowers the needle.
a Pointing needle mode is ON
b Pointing needle mode is OFF
* When the needle is nearly lowered by pressing the
“Needle Position” button, the feed dogs are
lowered. At this time, the fabric can be shifted to
finely adjust the needle drop position.
a
Press .
b
Set “Needle Position – Stitch Placement” to
“ON” or “OFF”.
c
Press to return to the original screen.
Locking the Screen
If the screen is locked before starting to sew, the
various settings such as the stitch width and stitch
length are locked and cannot be changed. This
prevents screen settings from accidentally being
changed or the machine from being stopped while
large pieces of fabric or projects are being sewn.
The screen can be locked when sewing utility
stitches and character decorative stitches.
a
Select a stitch pattern.
b
If necessary, adjust any settings such as the
stitch width and stitch length.
c
Press to lock the screen settings.
→ The key appears as .
d
Sew your project.
e
When you are finished sewing, press
again to unlock the screen settings.
CAUTION
• If the screen is locked ( ), unlock the
screen by pressing . While the screen is
locked, no other key can be operated.
• The settings are unlocked when the machine is
turned off and on.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
Sewing Basics
87
2
Checking the Needle Location in
the Screen
Press to use the built-in camera to view
the sewing area in the LCD screen. View the
location of the needle from 2 different angles and
the needle drop position, even if the needle has
not actually been lowered.
→ The camera view window appears.
a CAMERA IMAGE
b GRID VIEW
c CLOSE
d VIEW ANGLE
e NEEDLE DROP POSITION
f ZOOM
CAMERA IMAGE
Press this key to save a camera image to the USB
media.
Insert the USB media to the machine to save a
camera image (Refer to “Saving a Settings Screen
Image to USB Media” on page 39). The files for
camera images are saved with the name “C**.BMP”.
A maximum of 100 camera images can be saved in
one USB media.
* “**” in the name “C**.BMP” will automatically be
replaced with a number between 00 and 99.
GRID VIEW
Press this key to display a grid.
CLOSE
Press this key to close the screen.
VIEW ANGLE
Each press of switches the built-in camera
between a front view and an angled top view.
NEEDLE DROP POSITION
Press to show the needle drop position in
the screen as “ ”.
Lower the presser foot before pressing .
Once the needle drop position appears on the
screen, you can raise the presser foot and change
the needle drop position by moving the fabric.
a Needle drop position
ZOOM
Press to enlarge the image in the screen.
Press again to return the image to its original
display size.
c
d
e
f
a
b
Note
• The camera view window disappears when
you start sewing.
• When sewing thick fabrics, the needle drop
position indicated in the screen may differ
from the actual position.
a
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
88
Chapter 3
Utility Stitches
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES......................90
■ Stitch Selection Screens............................................................ 90
Selecting a Stitch .............................................................. 91
■ Using the Mirror Image Key ..................................................... 91
■ Using the Image Key................................................................. 92
Saving Your Stitch Settings ............................................... 92
■ Saving Settings.......................................................................... 92
■ Retrieving Saved Settings.......................................................... 93
SEWING THE STITCHES.................................94
Straight Stitches ................................................................ 94
■ Changing the Needle Position
(Left or Middle Needle Position Stitches Only) ........................ 96
■ Aligning the Fabric with a Mark on the Needle Plate
or Bobbin Cover (with Mark) ................................................... 96
■
Aligning the Fabric with the Vertical Stitch Alignment “V” Foot
........ 97
■
Using the Straight Stitch Needle Plate and the Straight Stitch Foot
.... 97
■ Basting ..................................................................................... 98
Dart Seam......................................................................... 99
Gathering.......................................................................... 99
Flat Fell Seam.................................................................. 100
Pintuck............................................................................ 101
Zigzag Stitches................................................................ 102
■ Overcasting (Using a Zigzag Stitch) .......................................102
■ Appliqué (Using a Zigzag Stitch) ............................................ 102
■ Patchwork (for Crazy Quilt)................................................... 103
■ Sewing Curves (Using a Zigzag Stitch) ................................... 103
■ Cord Guide Bobbin Cover (Using a Zigzag Stitch) ................. 103
Elastic Zigzag Stitches..................................................... 104
■ Tape Attaching ....................................................................... 104
■ Overcasting............................................................................ 104
Overcasting .................................................................... 105
■ Overcasting Using Presser Foot “G” ...................................... 105
■ Overcasting Using Presser Foot “J”........................................ 106
■ Overcasting Using the Side Cutter ......................................... 107
■ When Sewing Straight Stitches While Using the Side Cutter.. 109
Quilting .......................................................................... 110
■ Piecing ................................................................................... 113
■ Quilting.................................................................................. 113
■ Appliqué................................................................................. 114
■ Quilting with Satin Stitches....................................................115
■ Free Motion Quilting.............................................................. 116
■ Echo Quilting Using the Free Motion Echo
Quilting Foot “E”.................................................................... 119
Blind Hem Stitches ......................................................... 122
■ If the Needle Catches Too Much of the Hem Fold ................. 124
■ If the Needle does not Catch the Hem Fold ........................... 124
Appliqué ......................................................................... 125
■ Appliqué Sharp Curves........................................................... 125
■ Appliqué Corners ...................................................................125
Shelltuck Stitches............................................................ 126
Scallop Stitches............................................................... 127
Crazy Quilting ................................................................ 127
Smocking Stitches ........................................................... 128
Fagoting.......................................................................... 128
Tape or Elastic Attaching ................................................ 129
Heirloom .........................................................................130
■ Hemstitching (1) (Daisy Stitch)...............................................130
■ Hemstitching (2) (Drawn Work (1))........................................130
■ Hemstitching (3) (Drawn Work (2))........................................131
One-step Buttonholes ......................................................132
■ Sewing Stretch Fabrics............................................................135
■ Odd Shaped Buttons/Buttons that do Not Fit into the Button
Holder Plate............................................................................135
Four-step Buttonholes......................................................136
■ Darning...................................................................................138
Bar Tacks .........................................................................140
■ Bar Tacks on Thick Fabrics......................................................141
Button Sewing .................................................................142
■ Attaching 4 Hole Buttons........................................................143
■ Attaching a Shank to the Button .............................................143
Eyelet...............................................................................144
Multi-directional Sewing (Straight Stitch and Zigzag Stitch)
.....145
Zipper Insertion...............................................................146
■ Centered Zipper......................................................................146
■ Inserting a Side Zipper............................................................147
Edge Sewing.....................................................................148
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES
90
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES
■ Stitch Selection Screens
There are 6 categories of Utility Stitches. If a page number such as appears, there is more than one stitch
selection screen for that category.
Straight/Overcasting Decorative Stitches Heirloom Stitches
Buttonholes/Bar tacks Multi-directional Sewing Quilting Stitches
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES
Utility Stitches
91
3
Selecting a Stitch
a
Turn the main power to ON and press
to display the utility stitches.
→ Either “1-01 Straight stitch (Left)” or “1-03 Straight
stitch (Middle)” is selected, depending on the setting
selected in the setting screen.
b
Use to select
the category you want.
* Press to view the next page.
* Press to view previous page.
a Preview of the selected stitch
b Stitch selection screen
c Percentage size of view
c
Press the key of the stitch you want to sew.
■ Using the Mirror Image Key
Depending on the type of utility stitch you select,
you may be able to sew a horizontal mirror image of
the stitch.
If is lit when you select a stitch, it will be
possible to make a mirror image of the stitch.
Press to create a horizontal mirror image of the
selected stitch.
The key will display as .
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
a
b
c
Note
• If is light gray after you select a stitch,
you cannot create a horizontal mirror image
of the selected stitch due to the type of stitch
or type of presser foot recommended (this is
true of buttonholes, multi-directional sew-
ing, and others).
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES
92
■ Using the Image Key
You can display an image of the selected stitch. You
can check and change the colors of the image of the
screen.
a
Press .
→ An image of the selected stitch is displayed.
b
Press to change the thread color of
the stitch on the screen.
* Press to display an enlarged image of the
stitch.
a Stitch screen
c
Press to go back to the original
screen.
Saving Your Stitch Settings
The settings for the zigzag stitch width, stitch
length, thread tension, automatic thread cutting,
automatic reinforcement stitching, etc., are preset
in the machine for each stitch. However, if you
have specific settings that you wish to reuse later
for a stitch, you can change the settings so that
they can be saved for that stitch. Five sets of
settings can be saved for a single stitch.
■ Saving Settings
a
Select a stitch. (Example: )
b
Specify your preferred settings.
Memo
• The color changes every time you press
.
Note
• If stitches are wider or larger than display,
press darkened arrows to move the stitch
pattern for better visibility.
a
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES
Utility Stitches
93
3
c
Press .
→ The settings are saved and the original screen
automatically appears.
■ Retrieving Saved Settings
a
Select a stitch.
b
Press .
c
Press the numbered key of the settings to be
retrieved.
* Press to return to the original screen without
retrieving settings.
a Numbered keys
d
Press .
→ The selected settings are retrieved, and the original
screen automatically appears.
Memo
• If you try to save settings when there are
already 5 sets of settings saved for a stitch,
the message “The pockets are full. Delete a
pattern” will appear. Close the message and
delete a setting referring to page 93.
Memo
• When a stitch is selected, the last settings
retrieved are displayed. The last settings
retrieved are retained even if the machine
was turned off or a different stitch was
selected.
Memo
• To save new settings when there are
already 5 sets of settings saved for a stitch,
press . Press the numbered key of
the setting to be deleted. Press ,
press and then . The new set-
ting will be saved in place of the recently
deleted setting.
• You can delete all the saved settings by
pressing .
a
SEWING THE STITCHES
94
SEWING THE STITCHES
Straight Stitches
Stitch Stitch name
Presser
foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto Manual Auto Manual
Straight stitch (Left) General sewing, gather, pintuck,
etc. Reverse stitch is sewn while
pressing “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Straight stitch (Left) General sewing, gather, pintuck,
etc. Reinforcement stitch is sewn
while pressing “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Straight stitch
(Middle)
General sewing, gather, pintuck,
etc. Reverse stitch is sewn while
pressing “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Straight stitch
(Middle)
General sewing, gather, pintuck,
etc. Reinforcement stitch is sewn
while pressing “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Triple stretch stitch General sewing for
reinforcement and decorative
topstitching
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.5 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Stem stitch Reinforced stitching, sewing and
decorative applications
1.0
(1/16)
1.0 - 3.0
(1/16 - 1/8)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Decorative stitch Decorative stitching, top
stitching
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Basting stitch Basting
0.0
(0)
0.
0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
20
(3/4)
5 - 30
(3/16 - 1-3/16)
NO
a Left needle position
b Middle needle position
a Reverse stitch
b Reinforcement stitch
Memo
• If the selected stitch has a double mark “ ” at the top of the key display, you can sew reverse stitches
holding the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button.
• If the selected stitch has a dot mark “ ” at the top of the key display, you can sew reinforcement
stitches holding the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button (see page 74).
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
95
3
a
Select a stitch.
b
Attach presser foot “J”.
* Attach presser foot “N” when you select .
c
Hold the thread tail and fabric with your
left hand, and rotate the handwheel with
your right hand to insert the needle into the
fabric.
a Sewing start position
d
Lower the presser foot, and hold the
“Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button to
sew 3-4 stitches.
→ The machine sews reverse stitches (or reinforcement
stitches).
e
Press the “Start/Stop” button to sew
forward.
a Reverse stitches
→ The machine will begin sewing slowly.
f
When sewing is completed, hold the
“Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button to
sew 3-4 reverse stitches (or reinforcement
stitches) at the end of the seam.
g
After sewing, press the “Thread Cutter”
button to trim the threads.
CAUTION
• Be sure the needle does not strike a basting
pin, or any other objects, during sewing. The
thread could tangle or the needle could break,
causing injury.
Memo
• When the automatic thread cutting and auto-
matic reinforcement stitch keys on the
screen are selected, reverse stitches (or
reinforcement stitches) will be sewn auto-
matically at the beginning of sewing when
the “Start/Stop” button is pressed. Press the
“Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button to
sew reverse stitches (or reinforcement
stitches) and trim the thread automatically at
the end of sewing.
SEWING THE STITCHES
96
■ Changing the Needle Position (Left
or Middle Needle Position Stitches
Only)
When you select left or middle needle position
stitches, you can use and in the stitch
width display to change the position of the needle.
Match the distance from the right edge of the presser
foot to the needle with the stitch width, then align
the edge of the presser foot with the edge of the
fabric during sewing for an attractive finish.
a Stitch width
Example: Left/Middle needle position stitches
■ Aligning the Fabric with a Mark on
the Needle Plate or Bobbin Cover
(with Mark)
While sewing, align the edge of the fabric with the
16 mm (approx. 5/8 inch) mark on the needle plate
or bobbin cover (with mark) depending on the
needle position (left or middle (center) needle
position stitches only).
For stitches with a left needle position
(Stitch width: 0.0 mm)
a Seam
b Presser foot
c Centimeters
d Inches
e Needle plate
f 16 mm (5/8 inch)
For stitches with a middle (center) needle position
(Stitch width: 3.5 mm)
a Seam
b Presser foot
c Inches
d Bobbin cover (with mark)
e 16 mm (5/8 inch)
12.0 mm
(approx.
1/2 inch)
8.5 mm
(approx.
11/32
inch)
6.5 mm
(approx.
1/4 inch)
5.0 mm
(approx.
3/16 inch)
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
97
3
■ Aligning the Fabric with the Vertical
Stitch Alignment “V” Foot
Sew while keeping the right edge of the fabric
aligned with a desired position of markings on the
vertical stitch alignment “V” foot.
You can also use the vertical stitch alignment “V”
foot for setting a stitch width using the built-in
camera (see page 148).
a Seam
b Vertical stitch alignment “V” foot
c Markings
■ Using the Straight Stitch Needle
Plate and the Straight Stitch Foot
The straight stitch needle plate and the straight stitch
foot can only be used for straight stitches (middle
needle position stitches). Use the straight stitch
needle plate and the straight stitch foot when sewing
thin fabrics or when sewing small pieces which tend
to sink into the hole of the regular needle plate
during sewing. The straight stitch foot is perfect to
reduce puckering on lightweight fabrics. The small
opening on the foot provides support for the fabric
as the needle travels through the fabric.
a
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle and turn the main power to OFF
or press .
b
Remove the needle and the presser foot
holder (see page 66 through 67).
c
Remove the flat bed attachment or the
embroidery unit if either are attached.
d
Grasp both sides of the needle plate cover,
and then slide it toward you.
a Needle plate cover
e
Grasp the bobbin case, and then pull it out.
a Bobbin case
f
Use the disc-shaped screw driver included
with the machine to unscrew and remove
the regular needle plate.
g
Set the straight stitch needle plate in place
and use the disc-shaped screw driver to
tighten the plate.
a Round hole
CAUTION
• Always use the straight stitch foot in
combination with the straight stitch needle
plate.
Note
• Align the two screw holes on the needle
plate with the two holes on the machine. Use
the disc-shaped screw driver included with
the machine to secure the screws in the
needle plate.
SEWING THE STITCHES
98
h
Insert the bobbin case in its original
position, and then attach the needle plate
cover.
i
After reinstalling the needle plate cover,
select any of the straight stitches.
j
Insert needle and attach the straight stitch
foot.
a Notch
b Pin
k
Start sewing.
* After sewing, make sure to remove the straight stitch
needle plate and the straight stitch foot, and reinstall
the regular needle plate, the needle plate cover and
the presser foot “J”.
■ Basting
a
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Press the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch”
button to sew reinforcement stitches, then
continue sewing.
c
Sew while keeping the fabric straight.
d
End the basting with reinforcement stitches.
Memo
• When using the straight stitch needle plate,
all straight stitches become middle needle
position stitches. You cannot change the
needle position using the width display.
• Always secure the needle plate before
inserting the bobbin case into its original
position.
CAUTION
• Selecting other stitches will cause an error
message to be displayed.
• Slowly rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) before sewing and make
sure that the needle is not contacting the
straight stitch foot and straight stitch needle
plate.
Memo
• To prevent puckering on fine fabrics, use a
fine needle, size 75/11, and a short stitch
length. For heavier fabrics, use a heavier
needle, size 90/14, and longer stitches.
Memo
• When you use the basting stitch for
gathering, do not use a reinforcement stitch
at the beginning; you should lift the presser
foot, rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise), pull up the bobbin
thread and pull a length of top and bobbin
thread out from the rear of the machine.
• You can set the stitch length between 5 mm
(approx. 3/16 inch) and 30 mm (approx.
1-3/16 inches)
a Between 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and 30 mm
(approx. 1-3/16 inches)
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
99
3
Dart Seam
a
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Sew a reverse stitch at the beginning of the
dart and then sew from the wide end to the
other end without stretching the fabric.
* If automatic reinforcement stitching is preset, a
reinforcement stitch will automatically be sewn at
the beginning of sewing.
a Basting
c
Cut the thread at the end leaving 50 mm
(approx. 1-15/16 inches), and then tie both
ends together.
* Do not sew a reverse stitch at the end.
d
Insert the ends of the thread into the dart
with a hand sewing needle.
e
Iron the dart to one side so that it is flat.
Gathering
Use on waists of skirts, sleeves of shirts, etc.
a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser
foot “J”.
b
Set the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx.
3/16 inch) and the thread tension to
approximately 2.0 (weaker tension).
* If you press after pressing
and then , the stitch length will be set
automatically to 4.0 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and the
thread tension will be automatically set to 2.0.
SEWING THE STITCHES
100
c
Pull the bobbin and upper threads out by
50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches) (see page
55).
a Upper thread
b Bobbin thread
c About 50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches)
d
Sew two rows of straight stitches parallel to
the seam line, then trim excess thread
leaving 50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches).
a Seam line
b 10 to 15 mm (approx. 3/8 inch to 9/16 inch)
c About 50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches)
e
Pull the bobbin threads to obtain the
desired amount of gather, then tie the
threads.
f
Smooth the gathers by ironing them.
g
Sew on the seam line and remove the
basting stitch.
Flat Fell Seam
Use for reinforcing seams and finishing edges
neatly.
a
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Sew the finish line, then cut half of the seam
allowance from the side on which the flat
fell seam will lie.
* When the automatic thread cutting and automatic
reinforcement stitching are preset, reinforcement
stitches will be sewn automatically at the beginning
of sewing. Press the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch”
button to sew a reinforcement stitch and trim the
thread automatically at the end of sewing.
a About 12 mm (approx. 1/2 inch)
b Wrong side
c
Spread the fabric out along the finish line.
a Finish line
b Wrong side
d
Lay both seam allowances on the side of the
shorter seam (cut seam) and iron them.
a Wrong side
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
101
3
e
Fold the longer seam allowance around the
shorter one, and sew the edge of the fold.
a Wrong side
Finished flat fell seam
a Surface
Pintuck
a
Mark along the folds on the wrong side of
the fabric.
a Wrong side
b
Turn the fabric and iron the folded parts
only.
a Surface
c
Select and attach presser foot “I”.
d
Sew a straight stitch along the fold.
* When the automatic thread cutting and automatic
reinforcement stitching are preset, reinforcement
stitches will be sewn automatically at the beginning
of sewing. Press the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch”
button to sew a reinforcement stitch and trim the
thread automatically at the end of sewing.
a Width for pintuck
b Wrong side
c Surface
e
Iron the folds in the same direction.
SEWING THE STITCHES
102
Zigzag Stitches
Zigzag stitches are useful for overcasting, appliqué, patchwork, and many other applications.
Select a stitch, and attach presser foot “J”.
If the stitch which you select has a double mark “ ” at the top of the key display, you can sew reverse
stitches by holding the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button.
If the stitch which you select has a dot mark “ ” at the top of the key display, you can sew reinforcement
stitches by holding the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button (see page 74).
a
Select a stitch.
b
Attach presser foot “J”.
■ Overcasting (Using a Zigzag Stitch)
Sew the overcasting along the edge of the fabric
while positioning the right-hand side needle drop
point just outside the edge of the fabric.
a Needle drop position
■ Appliqué (Using a Zigzag Stitch)
Attach the appliqué material using a temporary
spray adhesive or basting, and then sew it.
* Sew a zigzag stitch while positioning the right-hand
side needle drop point just outside the edge of the
fabric.
Stitch Stitch name
Presser
foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto Manual Auto Manual
Zigzag stitch For overcasting, mending.
Reverse stitch is sewn while
pressing “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4
(1/16)
0.0 - 4.0
(0 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Zigzag stitch For overcasting, mending.
Reinforcement stitch is sewn
while pressing “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4
(1/16)
0.0 - 4.0
(0 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Zigzag stitch (right) Start from right needle position,
zigzag sew at left.
3.5
(1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.4
(1/16)
0.3 - 4.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Zigzag stitch (left) Start from left needle position,
zigzag sew at right.
3.5
(1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.4
(1/16)
0.3 - 4.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
103
3
■ Patchwork (for Crazy Quilt)
Turn back the desired width of fabric and position it
over the lower fabric, then sew so that the stitch
bridges both pieces of fabric.
■ Sewing Curves (Using a Zigzag
Stitch)
Shorten the stitch length setting to obtain a fine
stitch. Sew slowly, keeping the seams parallel with
the fabric edge as you guide the fabric around the
curve.
■ Cord Guide Bobbin Cover (Using a
Zigzag Stitch)
a
Remove the bobbin cover from the machine
(see page 54).
b
Thread the gimp thread through the hole in
the cord guide bobbin cover from top to
bottom. Position the thread in the notch at
the back of the cord guide bobbin cover.
a Notch
b Gimp thread
c
Snap the cord guide bobbin cover into
place, making sure that the gimp thread can
be fed freely.
* Make sure there are no restrictions when feeding the
thread.
d
Set the zigzag width from 2.0-2.5 mm
(approx. 1/16 - 3/32 inch).
e
Attach presser foot “N”.
f
Position the fabric right side up on top of
the cord and place the cord to the rear of
the machine under the presser foot.
a Fabric (right side)
b Gimp thread
g
Lower the presser foot and start sewing to
make a decorative finish.
SEWING THE STITCHES
104
Elastic Zigzag Stitches
Use elastic zigzag stitches for tape attaching, overcasting, darning, or a wide variety of other uses.
a
Select a stitch.
b
Attach presser foot “J”.
■ Tape Attaching
Stretch the tape flat. While stretching the tape flat,
sew the tape to the fabric.
a Tape
■ Overcasting
Use this stitch to sew overcasting on the edge of
stretch fabrics. Sew the overcasting along the edge
of the fabric while positioning the right-hand side
needle drop point just outside the edge of the fabric.
Stitch Stitch name
Presser
foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto Manual Auto Manual
2 steps elastic
zigzag
Overcasting (medium weight
and stretch fabrics), tape and
elastic
5.0
(3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
OK
( J )
2 steps elastic
zigzag
Overcasting (medium weight
and stretch fabrics), tape and
elastic
5.0
(3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
OK
( J )
3 steps elastic
zigzag
Overcasting (medium,
heavyweight and stretch fabrics),
tape and elastic
5.0
(3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
OK
( J )
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
105
3
Overcasting
Use for the edge of seams in skirts or trousers, and the edge of all cuttings. Use presser foot “G”, presser
foot “J”, or the side cutter attachment depending on the kind of overcasting stitch you select.
■ Overcasting Using Presser Foot “G”
a
Select a stitch and attach presser foot “G”.
b
Lower the presser foot so that the presser
foot guide is set flush against the edge of the
fabric.
c
Sew along the presser foot guide.
a Guide
Stitch Stitch name
Presser
foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto Manual Auto Manual
Overcasting stitch Reinforcing of light and medium
weight fabrics
3.5
(1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
2.0
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Overcasting stitch Reinforcing of heavyweight
fabric
5.0
(3/16)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Overcasting stitch Reinforcing of medium,
heavyweight and easily friable
fabrics or decorative stitching.
5.0
(3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
CAUTION
• After the stitch width is adjusted, rotate the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise).
Check that the needle does not touch the
presser foot. If the needle hits the presser foot,
the needle may break and cause injury.
a The needle should not touch the center bar
• If the presser foot is raised to its highest level,
the needle may strike the presser foot.
SEWING THE STITCHES
106
■ Overcasting Using Presser Foot “J”
a
Select a stitch and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Sew with the needle dropping slightly off
the edge of the fabric.
a Needle drop position
Stitch Stitch name
Presser
foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto Manual Auto Manual
Overcasting stitch Reinforced seaming of stretch
fabric
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 9/32)
2.5
(3/32)
0.5 - 4.0
(1/32 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Overcasting stitch Reinforcing of medium stretch
fabric and heavyweight fabric,
decorative stitching
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 9/32)
2.5
(3/32)
0.5 - 4.0
(1/32 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Overcasting stitch Reinforcement of stretch fabric
or decorative stitching
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Overcasting stitch Stretch knit seam
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Single diamond
overcast
Reinforcement and seaming
stretch fabric
6.0
(15/
64)
1.0 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Single diamond
overcast
Reinforcement of stretch fabric
6.0
(15/
64)
1.0 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.8
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
107
3
■ Overcasting Using the Side Cutter
By using the side cutter, you can do overcasting while cutting the fabric.
a
Select a stitch.
b
Follow the steps on page 65 to remove the
presser foot.
c
Thread the needle (see page 57).
d
Position the fork on the side cutter’s
operating lever onto the needle clamp
screw.
a Needle clamp screw
b Operating lever
CAUTION
• Recommended stitches are noted “S” in the lower right corner, therefore sure to only select one of these
stitches listed below. Using another stitch may cause the needle to hit the presser foot and break, possibly
causing injury.
Note
• Thread the needle manually when using the side cutter, or only attach the side cutter after threading
the needle using the “Automatic Threading” button.
Stitch Stitch name
Presser
foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto Manual Auto Manual
With side cutter Straight stitch while cutting
fabrics
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 2.5
(0 - 3/32)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
With side cutter Zigzag stitch while cutting fabrics
3.5
(1/8)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
1.4
(1/16)
0.0 - 4.0
(0 - 3/16)
NO
With side cutter Overcasting stitch while cutting
fabrics
3.5
(1/8)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.0
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
With side cutter Overcasting stitch while cutting
fabrics
5.0
(3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
With side cutter Overcasting stitch while cutting
fabrics
5.0
(3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Memo
• Make sure that the fork of the operating
lever is set onto the needle screw firmly.
SEWING THE STITCHES
108
e
Position the side cutter so that the side
cutter pin is aligned with the notch in the
presser foot holder, and then lower the
presser foot.
a Notch in presser foot holder
b Pin
→ The side cutter is attached.
f
Raise the presser foot and pull out a long
section of the upper thread. Pass it below
the presser foot and pull it out in the fabric
feed direction.
a Presser foot
b Upper thread
g
Make a cut of approximately 20 mm
(approx. 3/4 inch) in the fabric.
a 20 mm (approx. 3/4 inch)
h
Position the fabric so that the right side of
the cut is on top of the guide plate and the
left side of the cut is underneath the presser
foot.
a Guide plate (lower knife)
b Presser foot
c Upper thread
Memo
• If the fabric is not positioned correctly, the
fabric will not be cut.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
109
3
i
Lower the presser foot and start.
→ A seam allowance is cut while the stitching is sewn.
■ When Sewing Straight Stitches
While Using the Side Cutter
The seam margin should be approximately 5 mm
(approx. 3/16 inch).
a Seam margin
CAUTION
• When using the side cutter, sew
between low and mid-speed and do
not touch the knives or operation
lever of the side cutter while sewing
to avoid equipment damage or
injury.
a Guide plate (lower knife)
b Upper knife
c Operation lever
Note
• If the width has been adjusted, rotate the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise).
Check that the needle does not touch the
side cutter. If the needle touches the side
cutter, it might cause the needle to break.
Memo
• The fabric will not be cut if the whole fabric is
simply spread out underneath the presser
foot guide plate. Set the fabric as explained
in step
h from the previous section, and
then start sewing.
• One layer of 13 oz. denim can be cut.
• Clean the side cutter after use to avoid hav-
ing dust and scraps of thread build up on it.
• Add a small amount of oil as required to the
cutting edge of the cutter.
SEWING THE STITCHES
110
Quilting
You can make beautiful quilts quickly and easily with this machine. When making a quilt, you will find it
convenient to use the knee lifter and foot controller to free your hands for other tasks (“Using the Multi-
Function Foot Controller” on page 73 and /or “Using the Knee Lifter” on page 83).
The 30 quilting stitches Q-01 through Q-30 and the utility stitches with “P” or “Q” indicated on their key
are useful for quilting.
The “P” or “Q” at the bottom of the key display indicates that these stitches are intended for (“Q”) quilting
and (“P”) piecing.
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto Manual Auto Manual
Piecing stitch
(Middle)
Piecework/patchwork
— —
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Piecing stitch (Right) Piecework/patchwork
6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
right seam allowance
5.50
(7/32)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Piecing stitch (Left) Piecework/patchwork
6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) left
seam allowance
1.50
(1/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Hand-look quilting
(Middle)
Quilting stitch made to look
like hand quilting stitch
3.50
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Basting stitch
(Middle)
Basting
3.50
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
20
(3/4)
5 - 30
(3/16 - 1-3/16)
NO
Stem stitch Reinforced stitching, sewing
and decorative applications
1.00
(1/16)
1.00 - 3.00
(1/16 - 1/8)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Quilting appliqué
zigzag stitch
Zigzag stitch for quilting and
sewing on appliqué quilt
pieces
3.50
(1/8)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
0.0 - 4.0
(0 - 3/16)
NO
Zigzag stitch (Right) Start from right needle
position, zigzag sew at left
3.50
(1/8)
2.50 - 5.00
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.6
0.3 - 4.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Zigzag stitch (Left) Start from left needle
position, zigzag sew at right
3.50
(1/8)
2.50 - 5.00
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.
6
0.3 - 4.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
2 steps elastic zigzag Overcasting (medium weight
and stretch fabrics), tape and
elastic
5.00
(3/16)
1.50 - 7.00
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
3 steps elastic zigzag Overcasting (medium,
heavyweight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.00
(3/16)
1.50 - 7.00
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Quilting appliqué
stitch
Quilting stitch for invisible
appliqué or attaching binding
2.00
0.50 - 5.00
(1/64 - 3/16)
2.0
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Shell tuck edge Shell tuck edge finish on
fabrics
4.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Blanket stitch Appliqués, decorative
blanket stitch
3.50
(1/8)
2.50 - 7.00
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.6 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
111
3
Quilting stippling Background quilting
7.00
(1/4)
1.00 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Overcasting stitch Stretch knit seam
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Tape attaching Attaching tape to seam in
stretch fabric
5.50
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.4
0.2 - 4.0
(1/61 - 3/16)
NO
Serpentine stitch Decorative stitching and
attaching elastic
5.00
(3/16)
1.50 - 7.00
(1/16 - 1/4)
2.0
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Feather stitch
Fagoting, decorative stitching
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Fagoting cross stitch Fagoting, bridging and
decorative stitching
5.00
(3/16)
2.50 - 7.00
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Couching stitch Decorative stitching,
attaching cord and couching
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.2
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Patchwork double
overlock stitch
Patchwork stitches,
decorative stitching
5.00
(3/16)
2.50 - 7.00
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Smocking stitch Smocking, decorative
stitching
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Rick-rack stitch Decorative top stitching
4.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Decorative stitch Decorative stitching and
appliqué
6.00
(15/
64)
1.00 - 7.00
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Decorative stitch Decorative stitching
5.50
(7/32)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
5.00
(3/16)
1.50 - 7.00
(1/16 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
1.5 - 4.0
(
1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Decorative hems and
bridging stitch
6.00
(15/
64)
1.50 - 7.00
(1/16 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
1.5 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Single diamond
overcast
Reinforcement and seaming
stretch fabric
6.00
(15/
64)
1.00 - 7.00
(1/16 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Overcasting stitch Reinforcement of stretch
fabric or decorative stitching
4.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Piecing stitch (Right) Piecework/patchwork 6.5
mm (approx. 1/4 inch) left
seam allowance
5.5
(7/32)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Piecing stitch
(Middle)
Piecework/patchwork
— —
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto Manual Auto Manual
SEWING THE STITCHES
112
Piecing stitch (Left) Piecework/patchwork 6.5
mm (approx. 1/4 inch) left
seam allowance
1.5
(1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Hand-look quilting Quilting stitch made to look
like hand quilting stitch
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Quilting appliqué
zigzag stitch
Zigzag stitch for quilting and
sewing on appliqué quilt
pieces
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4
(1/16)
0.0 - 4.0
(0 - 3/16)
NO
Quilting appliqué
stitch
Quilting stitch for invisible
appliqué or attaching binding
1.5
(1/16)
0.5 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
1.8
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Quilting stippling Background quilting
7.0
(1/4)
1.0 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto Manual Auto Manual
Memo
• When a stitch pattern in the Quilting Stitches
category (Q-02 through Q-30) is selected, a
finer stitch width can be set than is available
with stitch patterns in other categories.
For example: Stitch Q-03 has 57 needle
positions and stitch Q-19 has 29 width
selections.
Note
• The width range of stitch setting is only
available in the Quilting stitch “Q” quilting
category.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
113
3
■ Piecing
Sewing two pieces of fabric together is called
piecing. When cutting pieces for quilt blocks, make
sure the seam allowance is 6.5 mm (approx.
1/4 inch).
a
Select or and attach presser foot
“J”.
b
Align the edge of the fabric with the edge of
the presser foot, and start sewing.
* To sew a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) seam allowance
along the left edge of the presser foot with
selected, the width should be set to 5.50 mm
(approx. 7/32 inch).
a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
* To sew a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) seam allowance
along the left edge of the presser foot with
selected, the width should be set to 1.50 mm
(approx. 1/32 inch).
a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
* To change the needle position, use or in
the width display.
■ Quilting
Sewing the quilt top, batting, and backing together is
called quilting. You can sew the quilt with the
walking foot to keep the quilt top, batting, and
backing from sliding. The walking foot has a set of
feed dogs that move together with the feed dogs in
the needle plate during sewing.
For straight line quilting, use the walking foot and
the straight stitch needle plate. Always select a
straight stitch (middle needle position) when using
the straight stitch needle plate.
a
Select , or .
b
Attach the walking foot (see page 66).
c
Place one hand on each side of the presser
foot to hold the fabric secure while sewing.
Memo
• Using a straight stitch (middle needle posi-
tion) makes it easier to sew smoothly (see
page 94).
Note
• Thread the needle manually when using the
walking foot, or only attach the walking foot
after threading the needle using the
“Automatic Threading” button.
Memo
• Sew at slow to medium speed.
• Do not sew in reverse or use stitches that
require side ways or reverse feeding.
Always check to be sure that your quilting
surface is securely basted before beginning
to sew. Specialized machine quilt needles
and threads are also available for machine
quilting.
SEWING THE STITCHES
114
■ Appliqué
a
Trace the pattern onto the appliqué fabric
and then cut around it, leaving a 3 to 5 mm
(approx. 1/8 to 3/16 inch) seam allowance.
a Seam allowance: 3 to 5 mm
(approx. 1/8 to 3/16 inch)
b
Place a piece of stabilizer cut to the finished
size of the appliqué design onto the fabric,
and then fold over the seam margin using
an iron. Clip curves when necessary.
c
Turn the appliqué over, and attach the
stabilizer with basting pins or a basting
stitch.
d
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
e
Use the quilting appliqué stitch to attach
the appliqué. Sew around the edge while
dropping the needle as close to the edge as
possible.
a Appliqué
b Needle drop position
CAUTION
• Be careful that the needle does not strike a
basting pin during sewing. Striking a pin can
cause the needle to break, resulting in injury.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
115
3
You can use the appliqué technique to attach
appliqué designs like the three pictured below.
■ Quilting with Satin Stitches
For better fabric control, use the foot controller to
sew with satin stitches. Set the speed control slide to
control the stitch width to make subtle changes in
the stitch width during sewing.
a
Attach the foot controller (see page 73).
b
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
c
Press in the length display to shorten
the stitch length.
d
Press to use the speed control slide
to control the stitch width.
e
Set the width control to “ON”.
f
Press .
→ The display will return to the original screen.
g
Start sewing.
* You can adjust the stitch width during sewing by
moving the sewing speed controller. Slide the lever
to the left, and the stitch width becomes narrower.
Slide it to the right, the stitch width becomes wider.
The size of the width changes equally on both sides
of the middle needle position.
a narrower
b wider
a Dresden plate
b Stained glass
c Sunbonnet sue
Memo
• The setting will vary according to the kind of
fabric and the thickness of the thread, but a
length of 0.3 to 0.5 mm (approx. 1/64 to 1/32
inch) is best for satin stitches.
Memo
• You can use the speed control slide to
adjust the stitch width. Use the foot
controller to adjust the sewing speed.
SEWING THE STITCHES
116
Example: Changing the width
h
When you are finished sewing, set the
width control back to “OFF”.
■ Free Motion Quilting
With free motion quilting, the feed dogs can be
lowered by pressing , so that the fabric can be
moved freely in any direction.
For free motion quilting, use free motion quilting
foot “C” or free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
depending on the stitch that is selected, and set the
machine to free motion sewing mode. In this mode,
the presser foot is raised to the necessary height for
free motion sewing.
We recommend attaching the foot controller and
sewing at a consistent speed. You can adjust the
sewing speed with the speed control slide on the
machine.
Using Free motion Quilting Foot “C”
Use the free motion quilting foot “C” with straight
stitch needle plate for free motion sewing.
Free motion quilting foot “C”
a
Attach the straight stitch needle plate (see
page 97).
a Round hole
b
Select or .
CAUTION
• With free motion quilting, control the feeding
speed of the fabric to match the sewing speed.
If the fabric is moved faster than the sewing
speed, the needle may break or other damage
may result.
• When using free motion quilting foot “C”, be
sure to use the straight stitch needle plate and
sew with the needle in middle (center) needle
position. If the needle is moved to any position
other than the middle (center) needle position,
the needle may break, which may result in
injuries.
Memo
• When starting to sew, the internal sensor
detects the thickness of the fabric, and the
quilting foot is raised to the height specified
in the machine settings screen. Press
to display “Free Motion Foot
Height” on 2/8 of the settings screen. Press
or to select the height that the
quilting foot is raised above the fabric.
Increase the setting by pressing , for
example, when sewing very stretchy fabric,
so that it is easier to sew.
• In order to sew with a balanced tension, it
may be necessary to adjust the upper thread
tension. Test with a sample piece of fabric
that is similar to your chosen fabric.
Memo
• Notice this needle plate has a round hole for
the needle.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
117
3
c
Press to set the machine to free motion
sewing mode.
→ The key appears as , the quilting foot is raised
to the necessary height, and then the feed dogs are
lowered for free motion sewing.
a Free motion quilting foot “C”
→ When stitch Q-01 or 1-31 is selected, free motion
quilting foot “C” is indicated in the upper-left corner
of the screen.
d
Remove the presser foot holder (see page
66).
e
Attach free motion quilting foot “C” at the
front with the presser foot holder screw
aligned with the notch in the quilting foot.
a Presser foot holder screw
b Notch
f
Hold the quilting foot in place with your
right hand, and tighten the presser foot
holder screw using the screwdriver with
your left hand.
a Presser foot holder screw
g
Use both hands to stretch the fabric taut,
and then move the fabric at a consistent
pace in order to sew uniform stitches
roughly 2.0-2.5 mm (approx. 1/16 - 3/32
inch) in length.
a Stitch
a
Note
• Make sure that the quilting foot is attached
properly and not slanted.
CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
included screwdriver. Otherwise, the needle
may touch the quilting foot, causing it to bend
or break.
SEWING THE STITCHES
118
h
Press to cancel the free motion sewing
mode.
→ Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.
i
After sewing, make sure to remove the
straight stitch needle plate and presser foot
“C”, and reinstall the regular needle plate
and the needle plate cover.
Using free motion Open Toe Quilting Foot “O”
The free motion open toe quilting foot “O” is used
for free motion quilting with zigzag or decorative
stitches or for free motion quilting of straight lines on
fabric with an uneven thickness. Various stitches
can be sewn using free motion open toe quilting foot
“O”. For details on the stitches that can be used,
refer to the “STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
Free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
a
Press to set the machine to free motion
sewing mode.
→ The key appears as , the quilting foot is raised
to the necessary height, and then the feed dogs are
lowered for free motion sewing.
Note
• Free motion open toe quilting foot “O” can
also be used with the straight stitch needle
plate. We recommend using free motion
open toe quilting foot “O” with free motion
sewing of fabrics of uneven thicknesses.
• When using the straight stitch needle plate,
all straight stitches become middle needle
position stitches. You cannot change the
needle position using the width display.
Memo
• Normally, the feed dogs are raised for
regular sewing.
• Do not be discouraged with your initial
results. The technique requires practice.
Memo
• In order to sew with a balanced tension, it
may be necessary to adjust the upper thread
tension (see page 79). Test with a sample
piece of quilting fabric.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
119
3
b
Select a stitch.
c
Remove the presser foot holder (see page
66).
d
Attach free motion open toe quilting foot
“O” by positioning the pin of the quilting
foot above the needle clamp screw and
aligning the lower-left of the quilting foot
and the presser bar.
a Pin
b Needle clamp screw
c Presser bar
e
Hold the quilting foot in place with your
right hand, and tighten the presser foot
holder screw using the screwdriver with
your left hand.
a Presser foot holder screw
f
Use both hands to stretch the fabric taut,
and then move the fabric at a consistent
pace in order to sew uniform stitches
roughly 2.0-2.5 mm (approx. 1/16 - 3/32
inch) in length.
a Stitch
g
Press to cancel the free motion sewing
mode.
→ Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.
■ Echo Quilting Using the Free Motion
Echo Quilting Foot “E”
Sewing quilting lines at equal distances around a
motif is called echo quilting. The quilting lines,
which appear as ripples echoing away from the
motif, are the distinguishing characteristic of this
quilting style. Use the free motion echo quilting foot
“E” for echo quilting. Using the measurement on the
presser foot as a guide, sew around the motif at a
fixed interval. We recommend attaching the foot
controller and sewing at a consistent speed.
Free motion echo quilting foot “E” measurement
a 6.4 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
b 9.5 mm (approx. 3/8 inch)
Memo
• When stitch Q-01 or 1-31 is selected, free
motion quilting foot “C” is indicated in the
upper-left corner of the screen. When the
other stitches are selected, free motion open
toe quilting foot “O” is indicated in the
screen.
Note
• Make sure that the quilting foot is not
slanted.
CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
included screwdriver. Otherwise, the needle
may touch the quilting foot, causing it to bend
or break.
Memo
• Do not be discouraged with your initial
results. The technique requires practice.
SEWING THE STITCHES
120
a
Select .
b
Press to set the machine to free motion
sewing mode.
→ The key appears as , the quilting foot is raised
to the necessary height, then the feed dogs are
lowered for free motion sewing.
c
Follow the steps on page 65 “Removing the
Presser Foot” to remove the presser foot.
d
Remove the presser foot holder (see page
66) and the screw.
e
Position the free motion echo quilting foot
“E” on the left side of the presser bar with
the holes in the quilting foot and presser bar
aligned.
f
Tighten the screw with the included
screwdriver.
CAUTION
• With free motion quilting, control the feeding
speed of the fabric to match the sewing speed.
If the fabric is moved faster than the sewing
speed, the needle may break or other damage
may result.
Memo
• When starting to sew, the internal sensor
detects the thickness of the fabric, and the
quilting foot is raised to the height specified
in the machine settings screen. Press
to display “Free Motion Foot
Height” on 2/8 of the settings screen (see
page 35). Press or to select the
height that the quilting foot is raised above
the fabric. Increase the setting by pressing
, for example, when sewing very soft
fabric, so that it is easier to sew.
• In order to sew with a balanced tension, it
may be necessary to adjust the upper thread
tension (see page 79). Test with a sample
piece of quilting fabric.
CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
included screwdriver. Otherwise, the needle
may touch the quilting foot, causing it to bend
or break.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
121
3
g
Using the measurement on the quilting foot
as a guide, sew around the motif.
a 6.4 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
Finished project
h
Press to cancel the free motion sewing
mode.
→ Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.
SEWING THE STITCHES
122
Blind Hem Stitches
Secure the bottoms of skirts and pants with a blind hem. Two stitches are available for blind hem
stitching.
a
Turn the skirt or pants wrong side out.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
c Lower edge of fabric
b
Fold the fabric along the desired edge of the
hem, and press.
c
Use a chalk to mark on the fabric about 5
mm (3/16 inch) from the edge of the fabric,
and then baste it.
d
Fold back the fabric inside along the
basting.
Stitch Stitch name
Presser
foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto Manual Auto Manual
Blind hem stitch Blind hem stitching on
mediumweight fabrics
0.0
(0)
+3.0 - -3.0
(+1/8 - -1/8)
2.0
(1/16)
1.0 - 3.5
(1/16 - 1/8)
NO
Blind hem stitch
stretch
Blind hem stitching on stretch
fabrics
0.0
(0)
+3.0 - -3.0
(+1/8 - -1/8)
2.0
(1/16)
1.0 - 3.5
(1/16 - 1/8)
NO
Memo
• When the size of cylindrical pieces is too
small to slide onto the arm or the length is
too short, the fabric will not feed and desired
results may not be achieved.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of Fabric
c Edge of fabric
d Desired edge of hem
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
2
1
3
1
2
1
2
1
3
3
4
2
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
c Edge of fabric
d Desired edge of hem
e 5 mm (3/16 inch)
f Basting
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
c Edge of fabric
d Desired edge of hem
e 5 mm (3/16 inch)
f Basting
g Basting point
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
1
2
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
1
3
6
5
1
1
2
7
4
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
123
3
e
Unfold the edge of fabric, and position the
fabric with the wrong side facing up.
f
Attach blind hem foot “R”.
g
Select or .
h
Remove the flat bed attachment to use the
free-arm.
i
Slide the item that you wish to sew onto the
free arm, make sure that the fabric feeds
correctly, and then start sewing.
a Free arm
j
Position the fabric with the edge of the
folded hem against the guide of the presser
foot, and then lower the presser foot lever.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Fold of hem
c Guide
k
Adjust the stitch width until the needle
slightly catches the fold of the hem.
a Needle drop point
When you change the needle drop point, raise the
needle, and then change the stitch width.
a Stitch width
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
c Edge of fabric
d Desired edge of hem
e Basting point
f Basting
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
5
1
1
1
1
1
2
6
3
4
Memo
• Blind hem stitches cannot be sewn if the left
needle drop point does not catch the fold. If
the needle catches too much of the fold, the
fabric cannot be unfolded and the seam
appearing on the right side of the fabric will
be very large, leaving an unattractive finish.
If you experience either of these cases,
follow the instructions below to solve the
problem.
SEWING THE STITCHES
124
■ If the Needle Catches Too Much of
the Hem Fold
The needle is too far to the left.
Press to decrease the stitch width so that the
needle slightly catches the fold of the hem.
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
■ If the Needle does not Catch the
Hem Fold
The needle is too far to the right.
Press to increase the stitch width so that the
needle slightly catches the fold of the hem.
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
l
Sew with the fold of the hem against the
presser foot guide.
m
Remove the basting stitching and reverse
the fabric.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
1
2
1
2
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
125
3
Appliqué
a
Use a temporary spray adhesive, fabric glue
or a basting stitch to attach the appliqué to
the fabric.
* This will keep the fabric from moving during
sewing.
a Appliqué
b Fabric glue
b
Select or .
* Adjust the stitch length and width to correspond to
the appliqué shape, size, and quality of material (see
page 78).
c
Attach presser foot “J”. Check that the
needle drops slightly off the edge of the
appliqué, then start sewing.
a Appliqué material
a Needle drop position
■ Appliqué Sharp Curves
Stop the machine with the needle in the fabric
outside the appliqué. Raise the presser foot and turn
the fabric a little bit at a time while sewing for an
attractive finish to the seam.
■ Appliqué Corners
Stop the machine with the needle in the right
position of the outside (or inside) corner of the
appliqué. Raise the presser foot and pivot the fabric
to align the fabric edge. Lower the presser foot and
continue stitching.
a Outside corner
b Inside corner
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
Memo
• Placing a lightweight tear away stabilizer
beneath the stitching area will improve the
stitch placement along the edge of the appli-
qué fabric.
SEWING THE STITCHES
126
Shelltuck Stitches
Shelltuck stitches give an attractive appearance of
shells along the curve of a collar. This stitch
pattern can be used for edging the neckline or
sleeves of dresses and blouses.
a
Select .
b
Increase the upper thread tension for an
attractive scallop finish to the shelltuck
stitches (see page 79).
c
To make rows of shell tuck stitches, fold the
fabric in half along the bias.
d
Attach presser foot “J”. Set the needle drop
point slightly off the edge of the fabric, and
start sewing.
a Needle drop position
e
Unfold the fabric, and iron the tucks to one
side.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
Memo
• If the upper thread tension is too weak, the
shelltuck stitches will not scallop.
Memo
• Use a thin fabric.
Memo
• To make shell tucks at the edge of a collar or
neckline, follow the pattern’s instructions
and then use this stitch to make a decorative
finish on the collar or neckline.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
127
3
Scallop Stitches
This wave-shaped satin stitch is called the scallop
stitch. Use this stitch to decorate the edges of
blouse collars and handkerchiefs or use it as a hem
accent.
a
Select .
b
Attach presser foot “N”. Sew scallop
stitches along the edge of the fabric.
* Do not sew directly on the edge of the fabric.
c
Trim along the seam, making sure not to cut
the stitches.
Crazy Quilting
For a decorative look called “Crazy Quilting”, the
following stitches can be sewn on top of a pressed
seam allowance.
a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser
foot “J”.
b
With the right sides facing each other, sew
two pieces of fabric together, and then
press open the seam allowance.
a Straight stitch
b Seam margins
c 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
d Wrong side
c
Select a stitch for top stitching.
d
Place the fabric right side up in the
machine, and center the presser foot over
the seam when sewing.
a Right side of fabric
Memo
• A temporary spray adhesive may be neces-
sary for lightweight fabrics. Test sew
the fabric before sewing a project.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
Memo
• Use a seam sealant to secure the edges of
the scallop stitches.
SEWING THE STITCHES
128
Smocking Stitches
Use smocking stitches for decorative sewing on
clothes, etc.
a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser
foot “J”.
b
Set the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx.
3/16 inch) and loosen the upper thread
tension to approximately 2.0 (see “Setting
the Stitch Length” on page 79 and “Setting
the Thread Tension” on page 79).
c
Pull the bobbin and upper threads out by
50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches).
d
Sew the seams, leaving approximately
10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch) between the
seams, then trim excess thread, leaving
50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches).
a Approximately 10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch)
e
Pull the bobbin threads to obtain the
desired amount of gather, and then smooth
the gathers by ironing them.
f
Select or .
g
Sew the spaces between the straight seams.
h
Pull out the straight stitch threads.
Fagoting
When there is a space between two fabrics with
thread sewn over the space to join the fabrics
together, it is called fagoting. Use this stitch when
sewing blouses or children’s clothes.
a
Baste two pieces of fabric onto thin paper,
leaving a space of 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
between the fabrics.
* If you draw a line down the middle of the thin paper
or water-soluble stabilizer, sewing is easier.
a 4.0 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
b Paper
c Basting stitches
b
Select or .
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
129
3
c
Attach presser foot “J”. Align the center of
the presser foot with the middle of the
space between the fabrics and begin
sewing.
a Basting stitches
d
When sewing is finished, gently tear the
paper away.
Tape or Elastic Attaching
a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser
foot “J”.
b
Set the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx.
3/16 inch), and loosen the upper thread
tension to 2.0 (see “Setting the Stitch
Length” on page 79 and “Setting the Thread
Tension” on page 79).
c
Sew two rows of straight stitches on the
right side of the fabric, then pull the bobbin
thread to create the necessary gather.
d
Place the tape over the gather, and hold it
in place with basting pins.
a Tape
e
Select or .
f
Sew over the tape (or elastic).
Memo
• Use a thick thread.
Memo
• Be sure that neither automatic reinforcement
nor automatic thread cutting is
selected.
Memo
• Before sewing the straight stitch, rotate the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)
and pull up the bobbin thread. Holding the
top and bobbin thread, pull a length of
thread out from the rear of the machine. (Be
sure that the presser foot is raised.)
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
CAUTION
• Be sure the needle does not strike a basting
pin, or any other objects, during sewing. The
thread could tangle or the needle could break,
causing injury.
SEWING THE STITCHES
130
g
Pull out the straight stitch threads.
Heirloom
■ Hemstitching (1) (Daisy Stitch)
Use for sewing tablecloths, decorative hems, and
decorative stitching on shirt fronts.
a
Insert a type 130/705H, size 100/16 Wing
needle.
* This specialty sewing needle is not furnished with
your machine. Must be purchased separately.
b
Select a stitch and attach presser foot “N”.
* Select any stitch between 3-01 and 3-25.
c
Start sewing.
Example: Illustration of finished product
■ Hemstitching (2) (Drawn Work (1))
a
Pull out several threads from one area on a
piece of fabric to open the area.
* Pull out 5 or 6 threads to leave a 3 mm
(approx. 1/8 inch) area open.
Memo
• Use a light to medium weight homespun fab-
ric with a little stiffness.
CAUTION
• The “Automatic Threading” button cannot be
used. Thread the wing needle by hand, from
front to back. Using the “Automatic
Threading” button may result in damage to the
machine.
• A more attractive finish can be obtained if you
use a “130/705H Wing” needle when sewing
these patterns. If using a wing needle and the
stitch width has been set manually, check that
the needle will not touch the presser foot by
carefully rotating the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) before starting to sew.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
Memo
• Loosely woven fabrics work best for this.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
131
3
b
Select .
c
Attach presser foot “N”. With the right side
of the fabric facing up, sew one edge of the
open area.
d
Press to create a mirror image of the
stitch.
e
Match beginning needle drop points on the
opposite edge of the open area to keep the
stitching symmetrical.
■ Hemstitching (3) (Drawn Work (2))
a
Pull out several threads from both sides of
the 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) area which
are not yet open.
* Pull out four threads, leave five threads, and then
pull out four threads. The width of five threads is
approximately 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) or less.
a Approx. 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) or less
b Four threads (pull out)
c Five threads (leave)
b
Select .
c
Sew the decorative stitch in the center of
the five threads created above.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
Memo
• A wing needle can be used for Hemstitching
(3).
SEWING THE STITCHES
132
One-step Buttonholes
With one-step buttonholes, you can make buttonholes appropriate to the size of your button.
Stitch Stitch name
Presser
foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto Manual Auto Manual
Narrow rounded
buttonhole
Buttonhole on light to medium
weight fabrics
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Wide round ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with extra space for
larger buttons
5.5
(7/32)
3.5 - 5.5
(1/8 - 7/32)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Tapered round
ended buttonhole
Reinforced waist tapered
buttonholes
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Round ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with vertical bar
tack in heavyweight fabrics
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Round ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with bar tack
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Round double ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes for fine, medium to
heavyweight fabrics
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Narrow squared
buttonhole
Buttonholes for light to medium
weight fabrics
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Wide squared
buttonhole
Buttonholes with extra space for
larger decorative buttons
5.5
(7/32)
3.5 - 5.5
(1/8 - 7/32)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/
64 - 1/16)
NO
Squared buttonhole Heavy-duty buttonholes with
vertical bar tacks
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Stretch buttonhole Buttonholes for stretch or woven
fabrics
6.0
(15/
64)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
1.0
(1/16)
0.5 - 2.0
(1/32 - 1/16)
NO
Heirloom buttonhole Buttonholes for heirloom and
stretch fabrics
6.0
(15/
64)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
1.5
(1/16)
1.0 - 3.0
(1/1 - 1/8)
NO
Bound buttonhole The first step in making bound
buttonholes
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 6.0
(0 - 15/64)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Keyhole buttonhole Buttonholes in heavyweight or
thick fabrics for larger flat
buttons
7.0
(1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5
(1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Tapered keyhole
buttonhole
Buttonholes in medium to heavy
weight fabrics for larger flat
buttons
7.0
(1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5
(1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Keyhole buttonhole Buttonholes with vertical bar
tack for reinforcement in
heavyweight or thick fabrics
7.0
(1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5
(1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
133
3
One-step buttonholes are sewn from the front of the presser foot to the back, as shown below.
a Reinforcement stitching
a
Select a buttonhole stitch, and attach
buttonhole foot “A”.
b
Mark the position and length of the
buttonhole on the fabric.
c
Pull out the button holder plate on the
presser foot, and insert the button that will
be put through the buttonhole. Then tighten
the button holder plate around the button.
a Button holder plate
d
Align the presser foot with the mark on the
fabric, and lower the presser foot.
a Mark on the fabric
b Marks on the presser foot
Memo
• The maximum buttonhole length is about
28 mm (approx. 1-1/16 inches) (diameter +
thickness of the button).
Memo
• The size of the buttonhole is determined by
the size of the button in the button holder
plate.
A
SEWING THE STITCHES
134
e
Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is
positioned behind the metal bracket on the
buttonhole foot.
a Buttonhole lever
a Metal bracket
f
Gently hold the end of the upper thread,
and then start sewing.
* Feed the fabric carefully by hand while the
buttonhole is sewn.
→ Once sewing is completed, the machine
automatically sews reinforcement stitches, and then
stops.
g
Insert a pin along the inside of one of the
bar tacks, and then insert the seam ripper
into the center of the buttonhole and cut
towards the pin.
a Basting pin
b Seam ripper
Note
• Pass the thread underneath the presser
foot.
• Slide the outside frame of the buttonhole
foot backward as far as possible as shown in
the illustration, making sure that there is no
gap behind the part of the foot marked “A”. If
the buttonhole foot is not slid back as far as
possible, the buttonhole will not be sewn at
the correct size.
Memo
• If automatic thread cutting is turned on
before you start sewing, both threads are
automatically cut after the reinforcement
stitches are sewn. If the fabric does not feed
(for example, because it is too thick),
increase the stitch length setting.
CAUTION
• When using the seam ripper to open the
buttonhole, do not put your hand or finger in
the path of the ripper. The ripper may slip and
cause injury. Do not use the seam ripper in
any other way than how it is intended.
Memo
• For keyhole buttonholes, use the eyelet
punch to make a hole in the rounded end of
the buttonhole. Then insert a pin along the
inside of one of the bar tacks, insert a seam
ripper into the hole made with the eyelet
punch, and cut towards the pin.
a Eyelet punch
b Basting pin
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
135
3
■ Sewing Stretch Fabrics
When sewing on stretch fabric with or ,
sew the buttonhole stitches over a gimp thread.
a
Hook the gimp thread onto the back of
presser foot “A”. Insert the ends into the
grooves at the front of the presser foot, and
then temporarily tie them there.
a Upper thread
b
Lower the presser foot and start sewing.
c
Once sewing is completed, gently pull the
gimp thread to remove any slack, and trim
off any excess.
■ Odd Shaped Buttons/Buttons that do
Not Fit into the Button Holder Plate
Use the markings on the presser foot scale to set the
size of the buttonhole. One mark on the presser foot
scale equals 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch).
Add the button diameter and thickness together, and
then set the plate at the calculated value.
a Presser foot scale
b Button holder plate
c Completed measurement of diameter + thickness
d 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
Memo
• Set the width of the satin stitches to the
width of the gimp thread, and set the button-
hole width to be 2-3 times the width of the
gimp thread.
Memo
• After using the seam ripper to cut open the
threads over the buttonhole, trim off the
threads.
Memo
• For example, for a button with a diameter of
15 mm (approx. 9/16 inch) and a thickness
of 10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch), the scale
should be set at 25 mm (approx. 1 inch).
a 10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch)
b 15 mm (approx. 9/16 inch)
SEWING THE STITCHES
136
Four-step Buttonholes
You can sew 4-step buttonholes using the following 4 stitches together. You can sew any desired length
for the buttonhole when using 4-step buttonholes. 4-step buttonholes are a good option when attaching
oversize buttons.
Four-step buttonholes are sewn as shown below.
a
Mark the position and length of the
buttonhole on the fabric.
a Marks on fabric
b Finished stitching
Note
• When changing the stitch settings, make sure that all stitch settings are changed to match.
Stitch Stitch name
Presser
foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto Manual Auto Manual
4 steps buttonhole 1 Left side of 4 steps buttonhole
5.0
(7/32)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
4 steps buttonhole 2 Bar tack of 4 steps buttonhole
5.0
(7/32)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
4 steps buttonhole 3 Right side of 4 steps buttonhole
5.0
(7/32)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
4 steps buttonhole 4 Bar tack of 4 steps buttonhole
5.0
(7/32)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
137
3
b
Attach monogramming foot “N”, and select
stitch to sew the left side of the
buttonhole.
c
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
sewing.
d
Sew the desired length for the buttonhole
and press the “Start/Stop” button again.
e
Select stitch to sew the bar tack and
press the “Start/Stop” button.
→ The machine will automatically stop after sewing
the bar tack.
f
Select stitch to sew the right side of
the buttonhole, and press the “Start/Stop”
button to begin sewing.
g
Sew the right side of the buttonhole and
press the “Start/Stop” button again.
* Sew the right side of the buttonhole the same length
as the left.
h
Select stitch to sew the bar tack and
then press the “Start/Stop” button.
→ The machine will automatically sew off the bar tack
tie and stop when the bar tack is complete.
i
Raise the presser foot and remove the
fabric.
j
Refer to page 134 to open the buttonhole.
SEWING THE STITCHES
138
■ Darning
Use darning stitches for mending and other applications.
Darning is performed by sewing from the front of the presser foot to the back as shown below.
a Reinforcement stitches
a
Select a stitch, and attach buttonhole foot
“A”.
b
Set the scale to the desired length of the
darning.
a Presser foot scale
b Completed length measurement
c Width 7 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
d 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
Stitch Stitch name
Presser
foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto Manual Auto Manual
Darning Darning medium weight fabric
7.0
(1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 2.5
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Darning Darning heavyweight fabric
7.0
(1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 2.5
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Memo
• The maximum length for darning is 28 mm
(approx. 1-1/16 inches).
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
139
3
c
Check that the needle drops at the desired
position and lower the presser foot, making
sure the upper thread passes underneath
the buttonhole foot.
d
Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is
positioned behind the metal bracket on the
buttonhole foot.
a Buttonhole lever
a Metal bracket
e
Gently hold the end of the upper thread,
and then press the “Start/Stop” button to
start the machine.
→ Once sewing is completed, the machine
automatically sews reinforcement stitches, and then
stops.
Note
• Pass the thread underneath the presser
foot.
• Set the presser foot so that there is no gap
behind the section marked with an “A” (the
shaded area in the illustration below). If
there is a gap, the size of the darning will not
be correct.
Memo
• If automatic thread cutting is turned on
before you start sewing, both threads are
automatically cut after the reinforcement
stitches are sewn. If the fabric does not feed
(for example, because it is too thick),
increase the stitch length setting.
SEWING THE STITCHES
140
Bar Tacks
Use bar tacks to reinforce areas that will be subject to strain, such as pocket corners.
a
Select .
b
Attach buttonhole foot “A” and set the
scale to the length of the bar tack you wish
to sew.
a Presser foot scale
b Completed length measurement
c 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
c
Set the fabric so that the pocket moves
toward you during sewing.
d
Check the first needle drop point and lower
the presser foot.
a 2 mm (approx. 1/16 inch)
Stitch Stitch name
Presser
foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto Manual Auto Manual
Bar tack Reinforcement at opening of
pocket, etc.
2.0
(1/16)
1.0 - 3.0
(1/16 - 1/8)
0.4
(1/64)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Memo
• Bar tacks can be between 5 mm (approx.
3/16 inch) and 28 mm (approx. 1-1/16
inches). Bar tacks are usually between 5
mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and 10 mm (approx.
3/8 inch).
Note
• Pass the thread underneath the presser
foot.
• Slide the outside frame of the buttonhole
foot backward as far as possible as shown in
the illustration, making sure that there is no
gap behind the part of the foot marked “A”. If
the buttonhole foot is not slid back as far as
possible, the bar tack will not be sewn to the
correct size.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
141
3
e
Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is
positioned behind the metal bracket on the
buttonhole foot.
a Metal bracket
f
Gently hold the end of the upper thread and
begin sewing.
→ When sewing is completed, the machine will sew
reinforcement stitches and stop automatically.
■ Bar Tacks on Thick Fabrics
Place a piece of folded fabric or cardboard beside
the fabric being sewn to level the buttonhole foot
and allow for easier and even feeding.
a Presser foot
b Thick paper
c Fabric
Memo
• If automatic thread cutting is turned on
before you start sewing, both threads are
automatically cut after the reinforcement
stitches are sewn. If the fabric does not feed
(for example, because it is too thick),
increase the stitch length setting.
SEWING THE STITCHES
142
Button Sewing
Buttons with 2 or 4 holes can be attached, using the machine.
a
Select .
→ The feed dogs are lowered automatically.
b
Raise the presser foot.
c
Attach button sewing foot “M”, slide the
button along the metal plate and into the
presser foot, and lower the presser foot.
a Button
b Metal plate
d
Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to check that the needle
goes into each hole correctly.
* If the needle does not reach the holes on the left
side, adjust the stitch width.
* To attach the button more securely, repeat the
process.
e
Gently hold the end of the upper thread and
start sewing.
→ The machine stops automatically when sewing is
finished.
f
From the wrong side of the fabric, pull the
end of the bobbin thread to pull the upper
thread through to the wrong side of the
fabric. Tie the two thread ends together and
cut the threads.
g
After the button is attached, select another
stitch and rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.
Stitch Stitch name
Presser
foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto Manual Auto Manual
Button sewing Attaching buttons
3.5
(1/8)
2.5 - 4.5
(3/32 - 3/16)
— —NO
Note
• Do not use the automatic thread cutting function when sewing buttons. Otherwise, you will lose the
thread ends.
CAUTION
• Make sure the needle does not strike the
button during sewing. The needle may break
and cause injury.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
143
3
■ Attaching 4 Hole Buttons
Sew the two holes closest to you. Then raise the
presser foot and move the fabric so that the needle
goes into the next two holes, and sew them in the
same way.
■ Attaching a Shank to the Button
a
Pull the shank lever toward you before
sewing.
a Shank lever
b
Pull the two ends of the upper thread
between the button and the fabric, wind
them around the shank, and then tie them
firmly together.
c
Tie the ends of the bobbin thread from the
beginning and end of sewing together on
the wrong side of the fabric.
d
Cut off any excess thread.
Note
• When sewing is completed, be sure to select
the other stitch and rotate the handwheel
toward you (counterclockwise) to raise the
feed dogs.
SEWING THE STITCHES
144
Eyelet
Use this stitch for making belt holes and other similar applications.
a
Select or .
b
Use in either the stitch width
display or the stitch length display to
choose the size of the eyelet.
* Actual size
a Large 7 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
b Medium 6 mm (approx. 15/64 inch)
c Small 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
c
Attach monogramming foot “N”, then
rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to check the needle
drop position.
a Needle drop position
d
Lower the presser foot and start sewing.
→ When sewing is finished, the machine sews
reinforcement stitches and stops automatically.
e
Use the eyelet punch to make a hole in the
center of the stitching.
Stitch Stitch name
Presser
foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto Manual Auto Manual
Eyelet For making eyelets, holes on
belts, etc.
7.0
(1/4)
7.0 6.0 5.0
(1/4 15/64 3/16)
7.0
(1/4)
7.0 6.0 5.0
(1/4 15/64 3/16)
NO
Star eyelet For making star-shaped eyelets
on holes.
— — — —NO
Note
• Only one size is available for .
Note
• If the stitch pattern comes out poorly, make
adjustments to “SEWING STITCH
PATTERNS” on page 161.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
145
3
Multi-directional Sewing
(Straight Stitch and Zigzag Stitch)
Use these stitch patterns to attach patches or
emblems to pant legs, shirt sleeves, etc.
a
Remove the flat bed attachment to use the
free-arm.
b
Select and attach monogramming foot
“N”.
c
Set the needle in the fabric at the sewing
start point, and sew seam “1” as shown.
a Start Point
d
Select and sew seam “2” as shown.
* The fabric will move sideways, guide the fabric by
hand to keep sewing straight.
e
Select and sew seam “3” as shown.
→ The fabric feeds forward while stitching backward.
f
Select and sew seam “4” as shown.
→ The seam will be connected to the starting point of
seam 1.
Memo
• Insert the tubular piece of fabric onto the
free-arm, and then sew in the order shown in
the illustration.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
SEWING THE STITCHES
146
Zipper Insertion
■ Centered Zipper
Use for bags and other such applications.
a
Select .
b
Attach presser foot “J” and sew straight
stitches up to the zipper opening. Change to
a basting stitch (see page 98) and sew to the
top of the fabric.
a Basting stitches
b Reverse stitches
c End of zipper opening
d Wrong side
c
Press the seam allowance open and attach
the zipper with a basting stitch in the
middle of each side of the zipper tape.
a Basting stitches
b Zipper
c Wrong side
d
Remove presser foot “J”. Align the right
side of the pin in zipper foot “I” with the
presser foot holder, and attach the zipper
foot.
a Right
b Left
c Needle drop position
e
Topstitch 7 to 10 mm (approx. 1/4 to
3/8 inch) from the seamed edge of the
fabric, then remove the basting.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
Note
• Make sure you sew using the middle needle
position.
CAUTION
• When using zipper foot “I”, make sure the
straight stitch, middle needle position is
selected. Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to make sure the needle
does not strike the presser foot. If another
stitch is selected, the needle will strike the
presser foot, causing the needle to break and
possibly causing injury.
CAUTION
• Make sure the needle does not strike the
zipper during sewing. If the needle strikes the
zipper, the needle may break, leading to
injury.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
147
3
■ Inserting a Side Zipper
Use for side zippers in skirts or dresses.
a
Select .
b
Attach presser foot “J” and sew straight
stitches up to the zipper opening. Change to
a basting stitch and sew to the top of the
fabric.
a Reverse stitches
b Wrong side of fabric
c Basting stitches
d End of zipper opening
c
Press the seam allowance open and align
the folded hem along the teeth of the
zipper, while maintaining 3 mm (approx.
1/8 inch) of sewing space.
a Zipper pull tab
b Wrong side of fabric
c Zipper teeth
d End of zipper opening
e 3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch)
d
Remove presser foot “J”.
e
Align the right side of the pin in zipper foot
“I” with the presser foot holder, and attach
the presser foot.
a Right
b Left
c Needle drop position
f
Set the presser foot in the 3 mm (approx.
1/8 inch) margin.
g
Starting from the end of the zipper opening,
sew to a point about 50 mm (approx.
2 inches) from the edge of the fabric, then
stop the machine.
h
Pull down the zipper slider, then continue
sewing to the edge of the fabric.
a 50 mm (approx. 2 inches)
b 3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch)
Note
• Make sure you sew using the middle needle
position.
CAUTION
• When using zipper foot “I”, make sure the
straight stitch, middle needle position is
selected. Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to make sure the needle
does not strike the presser foot. If another
stitch is selected, the needle will strike the
presser foot, causing the needle to break and
possibly causing injury.
CAUTION
• Make sure the needle does not strike the
zipper during sewing. If the needle strikes the
zipper, the needle may break, leading to
injury.
SEWING THE STITCHES
148
i
Close the zipper, turn the fabric over, and
sew a basting stitch.
a Front of the skirt (wrong side of fabric)
b Basting stitches
c Front of the skirt (right side of fabric)
d Back of the skirt (right side of fabric)
j
Remove the presser foot, and reattach it so
that the left side of the pin is attached to the
presser foot holder.
* When sewing the left side of the zipper, the needle
should drop on the right side of the presser foot.
When sewing the right side of the zipper, the needle
should drop on the left side of the presser foot.
a Right
b Left
c Needle drop position
k
Set the fabric so that the left edge of the
presser foot touches the edge of the zipper
teeth.
l
Sew reverse stitches at the top of the
zipper, then continue sewing.
m
Stop sewing about 50 mm (approx.
2 inches) from the edge of the fabric, leave
the needle in the fabric, and remove the
basting stitches.
n
Open the zipper and sew the rest of the
seam.
a Basting stitches
b 7 to 10 mm (approx. 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch)
c Reverse stitches
d 50 mm (approx. 2 inches)
Edge Sewing
Using the built-in camera, the width of the area
from the edge of the fabric to the stitching line can
be measured and set for edge sewing.
This function can be used when the edge of the
fabric is straight or a gentle curve.
a Straight
b Curved
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
149
3
a
Select a stitch.
* Edge sewing using the built-in camera cannot be
used with patterns where appears in gray
when the pattern is selected.
b
Attach the vertical stitch alignment foot
“V”.
c
Peel off the transparent sheet of the edge
sewing sheet.
Note
• Clean stitching cannot be sewn if this
function is used when the edge of the fabric
has corners as shown below.
• When edge sewing using the built-in
camera, make sure that the room is evenly
lit. If the brightness in the room changes
while edge sewing, the built-in camera may
not be able to detect the edge of the fabric.
• The built-in camera detects the contrast
between the fabric and the background.
Therefore, observe the following
precautions.
– If the edge of the fabric is fraying, cut off
any excess fabric threads.
– If the fabric has a complicated pattern, is
sheer or is glossy, such as a vinyl
material, the built-in camera may not be
able to detect it correctly.
• For best results, iron the fold when folding
the edge of the fabric for edge sewing.
• When “Width Control” on page 1/8 of the
settings screen is set to “ON” or when “Nee-
dle Position – Stitch Placement” on page 3/8
is set to “ON”, the built-in camera cannot be
used with edge sewing. If either of these
parameters are set to “ON”, appears
gray and cannot be selected.
Before using the built-in camera for edge
sewing, set “Width Control” and “Needle
Position – Stitch Placement” in the settings
screen to “OFF”.
CAUTION
• When edge sewing with the built-in camera,
be sure to use the vertical stitch alignment foot
“V”. In order to maintain a fixed distance from
the edge of the fabric, the needle will slightly
move to either side, even when sewing with a
straight stitch. If a different presser foot is
used, it may be hit by the needle, causing the
needle to break or resulting in injuries.
SEWING THE STITCHES
150
d
Place the edge sewing sheet on top of the
needle plate cover.
Align the guides on the edge sewing sheet with the
sides of the needle plate cover, and then adjust the
position of the edge sewing sheet so that its cutout
aligns with the edges of the opening for the feed dogs.
Position the edge sewing sheet so that there is no gap
between it and the edges of the opening for the feed
dogs.
a Edge sewing sheet
b Guides on edge sewing sheet
c Sides of needle plate cover
a Edge sewing sheet
b Feed dogs
c Between the feed dogs and the edge sewing sheet
e
Press .
→ Depending on the stitch, the straight stitch with the
middle (center) needle position is selected,
regardless of the preset stitch width.
* Regardless of the setting selected in the machine
settings screen, the brightness of the light changes to
“5”.
f
When the message shown below appears,
check that the vertical stitch alignment foot
“V” is attached and that the edge sewing
sheet is positioned, and then press .
→ Then the edge sewing window appears.
Note
• If the metal needle plate is visible between
the feed dogs and the edge sewing sheet,
the fabric may be incorrectly detected by the
built-in camera.
Memo
• Before using the edge sewing sheet, peel off
the transparent sheet. After use, affix the
edge sewing sheet to the transparent sheet
to prevent it from collecting dust.
a Transparent sheet
• Set a fully wound bobbin before starting to
use the edge sewing feature and built-in
camera. If you need to change the bobbin
while edge sewing, remove the edge sewing
sheet carefully and place it again after
changing the bobbin.
Note
• After is pressed, the stitch width and
stitch length cannot be changed. Change
the stitch width and stitch length before
pressing .
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
151
3
g
Place the fabric under the presser foot.
h
Move the fabric to the desired position for
edge sewing. Position the fabric so that its
edge is as straight as possible.
a Fabric
i
Check that the built-in camera is correctly
detecting the fabric.
* Press to change the colors of the fabric edge
indicator line and starting point according to the
color of the fabric. Each press of this key changes
the color of the fabric edge indicator line to red
(with a blue starting point), blue (with a black
starting point) or black (with a red starting point).
a Key for changing the color of the fabric edge
indicator line
b Fabric edge indicator line
Note
• Before pressing , install the vertical
stitch alignment foot “V” and position the
edge sewing sheet; otherwise, the built-in
camera cannot detect the fabric.
If is pressed before the edge sewing
sheet is positioned, the message shown in
step
f appears again.
• After pressing , do not place your
hands or any other object near the needle
plate until the message “Recognizing...”
disappears.
Note
• When pinning the fabric, insert the pins as
shown below. If the head of the pin extends
off the edge of the fabric, the fabric may not
be correctly detected.
a Basting pin
a
b
SEWING THE STITCHES
152
When the Built-In Camera Can Detect the Edge of
the Fabric
The fabric edge indicator line appears correctly
following the edge of the fabric.
a Fabric edge indicator line
When the Fabric Edge Indicator Line Does Not
Appear
The built-in camera cannot detect the edge of the
fabric.
Press , and then perform the procedure again
starting with step
a.
When the Fabric Edge Indicator Line Is Not
Aligned With the Edge of the Fabric
The fabric edge indicator line that appears is not
aligned with the edge of the fabric. The fabric at the
beginning of sewing is not straight.
Try to straighten the edge of the fabric at the
beginning of sewing (so it is parallel with the edge of
the presser foot).
a
Note
• If a straight part of fabric edge indicator line
(shown below) does not follow the edge of
the fabric, edge sewing cannot be sewn cor-
rectly.
a Straight part
b Fabric
a
b
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
153
3
j
While checking the screen for the distance
from the fabric edge to the edge sewing
position, move the fabric to the desired
position.
* The starting point of the fabric edge indicator line
shows the position for the start of sewing. The actual
position for the start of sewing is directly below the
needle and parallel to the starting point.
a Distance from edge of fabric
Example: When a straight stitch is selected
(example: )
a Middle needle position
b Stitching
c Edge of fabric
d Width of edge sewing
k
Lower the presser foot.
→ The distance from the edge of the fabric to the seam
is set.
a
Note
• Distances between 1.5 mm (about 1/16
inch) and 38.5 mm (about 1-1/2 inches) can
be measured. The distance is displayed in
the screen in 0.5 mm (about 1/64 inch)
increments.
• The distance is displayed in millimeters.
However, depending on the measurement
setting, it can also be displayed in inches.
• If “-_- mm” appears as the distance and no
inch measurement is displayed, the built-in
camera is not able to detect the edge of the
fabric.
• When a straight stitch is selected, use the
scale on the edge sewing sheet as a guide
for positioning the fabric for edge sewing.
a Scale on the edge sewing sheet
Memo
• If the knee lifter is used to lower the presser
foot, the fabric can be held in place with both
hands so the fabric does not move when the
presser foot is lowered.
SEWING THE STITCHES
154
l
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start edge
sewing.
→ Sewing starts with the set distance to the edge of the
fabric maintained.
* While sewing, use the red scale marks on the
vertical stitch alignment foot “V” as a guide to keep
a fixed distance from the edge of the fabric.
a Red scale marks
* When sewing starts, a still image from the built-in
camera is displayed.
m
When sewing is between 1 and 2 cm (about
3/8 and 3/4 inch) from the edge of the
fabric, sewing stops automatically and the
following message appears. To stop sewing,
press .
* When this message appears, edge sewing (with the
seam wizard function) is canceled.
Note
• While sewing, do not place anything,
including your hands, within 2 mm (about 1/
16 inch) from the edge of the fabric,
otherwise the edge of the fabric cannot be
detected correctly. When guiding the fabric
with your hands, place them outside of the
object-free area and more than 2 mm (about
1/16 inch) from the edge of the fabric.
a Approximately 2 mm (about 1/16 inch)
b Fabric
c Edge of fabric
Note
• To continue sewing to the edge of the fabric,
do not press when the message
shown above appears. With the above mes-
sage displayed, press the “Start/Stop” but-
ton to sew.
Memo
• When edge sewing is finished, store the
edge sewing sheet affixed to the transparent
sheet in order to prevent it from collecting
dust.
Chapter 4
Character/Decorative Stitches
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS...............................................................................................156
■ Stitch Selection Screens....................................................................................................................................... 157
Selecting Decorative Stitch Patterns/7mm Decorative Stitch Patterns/Satin Stitch Patterns/7mm Satin Stitch Patterns/
Cross Stitch/Utility Decorative Stitch Patterns .............................................................................................................. 158
Alphabet Characters ...................................................................................................................................................... 158
■ Deleting Characters............................................................................................................................................. 159
■ Adjusting the Character Spacing.......................................................................................................................... 160
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS ...................................................................................................161
Sewing Attractive Finishes ............................................................................................................................................. 161
Basic Sewing .................................................................................................................................................................. 161
Making Adjustments ...................................................................................................................................................... 162
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS ..................................................................................................164
■ Key Functions ...................................................................................................................................................... 164
Changing the Size .......................................................................................................................................................... 166
Changing the Length (for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only)............................................................................................ 166
Creating a Vertical Mirror Image ................................................................................................................................... 166
Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image .............................................................................................................................. 167
Sewing a Pattern Continuously ...................................................................................................................................... 167
Changing Thread Density (for Satin Stitch Patterns Only) ............................................................................................. 167
Returning to the Beginning of the Pattern...................................................................................................................... 168
Checking the Image ....................................................................................................................................................... 168
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS ...........................................................................................170
Before Combining .......................................................................................................................................................... 170
Combining Various Stitch Patterns ................................................................................................................................ 170
Combining Large and Small Stitch Patterns ................................................................................................................... 171
Combining Horizontal Mirror Image Stitch Patterns ..................................................................................................... 172
Combining Stitch Patterns of Different Length .............................................................................................................. 173
Making Step Stitch Patterns (for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only) ................................................................................. 174
■ More Examples .................................................................................................................................................... 175
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION.........................................................................................176
Stitch Data Precautions ................................................................................................................................................. 176
■ Types of Stitch Data that can be Used ................................................................................................................. 176
■ Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used ................................................................................................... 176
■ Computers and Operating Systems with the Following Specifications can be Used ............................................ 176
■ Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data............................................................................. 176
Saving Stitch Patterns in the Machine’s Memory ........................................................................................................... 177
■ If the Memory is Full............................................................................................................................................ 177
Saving Stitch Patterns to USB Media.............................................................................................................................. 178
Saving Stitch Patterns in the Computer.......................................................................................................................... 179
Retrieving Stitch Patterns from the Machine’s Memory ................................................................................................. 180
Recalling from USB Media ............................................................................................................................................. 181
Recalling from the Computer......................................................................................................................................... 182
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS
156
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS
Press , then to display the screen below.
a Decorative stitch patterns
b 7mm decorative stitch patterns. You can set stitch length and width.
c Satin stitch patterns
d 7mm satin stitch patterns. You can set stitch length and width.
e Cross stitch
f Utility decorative stitch patterns
g Alphabet characters (gothic font)
h Alphabet characters (handwriting font)
i Alphabet characters (outline)
j Cyrillic font
k Press this key to create your own stitches with the “MY CUSTOM STITCH” function (see page 328)
l Patterns stored in “MY CUSTOM STITCH” (see page 335)
m Patterns saved in the machine’s memory (see page 180)
n Patterns saved in USB media (see page 181)
o Patterns saved on the computer (see page 182)
.
Note
• If the screen is locked ( ), unlock the screen by pressing . While the screen is locked, no other
key can be operated.
a
b
c
i
e
f
n
l
o
h
d
g
m
k
j
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS
Character/Decorative Stitches
157
4
■ Stitch Selection Screens
There are 10 categories of Character/Decorative stitch patterns. If a page number such as appears, there is
more than one stitch selection screen for that category.
Decorative Stitch Patterns 7mm Decorative Stitch Patterns Satin Stitch Patterns
7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Cross Stitch Utility Decorative Stitch Patterns
Alphabet Characters
(Gothic Font)
Alphabet Characters
(Handwriting Font)
Alphabet Characters
(Outline)
Cyrillic font
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS
158
Selecting Decorative Stitch
Patterns/7mm Decorative Stitch
Patterns/Satin Stitch Patterns/
7mm Satin Stitch Patterns/
Cross Stitch/Utility Decorative
Stitch Patterns
a
Select the category of the pattern you want
to sew.
b
Press the key of the stitch pattern you want
to sew.
* Press to view the next page.
* Press to view the previous page.
* Touch the bar that appears between and
to leap multiple pages at one time.
* To select a different stitch pattern, press .
When the current stitch pattern is erased, select the
new stitch pattern.
→ The selected pattern is displayed.
Alphabet Characters
Example: Entering “Blue Sky”.
a
Press , , or to
select a font.
b
Press to change the selection screens.
c
Press and then enter “B”.
Memo
• There are four fonts for alphabet character
stitching.
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS
Character/Decorative Stitches
159
4
d
Press and then enter “lue”.
e
Press to enter a space.
f
Press again and enter “S”.
a Jumping stitch
* Remove the jumping stitches after sewing.
g
Press and then enter “ky”.
* If you want to continue entering characters in a
different font, press , and then repeat from
step a.
■ Deleting Characters
a
Press to delete the last character.
a
Memo
• Characters are deleted individually starting
with the last character entered.
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS
160
b
Select the correct character.
■ Adjusting the Character Spacing
The space between the characters can be adjusted.
a
Press .
→ The character spacing window appears.
b
Press to adjust character spacing.
* Press to increase the character spacing and
press to decrease the character spacing.
Example:
* Each setting equals a specific distance between
characters.
Value mm
00
10.18
20.36
30.54
40.72
50.9
61.08
71.26
81.44
91.62
10 1.8
Memo
• The default setting is “0”. No number less
than “0” can be set.
• Changing character spacing by this method,
pertains to all characters. Spacing changes
are valid not only while entering characters
but also before and after the entering of
characters.
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS
Character/Decorative Stitches
161
4
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS
Sewing Attractive Finishes
To achieve attractive results when sewing character/decorative stitches, check the table below for the
proper fabric/needle/thread combinations.
Basic Sewing
a
Select a stitch pattern.
b
Attach monogramming foot “N”.
c
Place the fabric under the presser foot, pull
the upper thread out to the side, and then
lower the presser foot.
d
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
sewing.
Note
• Other factors, such as fabric thickness, stabilizer material, etc., also have an effect on the stitch, so you
should always sew a few trial stitches before beginning your project.
• When sewing satin stitch patterns, there may be shrinking or bunching of stitches, so be sure to attach
a stabilizer material.
• Guide the fabric with your hand to keep the fabric feeding straight and even during sewing.
Fabric When sewing on stretch fabrics, lightweight fabrics, or fabrics with coarse weaves, attach stabilizer on the
wrong side of the fabric. If you do not wish to do so, place the fabric on a thin paper such as tracing paper.
a Fabric
b Stabilizer
c Thin paper
Thread #50 - #60
Needle With lightweight, regular, or stretch fabrics: the Ball point needle (golden colored)
With heavyweight fabrics: home sewing machine needle 90/14
Presser foot Monogramming foot “N”.
Using another presser foot may give inferior results.
CAUTION
• When sewing 7 mm satin stitch patterns and
the stitches are bunched, lengthen the stitch
length. If you continue sewing when the
stitches are bunched, the needle may bend or
break (“Setting the Stitch Length” on page 79).
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS
162
e
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop
sewing.
f
Press the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch”
button to sew reinforcement stitches.
Making Adjustments
Your stitch pattern may sometimes turn out poorly,
depending on the type or thickness of fabric, the
stabilizer material used, sewing speed, etc. If your
sewing does not turn out well, sew trial stitches
using the same conditions as the real sewing, and
adjust the stitch pattern as explained below. If the
pattern does not turn out well even after making
adjustments based on the pattern, make
adjustments for each pattern individually.
a
Press and select on 16/16.
Memo
• If the fabric is pulled or pushed during sew-
ing, the pattern may not turn out correctly.
Also, depending on the pattern, there may
be movement to the left and right as well as
front and back. Guide the fabric with your
hand to keep the fabric feeding straight and
even during sewing.
Memo
• When sewing character stitches, the
machine automatically sews reinforcement
stitches at the beginning and end of each
character.
• When sewing is completed, trim any excess
thread between letters.
Note
• When sewing some patterns, the needle will
temporarily pause in the raised position
while the fabric is fed due to the operation of
the needle bar separation mechanism which
is used in this machine. At such times, a
clicking sound different from the sound gen-
erated during sewing will be heard. This
sound is normal and is not the sign of a mal-
function.
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS
Character/Decorative Stitches
163
4
b
Attach monogramming foot “N” and sew
the pattern.
c
Compare the finished pattern to the
illustration of the correct pattern below.
d
Press , and then adjust the pattern
with the “Fine Adjust Verti.” or “Fine
Adjust Horiz.” displays.
* If the pattern is bunched:
Press in the “Fine Adjust Verti.” display.
→ The displayed value increases each time the button
is pressed and the pattern will lengthen.
* If the pattern has gaps:
Press in the “Fine Adjust Verti.” display.
→ The displayed value decreases each time the button
is pressed and the pattern will shorten.
* If the pattern is skewed to the left:
Press in the “Fine Adjust Horiz.” display.
→ The displayed value increases each time the button
is pressed and the pattern will slide to the right.
* If the pattern is skewed to the right:
Press in the “Fine Adjust Horiz.” display.
→ The displayed value decreases each time the button
is pressed and the pattern will slide to the left.
e
Sew the stitch pattern again.
* If the stitch pattern still comes out poorly, make
adjustments again. Adjust until the stitch pattern
comes out correctly.
f
Press to return to the original screen.
Memo
• You can sew with the setting screen on the
display.
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS
164
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS
■ Key Functions
You can create just the finish you want using the editing functions. Make patterns larger or smaller, make mirror
images, etc.
Note
• Some editing functions cannot be used with certain stitch patterns. Only the functions for the displayed
keys are available when a pattern is selected.
g
h
f
e
d
c
b
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
s
a
r
g
h
f
e
d
c
b
i
t
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
s
a
r
g
h
f
e
d
c
b
i
u
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
s
a
r
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS
Character/Decorative Stitches
165
4
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
a Pattern display size Show the approximate size of the pattern selected.
: Nearly the same size as the sewn pattern
: 1/2 the size of the sewn pattern
: 1/4 the size of the sewn pattern
* The actual size of the sewn pattern may differ depending on the type of
fabric and thread that is used.
91
b Pivot key Press this key to select the pivot setting. When the pivot setting is selected,
stopping the machine lowers the needle and slightly raises the presser foot
automatically. In addition, when sewing is restarted, the presser foot is
automatically lowered.
• If this key appears as , the pivot function cannot be used.
• Be sure the needle position on page 3 of Machine Settings is set to the down
position.
84
c Free motion mode key Press this key to enter free motion sewing mode.
The feed dog is lowered and presser foot is raised to a height appropriate for
free motion quilting.
116
d Automatic
reinforcement stitch
key
Press this key to turn on the automatic reinforcement stitching mode. 81
e Automatic thread
cutting key
Press this key to turn on the automatic thread cutting mode. 82
f Delete key When you make a mistake selecting a stitch pattern, use this key to delete the
mistake. When you make a mistake in combining stitch patterns, use this key
to delete stitch patterns.
158, 159
g Stitch width and stitch
length key
Shows the stitch width and stitch length of the selected stitch pattern. The
machine default settings are highlighted.
78-79
h Thread tension key Shows the thread tension setting for the selected stitch pattern. The machine
default settings are highlighted
79
i Memory key Use this key to save stitch pattern combinations. 177-178
j Elongation key When 7mm satin stitch patterns are selected, press this key to choose from 5
automatic length settings, without changing the stitch zigzag width or stitch
length settings.
166
k Needle mode
selection key
(Single/Double)
Press this key to choose single needle sewing or twin needle sewing. 60
l Size selection key Use this key to select the size of the stitch pattern (large, small). 166
m Vertical mirror image
key
After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to create a vertical mirror image
of the stitch pattern.
166
n Horizontal mirror
image key
After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to create a horizontal mirror
image of the stitch pattern.
167
o Single/Repeat sewing
key
Press this key to choose single stitches or continuous stitches. 167
p Back to beginning key When sewing is stopped, press this key to return to the beginning of the
pattern.
168
q Image key Press this key to display an enlarged image of the selected stitch pattern. 168
r Home key Press this key to return to the home page screen. 28
s Screen lock key Press this key to lock the screen. When the screen is locked, the various
settings, such as the stitch width and stitch length, are locked and cannot be
changed. Press this key again to unlock the settings.
86
t Thread density key After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to change the thread density of
the pattern.
167
u Character spacing key Press this key to change the spacing of character patterns. 160
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS
166
Changing the Size
Select a stitch pattern, then press to change the size of the stitch pattern. The stitch pattern will be
sewn in the size highlighted on the key.
Actual Stitch Pattern Size
* The size differs depending on the fabric and threads.
Changing the Length (for 7mm
Satin Stitch Patterns Only)
When 7mm satin stitch patterns are selected, press
to choose from 5 automatic length settings,
without changing the stitch zigzag width or stitch
length settings.
Creating a Vertical Mirror Image
To create a vertical mirror image, select a stitch
pattern then press .
Memo
• If you continue entering stitch patterns after changing the size, those patterns will also be sewn in that
size.
• You cannot change the size of combined stitch patterns once the stitch pattern is entered.
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS
Character/Decorative Stitches
167
4
Creating a Horizontal Mirror
Image
To create a horizontal mirror image, select a stitch
pattern then press .
Sewing a Pattern Continuously
Press to select continuous sewing or single
stitch sewing.
Changing Thread Density
(for Satin Stitch Patterns Only)
After selecting a satin stitch pattern, press to
select your preferred thread density.
Memo
• To finish a complete motif while sewing the
pattern continuously, you can press the
key while sewing. The machine will
automatically stop when the motif is finished.
CAUTION
• If the stitches bunch when thread density is
changed to , return the thread density to
. If you continue sewing when the stitches
are bunched, the needle may bend or break.
Memo
• Even if you select a new pattern after chang-
ing the thread density, the thread density
remains the same until you change it.
• You cannot change thread density for a
combined pattern after additional patterns
are added.
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS
168
Returning to the Beginning of the
Pattern
When sewing character/decorative stitches, you
can return to the beginning of the pattern after trial
sewing or when the stitching is sewn incorrectly.
a
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop the
machine, and then press .
→ Sewing returns to the beginning of the selected
pattern (“W”) from the point where sewing was
stopped.
b
Press the “Start/Stop” button to continue
sewing.
Checking the Image
You can display an approximate size image of the
selected stitch pattern. You can also check and
change the colors of the image on the screen.
a
Press .
→ An image of the selected pattern is displayed.
b
Press to change the thread color in
the image to red, blue, or black.
→ The color changes every time you press the button.
Memo
• If this key is pressed when sewing is
stopped, patterns can be added at the end
of a combined stitch pattern. (In this exam-
ple, “!” is added.)
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS
Character/Decorative Stitches
169
4
c
Press to display the enlarged image.
d
Use / / / to view any part of
the image that extends out of the viewable
display area.
e
Press to return to the original screen.
Memo
• You can also sew from this screen when the
presser foot symbol is displayed.
• Image of some patterns will display in
default size only.
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS
170
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS
You can combine many varieties of stitch patterns, such as character stitches, cross stitches, satin stitches,
or stitches you design with MY CUSTOM STITCH function (see chapter 8 for information about MY
CUSTOM STITCH). You can also combine stitch patterns of different sizes, mirror image stitch patterns,
and others.
Before Combining
Single stitch sewing is automatically selected for sewing combined patterns. If you want to sew the
pattern continuously, press after finishing the stitch pattern combination.
When changing sizes, creating mirror images, or making other adjustments to a combined stitch pattern,
be sure to edit the selected stitch pattern before selecting the next one. You cannot edit a stitch pattern
once the next stitch pattern is selected.
Combining Various Stitch
Patterns
Example:
a
Press .
b
Select .
c
Press .
→ The display returns to the stitch selection screen.
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS
Character/Decorative Stitches
171
4
d
Press .
e
Select .
f
Press to sew the pattern continuously.
g
Press .
Combining Large and Small
Stitch Patterns
Example:
a
Press .
→ The large size stitch will be selected.
b
Press again, then press to select
the small size.
→ The pattern is displayed in a smaller size.
Memo
• Patterns are deleted individually starting
with the last pattern entered by pressing
.
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS
172
c
Press to sew continuously.
→ The entered pattern is repeated.
Combining Horizontal Mirror
Image Stitch Patterns
Example:
a
Press .
b
Press again, then press .
→ The pattern is flipped along a vertical axis.
c
Press .
→ The entered pattern is repeated.
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS
Character/Decorative Stitches
173
4
Combining Stitch Patterns of
Different Length
Example:
a
Press , then press once.
→ The length of the image is set to .
b
Select again, then press 3 times.
→ The length of the image is set to .
c
Press .
→ The entered pattern is repeated.
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS
174
Making Step Stitch Patterns (for
7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only)
You can use the keys with 7mm satin
stitch patterns to create a step effect.
Stitch patterns sewn so that they create a step
effect are called step stitch patterns.
* Press to move the stitch pattern a distance
equal to half of the stitch pattern’s size to the left.
* Press to move the stitch pattern a distance
equal to half of the stitch pattern’s size to the right.
Example:
a
Press .
b
Press .
→ The next stitch pattern will move to the right.
c
Press again.
d
Press .
→ The next stitch pattern will move to the left.
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS
Character/Decorative Stitches
175
4
e
Press .
→ The entered pattern is repeated.
■ More Examples
Press → → → → .
Press → → → → →
→ → → .
Press → → → .
Press → → → → →
→ → → .
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
176
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Stitch Data Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using stitch data other than that created and saved in this
machine.
■ Types of Stitch Data that can be Used
• In the Character/Decorative Stitch memory, “.pmx” and “.pmu” stitch data files can be used with this
machine. “.pmu” stitch data files can be retrieved; however, when the machine is used to save the file, it is
saved as a “.pmx” stitch data file. Using data other than that created using this machine or the machine which
create “.pmu” data file, may cause the machine to malfunction.
■ Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used
Stitch data can be saved to or recalled from USB external media. Use external media that meets the following
specifications.
• USB Flash drive (USB Flash memory)
• USB Floppy disk drive
Stitch data can be recalled only from;
• USB CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW drives
You can also use the following types of USB media with the USB Memory Card Reader/USB card writer module.
• Secure Digital (SD) Card
• CompactFlash
• Memory Stick
•Smart Media
• Multi Media Card (MMC)
• XD-Picture Card
• To create file folders, use a computer.
■ Computers and Operating Systems with the Following Specifications can be
Used
• Compatible models:
IBM PC with a USB port as standard equipment
IBM PC-compatible computer equipped with a USB port as standard equipment
• Compatible operating systems:
Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8
■ Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data
• If the name of the stitch data file/folder cannot be identified, for example, because the name contains special
characters, the file/folder is not displayed. If this occurs, change the name of the file/folder. We recommend
using the 26 letters of the alphabet (uppercase and lowercase), the numbers 0 through 9, “-”, and “_”.
• Stitch data in a folder created in USB media can be retrieved.
• Do not create folders in “Removable Disk” on a computer. If stitch data is stored in a folder in “Removable
Disk”, that stitch data cannot be retrieved by the machine.
Note
• Some USB media may not be usable with this machine. Please visit our website for more details.
• The access lamp will begin blinking after inserting USB Devices/Media, and it will take about 5 to 6
seconds to recognize the Devices/Media. (Time will differ depending on the USB Device/Media).
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Character/Decorative Stitches
177
4
Saving Stitch Patterns in the
Machine’s Memory
You can save often used stitch patterns in the
machine’s memory. A total of about 1 MB of stitch
patterns can be saved in the machine’s memory.
a
Press .
b
Press .
* Press to return to the original screen without
saving.
→ The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the pattern
is saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.
■ If the Memory is Full
If the following screen appears while you are trying
to save a pattern on the machine’s memory, the
memory is too full to hold the currently selected
stitch pattern. To save the stitch pattern in the
machine’s memory, you have to delete a previously
saved stitch pattern.
a
Press .
* Press to return to the original screen
without saving.
b
Choose a stitch pattern to delete.
* Press if you decide not to delete the stitch
pattern.
a Pockets holding saved stitch patterns
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
the stitch pattern you are saving.
Memo
• It takes a few seconds to save a stitch
pattern.
• See page 180 for information on retrieving a
saved stitch pattern.
a
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
178
c
Press .
→ A confirmation message appears.
d
Press .
* If you decide not to delete the stitch pattern, press
.
→ The machine deletes the stitch pattern, then
automatically saves the new stitch pattern.
Saving Stitch Patterns to USB
Media
When sending stitch patterns from the machine to
USB media, plug the USB media into the
machine’s top USB port.
a
Press .
Memo
• USB media is commercially available, but
some USB media may not be usable with
this machine. Please visit our website for
more details.
• Depending on the type of USB media being
used, either directly plug the USB device
into the machine’s USB port or plug the USB
media Reader/Writer into the machine’s
USB port.
• The USB media can be inserted or removed
at any time.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Character/Decorative Stitches
179
4
b
Insert the USB media into the primary (top)
USB port on the machine.
a Primary (top) USB port for media
b USB media
c
Press .
* Press to return to the original screen without
saving.
→ The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the pattern
is saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.
Saving Stitch Patterns in the
Computer
Using the included USB cable, the machine can
be connected to your computer, and the stitch
patterns can be temporarily retrieved from and
saved in the “Removable Disk” folder in your
computer. A total of about 3 MB of stitch patterns
can be saved in the “Removable disk”, but the
saved stitch patterns are deleted when the
machine is turned OFF.
a
Plug the USB cable connector into the
corresponding USB ports for the computer
and for the machine.
b
Turn on your computer and select
“Computer (My computer)”.
* The USB cable can be plugged into the USB ports
on the computer and machine whether or not they
are turned on.
a USB port for computer
b USB cable connector
→ The “Removable Disk” icon will appear in
“Computer (My computer)” on the computer.
Note
• The processing speed may vary by port
selection and quantity of data. You can also
plug a USB media into the center port, but
the primary (top) USB port will process the
data faster. It is recommended to use the
primary (top) USB port.
• Two USB media cannot be used with this
machine at the same time. If two USB media
are inserted, only the USB media inserted
first is detected.
Note
• Do not insert or remove USB media while
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
some or all of the pattern you are saving.
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
the stitch pattern you are saving.
Note
• The connectors on the USB cable can only
be inserted into a port in one direction. If it is
difficult to insert the connector, do not insert
it with force and check the orientation of the
connector.
• For details on the position of the USB port
on the computer (or USB hub), refer to the
instruction manual for the corresponding
equipment.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
180
c
Press .
d
Press .
* Press to return to the original screen without
saving.
→ The stitch pattern will be temporarily saved to
“Removable Disk” under “Computer (My
computer)”.
e
Select the stitch pattern’s .pmx file and
copy the file to the computer.
Retrieving Stitch Patterns from
the Machine’s Memory
a
Press .
→ The pocket selection screen appears.
Note
• Do not turn off the machine while the “Sav-
ing” screen is showing. You may lose the
data.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Character/Decorative Stitches
181
4
b
Choose a stitch pattern to retrieve.
* If the entire saved stitch pattern is not displayed,
press the thumbnail.
* Press to return to the original screen without
saving.
a Saved stitch patterns
c
Press .
* Press to delete the stitch pattern.
→ The selected stitch pattern is retrieved and the
sewing screen will be displayed.
Recalling from USB Media
You can recall a specific stitch pattern from either
direct USB media or a folder in the USB media. If
the stitch pattern is in a folder, check each folder
to find the stitch pattern.
a
Insert the USB Media into the primary (top)
USB port on the machine (see page 178).
a Primary (top) USB port for media
b USB media
b
Press .
→ Stitch patterns and a folder in a top folder are
displayed.
a
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
182
c
Press when there is a subfolder to
sort two or more stitch patterns to USB
media, the stitch pattern in the subfolder is
displayed.
* Press to return to the original screen without
recalling.
a Folder name
b Stitch patterns in a folder show only the first pattern
of any combined patterns.
c Path
→ The path shows the current folder at the top of the
list.
Stitch patterns and a subfolder within a folder are
displayed.
* Press to return to the previous folder.
* Use the computer to create folders. Folders cannot
be created with the machine.
d
Press the key of the stitch pattern you want
to recall.
e
Press .
* Press to delete the stitch pattern. The pattern
will be deleted from the USB media.
→ The selected stitch pattern is recalled and the sewing
screen will be displayed.
Recalling from the Computer
a
Plug the USB cable connector into the
corresponding USB ports for the computer
and for the machine (see page 179).
b
On the computer, open “Computer (My
computer)” then go to “Removable Disk”.
a
c
b
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Character/Decorative Stitches
183
4
c
Move/copy the pattern data to “Removable
Disk”.
→ Stitch pattern data in “Removable Disk” is written to
the machine.
d
Press .
→ The stitch patterns in the computer are displayed on
the selection screen.
e
Press the key of the stitch pattern you want
to recall.
* Press to return to the original screen without
recalling.
f
Press .
* Press to delete the stitch pattern.
The pattern will be deleted from the “Removable
Disk” folder in your computer.
→ The selected stitch pattern is recalled and the sewing
screen will be displayed.
Note
• While data is being written, do not discon-
nect the USB cable.
• Do not create folders within “Removable
Disk”. Since folders are not displayed, stitch
pattern data within folders cannot be
recalled.
Note
• The pattern recalled from the computer is
only temporarily written to the machine. It is
erased from the machine when the machine
is turned off. If you wish to keep the stitch
pattern, store it in the machine (“Saving
Stitch Patterns in the Machine’s Memory” on
page 177).
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
184
Chapter 5
Embroidery
BEFORE EMBROIDERING..................................... 186
Embroidery Step by Step .........................................................186
Attaching Embroidery Foot “W2” ...........................................186
Attaching the Embroidery Unit ...............................................188
■ About the Embroidery Unit ............................................................. 188
■ Removing the Embroidery Unit ....................................................... 189
SELECTING PATTERNS.......................................... 190
■ Copyright Information..................................................................... 190
■ Pattern Selection Screens ................................................................ 191
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Brother “Exclusives”/Greek
Alphabet Patterns/Floral Alphabet Patterns/Utility Embroidery
Patterns...................................................................................193
Selecting Alphabet Character Patterns....................................194
Selecting Frame Patterns.........................................................196
Selecting Patterns from Embroidery Cards ..............................197
■ About Embroidery Card Reader (Sold Separately) and
USB Card Writer Module*............................................................... 197
■ About Embroidery Cards (Sold Separately)...................................... 197
Selecting Patterns from USB Media/Computer .......................197
VIEWING THE SEWING SCREEN.......................... 198
■ Key Functions .................................................................................. 199
PREPARING THE FABRIC...................................... 200
Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers (Backing) to the Fabric..............200
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame .........................202
■ Types of Embroidery Frames ........................................................... 202
■ Inserting the Fabric ......................................................................... 203
■ Using the Embroidery Sheet ............................................................ 204
Embroidering Small Fabrics or Fabric Edges............................205
■ Embroidering Small Fabrics............................................................. 205
■ Embroidering Edges or Corners ....................................................... 205
■ Embroidering Ribbons or Tape ........................................................ 205
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME.............. 206
■ Removing the Embroidery Frame .................................................... 207
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION............. 208
Aligning the Embroidering Position Using the Built-In Camera ....... 208
Display the Fabric While Aligning the Embroidering Position ......... 211
■ Positioning the Pattern on Thick Fabric........................................... 213
Using the Built-In Camera to Align the Embroidering Position........ 213
Checking the Pattern Position .................................................216
Previewing the Completed Pattern..........................................217
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN .................. 218
Sewing Attractive Finishes ......................................................218
■ Embroidery Needle Plate Cover ...................................................... 219
Sewing Embroidery Patterns ...................................................219
Sewing Embroidery Patterns Which Use Appliqué ..................221
PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING EMBROIDERY
PATTERNS AND PRINTED DESIGNS)................... 223
Selecting a Pattern ..................................................................224
■ Checking Only the Embroidery Pattern........................................... 224
Outputting the Background Image and Positioning Image ......225
■ Using USB Media ............................................................................ 225
■ Using a USB Cable .......................................................................... 226
Printing the Background and Embroidery Position Sheet ........226
Sewing Embroidery Patterns ...................................................227
ADJUSTMENTS DURING
THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS
.................................229
If the Bobbin Runs Out of Thread .......................................... 229
If the Thread Breaks During Sewing ....................................... 230
Restarting from the Beginning ................................................ 231
Resuming Embroidery After Turning Off the Power ............... 231
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS...............233
Adjusting Thread Tension ....................................................... 233
■ Correct Thread Tension....................................................................233
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight ...............................................................233
■ Upper Thread is Too Loose ..............................................................234
Adjusting the Alternate Bobbin Case
(with No Color on the Screw) ................................................ 234
■ Correct Tension................................................................................234
■ Bobbin Thread is Too Loose .............................................................235
■ Bobbin Thread is Too Tight ..............................................................235
Using the Automatic Thread Cutting Function
(END COLOR TRIM) .............................................................. 235
Using the Thread Trimming Function (JUMP STITCH TRIM).. 236
■ Selecting the Length of Jump Stitch Not to Trim ..............................236
Adjusting the Embroidery Speed............................................. 237
Changing the Thread Color Display........................................ 237
Changing the Embroidery Frame Display ............................... 238
REVISING THE PATTERN.......................................240
Moving the Pattern................................................................. 240
Aligning the Pattern and the Needle....................................... 240
Changing the Size of the Pattern ............................................ 241
Rotating the Pattern ............................................................... 242
Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image....................................... 243
Changing the Density
(Alphabet Character and Frame Patterns Only)...................... 244
Changing the Colors of Alphabet Character Patterns ............. 245
Embroidering Linked Characters ............................................ 245
Uninterrupted Embroidering (Using a Single Color)............... 248
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION .......................249
Embroidery Data Precautions................................................. 249
■ Types of Embroidery Data that can be Used ....................................249
■ Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used................................249
■ Computers and Operating Systems
with the Following Specifications can be Used ................................250
■
Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data
...................250
■ Tajima (.dst) Embroidery Data .........................................................250
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Machine’s Memory........... 251
■ If the Memory is Full ........................................................................251
Saving Embroidery Patterns to USB Media ............................. 252
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Computer ......................... 253
Retrieving Patterns from the Machine’s Memory ................... 254
Recalling from USB Media ..................................................... 255
Recalling from the Computer ................................................. 256
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS ..............................258
Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (1)..................... 258
Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (2)..................... 259
Sewing Split Embroidery Patterns........................................... 261
Some screen displays and illustrations may vary slightly with your machine. Refer to
Operation Manual Addendum for the detailed instructions.
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
186
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
Embroidery Step by Step
Follow the steps below to prepare the machine for embroidery.
Attaching Embroidery Foot “W2”
a
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.
Step 3
Step 1, 2
Step 7 Step 5
Step 4
Step 6, 8
Step 9
Step # Aim Action Page
1 Presser foot attachment Attach embroidery foot “W2”. 186
2 Checking the needle Use needle 75/11 for embroidery. * 69
3 Embroidery unit attachment Attach the embroidery unit. 188
4 Bobbin thread setup For the bobbin thread, wind embroidery bobbin thread and set it in place. 48
5 Fabric preparation Attach a stabilizer material to the fabric, and hoop it in the embroidery frame. 200
6 Pattern selection Turn the main power to ON, and select an embroidery pattern. 190
7 Embroidery frame attachment Attach the embroidery frame to the embroidery unit. 206
8 Checking the layout Check and adjust the size and position of the embroidery. 208
9 Embroidery thread setup Set up embroidery thread according to the pattern. 57
* It is recommended that a 90/14 needle should be used when embroidering on heavy weight fabrics or stabilizing products (for example;
denim, puffy foam, etc.). Ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14 is not recommended for embroidery.
CAUTION
• When attaching a presser foot, always press
on the screen. You may accidentally
press the “Start/Stop” button and possibly
cause injury.
• Be sure to use embroidery foot “W2” or “W”
(optional) when doing embroidery. Using
another presser foot may cause the needle to
strike the presser foot, causing the needle to
bend or break and possibly cause injury.
Memo
• Refer to Operation Manual Addendum, for
the detailed instructions how to use the
embroidery foot “W2”.
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
Embroidery
187
5
b
Press to lock all keys and buttons.
→ The entire screen becomes white, and all keys and
operation buttons are locked.
c
Raise the presser foot lever.
d
Push the black button on the presser foot
holder and remove the presser foot.
a Black button
b Presser foot holder
→ Remove the presser foot from the presser foot
holder.
e
Use the included screwdriver to remove the
screw of the presser foot holder, then
remove the presser foot holder.
a Screwdriver
b Presser foot holder
c Presser foot holder screw
→ Remove the screw and presser foot holder.
f
Position the embroidery foot “W2” on the
presser foot bar from behind.
a Presser foot bar
g
Hold the embroidery foot in place with
your right hand, and then use the included
screwdriver to securely tighten the presser
foot holder screw.
a Presser foot holder screw
Note
• Instead of simply loosening the screw, it
must be temporarily removed, while optional
embroidery foot “W” can be installed simply
by loosening the screw.
b
a
CAUTION
• Use the included screwdriver to firmly tighten
the screw of the presser foot holder. If the
screw is loose, the needle may strike the
presser foot and possibly cause injury.
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
188
h
Plug the connector of the embroidery foot
“W2” with LED pointer into the jack on the
left of your machine.
i
Press to unlock all keys and
buttons.
→ All keys and operation buttons are unlocked, and
the previous screen is displayed.
Attaching the Embroidery Unit
Press → → →
→ in this order to display a
video example of attaching the embroidery unit
(see page 46). Follow the steps explained below to
complete the operation.
■ About the Embroidery Unit
a
Turn the main power to OFF, and remove
the flat bed attachment.
b
Insert the embroidery unit connection into
the machine connection port. The spring
hinge on the connection port cover will
allow easy access to the port. Push lightly
on the connection port cover until the unit
clicks into place.
a Embroidery unit connection
b Machine connection port
CAUTION
• Do not move the machine with the
embroidery unit attached. The embroidery
unit could fall off and cause injury.
• Keep your hands and foreign objects away
from the embroidery carriage and frame when
the machine is embroidering. Otherwise,
injury may result.
• To avoid distorting your embroidery design,
do not touch the embroidery carriage and
frame when the machine is embroidering.
Note
• You can also sew utility/decorative stitches
with the embroidery unit attached. Touch
and . The feed dog will
automatically raise for utility and decorative
stitching.
• Be sure to turn off the power before
installing the embroidery unit. Otherwise, the
machine may be damaged.
• Do not touch the inner connector of the
embroidery unit. The pins on the embroidery
unit connection may be damaged.
• Do not apply strong force to the embroidery
unit carriage or pick up the unit by the
carriage. Otherwise, the embroidery unit
may be damaged.
• Store the embroidery unit in the proper
storage case.
Note
• Be sure there is no gap between the
embroidery unit and the sewing machine. If
there is a gap, the embroidery patterns will
not embroider with the correct registration.
• Do not push on the carriage when installing
the embroidery unit onto the machine.
Moving the carriage may damage the
embroidery unit.
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
Embroidery
189
5
c
Turn the main power to ON.
→ The following message will appear.
d
Press .
→ The carriage will move to the initialization position.
■ Removing the Embroidery Unit
a
Press either or , then press
.
→ The carriage will move to the removal position.
b
Turn the main power to OFF.
c
Hold down the release button, and pull the
embroidery unit away from the machine.
a Release button
CAUTION
• Always remove the embroidery frame before
pressing . Otherwise, the frame may
strike the embroidery foot, and possibly cause
injury.
• The embroidery unit will not fit in the storage
case if this step is not done.
Note
• Be sure to turn off the machine before
removing the embroidery unit, otherwise
damage to the machine may result.
CAUTION
• Do not carry the embroidery unit by holding
the release button compartment.
SELECTING PATTERNS
190
SELECTING PATTERNS
■ Copyright Information
The patterns stored in the sewing machine and embroidery cards are intended for private use only. Any public or
commercial use of copyrighted patterns is an infringement of copyright law and is strictly prohibited.
There are many character and decorative embroidery patterns stored in the machine’s memory (see the “QUICK
REFERENCE GUIDE” for a full summary of patterns in the machine’s memory). You can also use patterns from
the embroidery cards (sold separately).
Once the machine has finished the initialization and the carriage has moved to the start position, the pattern type
selection screen will display.
If another screen is displayed, press , then to display the screen below.
a Embroidery patterns
b Brother “Exclusives”
c Greek alphabet patterns
d Floral alphabet patterns
e Utility embroidery patterns
f Frame patterns
g Alphabet characters
h Patterns saved in the machine’s memory (see
page 254)
i Patterns saved in USB media (see page 255)
j Patterns saved on the computer (see page 256)
k Press this key to position the embroidery unit for
storage
a
c
d
f
i
h
b
e
j
g
k
Memo
• A key that appears stacked, such as
and , indicates that there
are sub-categories, which must be selected
before a pattern selection screen appears.
SELECTING PATTERNS
Embroidery
191
5
■ Pattern Selection Screens
There are 7 categories of patterns in this machine. If a page number such as appears, there is more than one
pattern selection screen for that category.
Embroidery patterns
Greek alphabet patterns
Floral alphabet patterns Utility embroidery patterns
Frame patterns Alphabet characters
SELECTING PATTERNS
192
Brother “Exclusives”
Vintage designs Monogram designs
New European designs Japanese designs
Quilt designs
Memo
• Refer to Operation Manual Addendum, for the additional information on embroidery patterns.
SELECTING PATTERNS
Embroidery
193
5
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/
Brother “Exclusives”/Greek
Alphabet Patterns/Floral
Alphabet Patterns/Utility
Embroidery Patterns
a
Touch the key of the category of the pattern
you want to embroider.
b
Press the key of the pattern you want to
embroider.
* Press to view the next page.
* Press to view the previous page.
→ The selected pattern is displayed.
c
Press to create a mirror image of the
pattern as needed.
* If a mistake has been made when selecting the
pattern, press the key of the pattern you want to
embroider and the new selection appears.
d
Press .
→ The sewing screen is displayed.
e
Proceed to “VIEWING THE SEWING
SCREEN” on page 198 to embroider the
pattern.
* To return to the previous screen to select another
pattern, press .
SELECTING PATTERNS
194
Selecting Alphabet Character
Patterns
Example: Entering “Blue Sky”.
a
Press .
b
Press the key of the font you want to
embroider.
c
Press to change the selection screens.
d
Press and then enter “B”.
* If you want to change the size of a character, select
the character and then press to change the
size. The size changes each time you press the key,
from large to medium to small.
* If you make a mistake, press to erase the
mistake.
* If the pattern is too small to see clearly, you can use
the key to check it.
e
Press and enter “lue”.
Memo
• If you continue adding characters after
changing the size, the new characters will
be entered in the new size.
• You cannot change the size of the entered
characters after combining character stitch
patterns.
SELECTING PATTERNS
Embroidery
195
5
f
Press to enter a space.
g
Press again and enter “S”.
h
Press and then enter “ky”.
i
Press .
→ The sewing screen is displayed.
SELECTING PATTERNS
196
j
Proceed to “VIEWING THE SEWING
SCREEN” on page 198 to embroider the
pattern.
* To return to the previous screen to select another
pattern, press .
Selecting Frame Patterns
a
Press .
b
Press the key of the frame shape you want
to embroider in the top part of the screen.
a Frame shapes
b Frame patterns
→ Various frame patterns are displayed at the bottom
part of the screen.
c
Press the key of the frame pattern you want
to embroider.
* If you make a mistake selecting the pattern, press the
key of the pattern you want to embroider.
→ The selected pattern is displayed on the screen.
d
Press .
→ The sewing screen is displayed.
e
Proceed to “VIEWING THE SEWING
SCREEN” on page 198 to embroider the
pattern.
* To return to the previous screen to select another
pattern, press .
a
b
SELECTING PATTERNS
Embroidery
197
5
Selecting Patterns from
Embroidery Cards
■ About Embroidery Card Reader
(Sold Separately) and USB Card
Writer Module*
• Use only an embroidery card Reader designed
for this machine. Using an unauthorized
embroidery card Reader may cause your
machine to operate incorrectly.
* If you have purchased the PE-DESIGN Ver5 or later,
PE-DESIGN Lite or PED-BASIC, you can plug the
included USB card writer module into the machine
as an embroidery card reader, and recall patterns.
■ About Embroidery Cards
(Sold Separately)
• Use only embroidery cards manufactured for this
machine. Using unauthorized cards may cause
your machine to operate incorrectly.
• Embroidery cards sold in foreign countries
cannot be used with this machine.
• Store embroidery cards in the hard case.
a
Plug the optional embroidery card Reader/
USB card writer module* into the primary
(top) USB port on the machine.
a Primary (top) USB port
b Embroidery card Reader/USB card writer module*
b
Insert the card completely into the card
Reader/USB card writer module*.
* Insert the embroidery card so that the end with a
printed arrow is facing up.
c
Press the key of the USB port that the
embroidery card Reader/USB card writer
module* is plugged into.
→ The patterns on the embroidery card are displayed
on the selection screen.
d
Follow the steps on page 193 to select a
pattern.
Selecting Patterns from USB
Media/Computer
To recall patterns from the computer or USB
media, see pages 255 through 257.
Note
• Embroidery patterns cannot be saved from
the machine to an embroidery card inserted
into a connected USB card writer module*.
Note
• Two embroidery USB card Readers/USB
card writer module* cannot be used with this
machine at the same time. If two embroidery
USB card Readers/USB card writer module*
are inserted, only the embroidery USB card
Reader/USB card writer module* inserted
first is detected.
Memo
• You can also plug the embroidery card
Reader/USB card writer module* into the
center port of the machine.
VIEWING THE SEWING SCREEN
198
VIEWING THE SEWING SCREEN
a Shows the presser foot code.
Attach embroidery foot “W2” or “W” (optional) for all embroidery projects. When the foot presser symbol is displayed
on the screen, you are able to sew.
b Shows the boundary for embroidering with the extra large frame (30 cm × 20 cm (approx. 12 inches × 8 inches)).
c Shows a preview of the selected pattern.
d Shows the size of the selected pattern.
e Shows how far the sewing position is from the center (when you move the sewing position).
f Shows how many stitches are in the selected pattern and how many stitches have been sewn so far.
g Shows the time necessary to sew the pattern, and the time already spent sewing the pattern (not including time for
changing and automatically trimming the thread).
h Shows the number of colors in the selected pattern, and the number of the color currently being sewn.
i Shows the part of the embroidery that will be sewn with the first thread color.
j Shows the order for thread color changes and the embroidering time for each thread color.
* The displayed time is the approximate time that will be required. The actual embroidering time may be longer than the
displayed time, depending on the embroidery frame that is used. In addition, the amount of time required to change
thread colors is not included.
k Shows the embroidery frames that can be used for the selected pattern. Be sure to use the proper frame (see page
202).
l Shows the degree of rotation of the pattern.
Note
• There is an explanation of additional key functions on the next page.
b
j
a
c
d
e
h
i
k
l
f g
VIEWING THE SEWING SCREEN
Embroidery
199
5
■ Key Functions
Using these keys, you can change the size of the pattern, rotate the pattern, etc.
r
o
q
p
m
R
Q
u
v
s
t
zyw x
n
Note
• Some operations or functions are not avail-
able for certain patterns. If the key display is
light gray, you cannot use that function or
operation with the selected pattern.
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
m Fabric scan key Press this key to scan the fabric to align the embroidery position. 211
n Image key Press this key for a preview of the sewn image. 217
o Arrow keys
( Center key)
Press an arrow key to move the pattern in the direction shown by the arrow.
(Press the Center key to return the pattern to the center of the embroidery
area.)
240
p Rotate key Press this key to rotate the pattern. You can rotate a pattern one degree, 10
degrees or 90 degrees at a time.
242
q Size key Press this key to change the size of the pattern. 241
r Density key Press this key to change the density of alphabet character or frame patterns. 244
s Horizontal mirror
image key
Press this key to create a horizontal mirror image of the pattern. 243
t Multi color key Press this key to change the color of each letter when sewing alphabet
character patterns.
245
u Memory key Press this key to save a pattern in the machine’s memory, USB media or a
computer.
251-253
v Return key Press this key to return to the pattern type selection screen. —
w Cut/Tension key Press this key to specify automatic thread cutting, thread trimming or the thread
tension. For embroidery, these functions are set automatically.
235-236
x Forward/Back key Press this key to move the needle forward or back in the pattern; useful if the
thread breaks while sewing or if you want to start again from the beginning.
230-232
y Starting point key Press this key to move the needle start position to align the needle with the
pattern position.
240
z Trial key Press this key to check the position of the pattern.The embroidery frame moves
to the desired position so you can check that there is enough space to sew the
pattern.
216
Q Embroidery
positioning key
Press this key to align the embroidering position using the built-in camera. 213
R Uninterrupted
embroidery key
Press this key to embroider the selected pattern with a single color. 248
PREPARING THE FABRIC
200
PREPARING THE FABRIC
Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers
(Backing) to the Fabric
For best results in your embroidery projects,
always use stabilizer material for embroidery.
Follow the package instructions for the stabilizer
being used.
Press → → →
→ in this order to display a
video example of attaching iron-on stabilizers
(backing) to the fabric (see page 46). Follow the
steps explained below to complete the operation.
When using fabrics that cannot be ironed (such as
towel or fabrics that have loops which expand
when ironed) or in places where ironing is
difficult, position the stabilizer material under the
fabric without fusing it, then position the fabric
and stabilizer in the embroidery frame, or check
with your authorized dealer for the correct
stabilizer to use.
a
Use a piece of stabilizer which is larger
than the embroidery frame being used.
a Size of the embroidery frame
b Iron-on stabilizer (backing)
CAUTION
• Use fabrics with a thickness of less than 3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch). Using fabrics thicker than 3 mm
(approx. 1/8 inch) may cause the needle to break.
• When using layers with thicker batting etc., you can sew more attractive embroidery by adjusting the
embroidery presser foot height in the embroidery settings screen (see below).
• In the case of thick terry cloth towels we recommend that you place a piece of water soluble stabilizer on
the top surface of the towel. This will help to reduce the nap of the toweling and result in more attractive
embroidery.
Note
• Press , and select page 6/8 to use and in the Embroidery Foot Height display in the
embroidery settings screen. Adjust the presser foot height for thick or puffy fabrics.
• To increase the space between the presser foot and the needle plate, set the embroidery foot height to
a larger number, 1.5 mm setting is used for most embroidery.
CAUTION
• Always use a stabilizer material for
embroidery when sewing stretch fabrics,
lightweight fabrics, fabrics with a coarse
weave, or fabrics which cause pattern
shrinkage. Otherwise, the needle may break
and cause injury. Not using a stabilizer
material may result in a poor finish to your
project.
PREPARING THE FABRIC
Embroidery
201
5
b
Iron the iron-on stabilizer material to the
wrong side of the fabric.
a Fusible side of stabilizer
b Fabric (wrong side)
Memo
• When embroidering on thin fabrics such as
organdy or lawn, or on napped fabrics such
as towel or corduroy, use water soluble sta-
bilizer (sold separately) for best results. The
water soluble stabilizer material will dissolve
completely in water, giving the project a
more attractive finish.
PREPARING THE FABRIC
202
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame
■ Types of Embroidery Frames
Other optional embroidery frame can be used. When choosing frames that do not appear on the screen, be sure
to check the design size of the embroidery field of the optional frame. Check with your authorized dealer for
frame compatibility.
Select a frame that matches the pattern size. Included frame options are displayed on the LCD.
a Highlighted: Can be used
b Shaded: Cannot be used
Extra Large Quilt Medium Small
Embroidery field
30 cm × 20 cm
(approx. 12 inches × 8 inches)
Embroidery field
20 cm × 20 cm
(approx. 8 inches × 8 inches)
Embroidery field
10 cm × 10 cm
(approx. 4 inches × 4 inches)
Embroidery field
2 cm × 6 cm
(approx. 1 inch × 2-1/2 inches)
Use when embroidering
connected or combined
characters or patterns, or when
embroidering large patterns.
Use when embroidering patterns
between 10 cm × 10 cm (approx.
4 inches × 4 inches) and
20 cm × 20 cm (approx. 8 inches
× 8 inches).
Use when embroidering patterns
under 10 cm × 10 cm
(approx. 4 inches × 4 inches).
Use for embroidering names or
very small patterns.
CAUTION
• If you use a frame that is too small, the presser foot may strike the frame during sewing and cause injury.
ab
PREPARING THE FABRIC
Embroidery
203
5
■ Inserting the Fabric
Press → → →
→ in this order to display a
video example of hoping the fabric in the
embroidery frame (see page 46). Follow the steps
explained below to complete the operation.
a
Lift-up and loosen the frame adjustment
screw and remove the inner frame.
a Frame adjustment screw
b Inner frame
b
Lay the fabric right side up on top of the
outer frame.
Re-insert the inner frame making sure to align the
inner frame’s with the outer frame’s .
a Inner frame’s
b Outer frame’s
c Frame adjustment screw
c
Slightly tighten the frame adjustment screw,
and then remove the slack in the fabric by
pulling on the edges and corners. Do not
loosen the screw.
d
Gently stretch the fabric taut, and tighten
the frame adjustment screw to keep the
fabric from loosening after stretching.
* After stretching the fabric, make sure the fabric is
taut.
* Make sure the inside and outside frames are even
before you start embroidering.
a Outer frame
b Inner frame
c Fabric
Note
• If the fabric is not securely held in the
embroidery frame, the embroidery design
will sew out poorly. Insert the fabric on a
level surface, and gently stretch the fabric
taut in the frame. Follow the steps below to
insert the fabric correctly.
Memo
• Stretch the fabric from all four corners and
all four edges. While stretching the fabric,
tighten the frame adjustment screw.
PREPARING THE FABRIC
204
e
Return the frame adjustment screw to its
initial position.
■ Using the Embroidery Sheet
When you want to embroider the pattern in a
particular place, use the embroidery sheet with the
frame.
a
With a chalk pencil, mark the area of the
fabric you want to embroider.
a Embroidery pattern
b Mark
b
Place the embroidery sheet on the inner
frame. Align the guide lines on the
embroidery sheet with the mark you made
on the fabric.
a Inner frame
b Guide line
c
Gently stretch the fabric so there are no
folds or wrinkles, and press the inner frame
into the outer frame.
a Inner frame
b Outer frame
d
Remove the embroidery sheet.
Memo
• You can use the included screw driver when
you loosen or tighten the frame adjustment
screw.
PREPARING THE FABRIC
Embroidery
205
5
Embroidering Small Fabrics or
Fabric Edges
Use an embroidery stabilizer to provide extra
support. After embroidering, remove the stabilizer
carefully. Attach the stabilizer as shown in the
following examples. We recommend using a
stabilizer for embroidery.
■ Embroidering Small Fabrics
Use a temporary spray adhesive to adhere the small
piece of fabric to the larger piece in the frame.
If you do not wish to use a temporary spray
adhesive, attach the stabilizer with a basting stitch.
a Fabric
b Stabilizer
■ Embroidering Edges or Corners
Use a temporary spray adhesive to adhere the small
piece of fabric to the larger piece in the frame.
If you do not wish to use a temporary spray
adhesive, attach the stabilizer with a basting stitch.
a Fabric
b Stabilizer
■ Embroidering Ribbons or Tape
Secure with double-sided tape or a temporary spray
adhesive.
a Ribbon or tape
b Stabilizer
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME
206
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME
Press → → → → in this order to display a video
example of attaching the embroidery frame (see page 46). Follow the steps explained below to complete
the operation.
a
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
raise the presser foot.
b
Align the embroidery frame guide with the
right edge of the embroidery frame holder.
a Embroidery frame holder
b Embroidery frame guide
c
Slide the embroidery frame into the holder,
making sure to align the embroidery frame’s
with the holder’s .
a Arrow mark
d
Lower the frame-securing lever to be level
with the frame to secure the embroidery
frame in the embroidery frame holder.
a Frame-securing lever
Note
• Wind and insert the bobbin before attaching the embroidery frame.
CAUTION
• If the frame-securing lever is not lowered, the
following message appears. You cannot start
sewing until you lower the frame-securing
lever.
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME
Embroidery
207
5
■ Removing the Embroidery Frame
a
Raise the frame-securing lever.
b
Pull the embroidery frame toward you.
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
208
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
The pattern is normally positioned in the center of the embroidery frame. If the pattern needs to be
repositioned for better placement on the garment, you can check the layout before starting embroidery.
Aligning the Embroidering
Position Using the Built-In
Camera
The camera built into this machine can be used to
easily align the embroidering position. This is
useful for patterns which need to be embroidered
in a particular position as shown below.
a
Use a chalk pencil to draw a cross at the
desired embroidering location.
a Chalk pencil mark
* Display the grid lines or cross grid lines in the
pattern display area to check the pattern orientation.
(Refer to “Changing the Embroidery Frame Display”
on page 238.)
b
Hoop the fabric.
Note
• When hooping the fabric in the embroidery frame,
make sure that the embroidery pattern will fit within
the embroidering area of the frame being used.
a Embroidering area
b Embroidery pattern size
c Chalk pencil mark
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
Embroidery
209
5
c
Select the pattern on your sewing machine.
d
Press in the sewing screen.
e
Press to set the starting point to the
center of the pattern.
f
Press .
g
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
lower the presser foot.
h
Press .
i
Press the positioning keys to move the
embroidery frame until the cross-shaped
chalk mark drawn on the fabric is displayed
in the camera view window.
a Positioning keys
a
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
210
j
Press to display the grid lines.
a Grid lines
b Chalk mark on the fabric
k
Adjust the orientation of the pattern by
pressing the orientation keys until the grid
lines are parallel with the chalk mark drawn
on the fabric. (Refer to “Rotating the
Pattern” on page 242.)
a Center point of the pattern
l
Press the positioning keys to move the
embroidery frame until the center point of
the pattern in the camera view window is
aligned with the chalk mark drawn on the
fabric.
m
Press to return to the previous
screen.
n
Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering.
* See “Sewing Embroidery Patterns” on page 219.
Memo
• Press to enlarge the camera view. By
enlarging the camera view, you can make a close
adjustment for the center point of the pattern moving
the embroidery frame little by little.
a
b
a
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
Embroidery
211
5
Display the Fabric While
Aligning the Embroidering
Position
The fabric hooped in the embroidery frame can be
displayed on the LCD so that the embroidery position
can be easily aligned.
Example:
a
Hoop the fabric in the embroidery frame, and
then attach the frame to the embroidery
machine.
b
Select the pattern, and then press .
c
Press .
d
When the following message appears, press
.
→ The embroidery frame moves so the fabric can be
scanned.
Note
• When embroidery frame (small: H 2 cm × W 6 cm (H
1 inch × W 2-1/2 inches)) is installed, the built-in
camera cannot be used to align the embroidering
position. Install medium embroidery frame or larger.
• For details on using thicker fabric such as quilting,
refer to “Positioning the Pattern on Thick Fabric”
(page 213).
Note
• Check page 8/8 of Settings screen to make sure the
Fabric Thickness Sensor is turned off when using
light to medium weight fabrics.
Memo
• If you do not wish the upper thread to be scanned
together with the fabric, scan the fabric without the
needle threaded with the upper thread.
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
212
e
When the fabric appears as a background for
the pattern, the pattern can be moved if it is
necessary.
f
Use to align the pattern to the desired
embroidery position.
• The pattern can be moved to the desired position by
using your finger or the touch pen to drag the
pattern displayed on the screen.
g
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
embroidering.
* See “Sewing Embroidery Patterns” on page 219.
→ When embroidery is finished, the fabric displayed in
the background disappears.
Whether the fabric disappears or remains displayed can
be specified from page 8/8 of the Settings screen.
a Set to “ON” to leave the fabric displayed in the
background.
b When set to “OFF”, the background will disappear.
c Press to remove the background image
completely.
Memo
• If necessary, press to display a preview in
order to check the pattern position.
Note
• If the embroidery is not sewn the fabric background
will remain on the screen.
In Settings screen 8/8 press to erase the
background image.
b
a
c
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
Embroidery
213
5
■ Positioning the Pattern on Thick
Fabric
When positioning the pattern on thick fabric such as
quilting, the fabric may not be detected correctly. In
order for the fabric to be correctly detected, its
thickness must first be measured.
a
Hoop the fabric in the embroidery frame, and
then attach the frame to the embroidery
machine.
b
Select the pattern, and then press .
c
Display page 8/8 of the Settings screen, and
then set “Fabric Thickness Sensor” to “ON”.
d
Press .
e
Press .
f
Affix the embroidery positioning sticker to the
fabric within the area indicated by the red
frame in the LCD, and then press .
g
When the following message appears, remove
the embroidery positioning sticker, and then
press .
→ The embroidery frame is moved, and the
embroidery positioning sticker affixed to the fabric is
detected.
h
Continue with step f on page 212 to align
the pattern with the desired embroidery
position.
Using the Built-In Camera to
Align the Embroidering Position
The embroidering position can easily be aligned
using the machine’s built-in camera and the
included embroidery positioning sticker.
a
Affix the embroidery positioning sticker to
the location in the fabric to be
embroidered. Place the embroidery
positioning sticker so that the center of the
larger circle is at the center of the
embroidery pattern.
a Embroidery positioning sticker
b Center of the embroidery pattern
c Embroidery field
Memo
• This feature is functional only when the fabric is
scanned. It will not affect embroidering if it is turned
on with normal embroidery.
CAUTION
• Use fabrics with a thickness of less than 3 mm
(approx. 1/8 inch). Using fabrics thicker than 3 mm
(approx. 1/8 inch) may cause the needle to break.
Note
• When embroidery frame (small) is installed,
the built-in camera cannot be used to align
the embroidering position. Install embroidery
frame (medium) or a larger embroidery
frame.
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
214
b
After selecting the pattern, press ,
and then press .
→ A window appears so that the area containing the
embroidery positioning sticker can be selected.
c
From the areas shown in the window, select
the area containing the embroidery
positioning sticker.
* If an area is not selected, scanning will start from the
center.
Note
• When inserting the fabric in the embroidery
frame, check that the embroidery pattern fits
within the embroidery field for the frame that
is used.
a Embroidery field
b Embroidery pattern
c Embroidery positioning sticker
• Depending on the type of fabric that is used,
a part of the embroidery positioning sticker
may remain attached when it is peeled off.
Before using the embroidery positioning
sticker, check that it can be cleanly removed
from a scrap piece of the fabric to be used.
Note
• Scanning cannot start from the center after
an area has been selected. To scan from the
center, press to close the window,
then display the window again but do not
select an area to scan, then press .
• If the embroidery positioning sticker
overlaps two areas, select either of the two
areas.
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
Embroidery
215
5
d
Press .
e
Following message appears. Press .
→ The built-in camera automatically searches for the
embroidery positioning sticker, and then the
carriage is moved so that the center of the
embroidery pattern is aligned with the center of the
embroidery positioning sticker. Regardless of the
setting selected in the machine settings screen, the
brightness of the light changes to “5” while the built-
in camera searches for the embroidery positioning
sticker.
f
A reminder message appears. Remove the
embroidery positioning sticker from the
fabric, and press .
* To remove the embroidery positioning sticker more
easily, press so that the embroidery frame
moves slightly forward and away from under the
needle. After the embroidery positioning sticker is
removed, press .
g
Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering.
* See “Sewing Embroidery Patterns” on page 219.
Note
• Attach embroidery foot “W2” before pressing
. The embroidery foot “W2” lowers
and check the fabric thickness, to help the
built-in camera recognize the embroidery
positioning sticker.
Note
• If the following warning message appears,
touch and reposition the embroidery
positioning sticker so the pattern is within
the embroidery field, and then press
again.
Note
• After the included embroidery positioning
stickers are used up, optional stickers are
available. For details, refer to “Options” on
page 20.
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
216
Checking the Pattern Position
The embroidery frame moves and shows the
pattern position. Watch the frame closely to make
sure the pattern will be sewn in the right place.
a
Press .
→ The following screen is displayed.
b
From , press the key for the position
that you want to check.
a Selected position
→ The needle will move to the selected position on the
pattern.
c
Press .
Memo
• To see the entire embroidering area, press
. The embroidery frame moves and
shows the embroidery area.
CAUTION
• Make sure the needle is up when the
embroidery frame is moving. If the needle is
down, it could break and result in injury.
a
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
Embroidery
217
5
Previewing the Completed
Pattern
a
Press .
→ An image of the pattern as it will be embroidered
appears.
b
Press to select the frame
used in the preview.
* Frames displayed in light gray cannot be selected.
* Press to enlarge the image of the pattern.
* The pattern can be sewn as it appears in the
following display.
c
Press to return to the original screen.
Memo
• You can begin sewing from this screen by
pressing the “Start/Stop” button.
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN
218
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN
Sewing Attractive Finishes
There are many factors that go into sewing beautiful embroidery. Using the appropriate stabilizer (see
page 200) and hooping the fabric in the frame (see page 202) are two important factors mentioned earlier.
Another important point is the appropriateness of the needle and thread being used. See the explanation
of threads below. Included with this machine are two bobbin cases. Follow the explanation below.
Thread Upper thread Use embroidery thread intended for use with this machine.
Other embroidery threads may not yield optimum results.
Bobbin thread Use embroidery bobbin thread intended for use with this machine.
Memo
• If you use threads other than those listed above, the embroidery may not sew out correctly.
Bobbin case
a Standard bobbin case
(green marking on the screw)
Alternate bobbin case
(no color on the screw)
Standard bobbin case (green marking on the screw) is in the machine for sewing and embroidery.
The bobbin case originally installed in the machine has a green marking on the screw. Do not adjust
green marked screw.
Alternate bobbin case (no color on the screw) is set with tighter tension for embroidery with different
weights of bobbin threads and a variety of embroidery techniques. This bobbin case is identified
with a dark colored mark on the inside of the bobbin cavity. The screw on this case can be adjusted
if necessary.
See page 338 for how to remove the bobbin case.
CAUTION
• When embroidering on large garments (especially jackets or other heavy fabrics), do not let the fabric
hang over the table. Otherwise, the embroidery unit cannot move freely and the embroidery frame may
strike the needle, causing the needle to bend or break and possibly cause injury.
Place the fabric so that it does not hang off the table or hold the fabric to keep it from dragging.
Note
• Before embroidering, check that there is enough thread in the bobbin. If you start to sew your embroi-
dery project without enough thread in the bobbin, you will need to rewind the bobbin in the middle of the
embroidery pattern.
• Do not leave objects in the range of motion of the embroidery frame. The frame may strike the object
and cause a poor finish to the embroidery pattern.
• When embroidering on large garments (especially jackets or other heavy fabrics), do not let the fabric
hang over the table. Otherwise, the embroidery unit cannot move freely, and the pattern may not turn
out as planned.
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN
Embroidery
219
5
■ Embroidery Needle Plate Cover
Under some conditions, based on the type of fabric,
stabilizer, or thread being used, there may be some
looping in the upper thread. In this case, attach the
included embroidery needle plate cover to the
needle plate. Attach the cover by inserting the two
projections on the underside of the cover into the
notches on the needle plate as shown below.
a Groove
b Projection
c Notch
To remove the embroidery needle plate cover, place
your fingernail in the groove and lift the plate out.
Sewing Embroidery Patterns
Example:
a Embroidery color order
b Cursor
a
Thread the machine with thread for the first
color, pass the thread through the hole in
embroidery foot “W2”, pull out some
thread to give it some slack, and then lightly
hold the end of the thread in your left hand.
CAUTION
• Push the embroidery needle plate cover as far
as possible to attach it. If the embroidery
needle plate cover is not securely attached, it
may cause the needle to break.
Note
• Do not use the embroidery needle plate
cover for any applications other than embroi-
dery.
Memo
• The [+] cursor moves over the pattern,
showing which part of the pattern is being
sewn.
b
a
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN
220
b
Lower the presser foot, then press the
“Start/Stop” button to start embroidering.
After 5-6 stitches, press the “Start/Stop”
button again to stop the machine.
c
Trim the excess thread at the end of the
seam. If the end of the seam is under the
presser foot, raise the presser foot, then
trim the excess thread.
d
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
embroidering.
→ When the first color is completely sewn, the machine
will automatically trim the threads and stop. The
presser foot will then automatically be raised.
On the embroidery color order display, the next
color will move to the top.
e
Remove the thread for the first color from
the machine. Thread the machine with the
next color.
f
Repeat the same steps for embroidering the
remaining colors.
→ When the last color is sewn, “Finished sewing” will
appear on the display. Press , and the
display will return to the original screen.
Memo
• If there is thread left over from the beginning
of sewing, it may be sewn over as you con-
tinue embroidering the pattern, making it
very difficult to deal with the thread after the
pattern is finished. Trim the threads at the
beginning of each thread change.
Memo
• The Thread Trimming Function is originally
set to trim excess thread jumps (threads
linking parts of the pattern, etc.). Depending
on the type of thread and fabric that are
used, an end of upper thread may remain on
the surface of the fabric at the beginning of
the stitching. After embroidering is finished,
cut off this excess thread.
*If the setting has been turned off, trim the
excess thread jumps using scissors after the
pattern is finished.
See page 236 for information on the thread
trimming function.
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN
Embroidery
221
5
Sewing Embroidery Patterns
Which Use Appliqué
There are some patterns which call for an appliqué
inside the pattern. Prepare the base fabric and the
appliqué fabric (appliqué piece).
When sewing an embroidery pattern with an
appliqué, the color sewing order display shows
“APPLIQUE MATERIAL”, “APPLIQUE POSITION”,
“APPLIQUE”, and then the sewing order of the
colors around the appliqué.
a
Attach an iron-on stabilizer to the wrong
side of the appliqué material.
a Appliqué material (cotton, felt, etc.)
b Iron-on stabilizer
b
Place the appliqué material into the
embroidery frame, and then press the
“Start/Stop” button to sew the outline of
the appliqué.
a Outline of appliqué
b Appliqué material
→ The machine will sew around the outline of the
appliqué pieces and will then stop.
c
Remove the appliqué material from the
embroidery frame, and then cut carefully
along the stitching. After cutting, remove all
of the stitching thread carefully.
* Carefully cut out the pattern on the outline you just
sewed. Do not cut inside the stitching line, as the
appliqué fabric will not be caught by the appliqué
stitch.
d
Place the base material into the embroidery
frame.
a Base material
e
Press the “Start/Stop” button to sew the
position of the appliqué.
* Use the same thread color you plan to use when
attaching the appliqué in step g.
a Position of appliqué
b Base material
→ The machine will sew around the position of the
appliqué and will then stop.
Memo
• Depending on the thread color display set-
ting, the display may show ,
, or .
Memo
• The embroidery procedure is the same as
the basic procedure explained on page 219.
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN
222
f
Apply a thin layer of adhesive or spray
adhesive to the back of the appliqué piece
and attach it to the appliqué position so that
it follows the seam of the outline.
g
Press the “Start/Stop” button.
→ The appliqué will then be completed.
h
Change the upper thread and then carry out
the rest of the embroidering.
Memo
• If the appliqué material is a lightweight
fabric, you may want to use a fusible web on
the back to stabilize the fabric and for
appliqué placement. Fuse appliqué in place
with an iron.
Do not remove fabric from the frame to iron
the appliqué material.
Memo
• Some patterns may not show all three appli-
qué steps. Sometimes the “APPLIQUE” step
will be shown as a color.
Memo
• Some glue may get onto the presser foot,
needle, and needle plate at this time. Finish
embroidering the appliqué pattern and then
clean away the glue.
• For best sewing results clip all threads
between color steps.
PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING EMBROIDERY PATTERNS AND PRINTED DESIGNS)
Embroidery
223
5
PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING EMBROIDERY
PATTERNS AND PRINTED DESIGNS)
Completed embroidery patterns combined with printed designs are built into this machine.
Beautiful three-dimensional embroidered designs can be created by ironing a background onto fabric or
printing it onto printable fabric, then sewing complementary embroidery on top of the background.
Using iron-on paper
Using printable fabric
Step1
Select a pattern to be combined with the background image.
→ See “Selecting a Pattern” on page 224.
Step2
Output from the machine the background image and the positioning image.
→ See “Outputting the Background Image and Positioning Image” on page 225.
Step3
When using iron-on paper
With a printer, print the background onto iron-on paper, and print the embroidery position sheet on plain paper. Then, iron
the background image onto fabric.
When using printable fabric
With a printer, print the background onto printable fabric, and print the embroidery position sheet on plain paper.
→ See “Printing the Background and Embroidery Position Sheet” on page 226.
Step4
Hoop in the embroidery frame the fabric with the background image ironed on or printed, check the embroidering
position, and then start embroidering.
→ See “Sewing Embroidery Patterns” on page 227.
Note
• Print the background and embroidery position sheet in their original dimensions. If an image is printed
in a different size, the sizes of the embroidery pattern and background may not match. In addition, the
built-in camera cannot detect the embroidery position mark. Make sure that the print settings are
correctly specified.
PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING EMBROIDERY PATTERNS AND PRINTED DESIGNS)
224
Selecting a Pattern
Patterns combining embroidery and printed
designs can be selected from the pages that
contain . Select the desired pattern.
a
Press the key of the pattern you want to
embroider.
→ An image of the pattern combined with the
background appears.
■ Checking Only the Embroidery
Pattern
Press .
→ Only the embroidery pattern (not the background
image of the selected embroidery pattern) is
displayed.
* To return to the image of the pattern combined with
the background, press .
Memo
• Refer to the Quick Reference Guide for the
detail of patterns which enable this function.
PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING EMBROIDERY PATTERNS AND PRINTED DESIGNS)
Embroidery
225
5
Outputting the Background
Image and Positioning Image
Use USB media or the computer to output the
following three images from the machine.
* File name may differ depending on the PDF file
selected.
• [xxx]r.pdf (Example: E_1r.pdf)
An image flipped on a vertical axis (for an iron-
on transfer)
• [xxx]n.pdf (Example: E_1n.pdf)
An image that is not flipped (for printing on
printable fabric)
• [xxx]p.pdf (Example: E_1p.pdf)
An image that is not flipped, but has positioning
marks attached (for positioning)
■ Using USB Media
a
Insert the USB media into the primary (top)
USB port on the machine.
b
Select the pattern, and then press .
→ The select USB output screen appears.
c
Press to select the primary (top) USB
port where the USB media is inserted.
→ Two files of the background image only and one file
for aligning embroidery into position are copied
(PDF format) onto the USB media.
d
Remove the USB media where the image
data is saved from the machine, and then
copy the image data from the USB media to
the computer.
Note
• Print the background and embroidery
position sheet in their original dimensions. If
an image is printed in a different size, the
sizes of the embroidery pattern and
background may not match. In addition, the
built-in camera cannot detect the
embroidery position mark. Make sure that
the print settings are correctly specified.
• When printing the PDF file of the image with
positioning marks, specify the highest image
quality possible for full-color printing. In
addition, use matte printing paper. Due to
poor printing conditions, the machine’s built-
in camera may not be able to correctly
detect the positioning marks. (For details on
printing, refer to the operating instructions
for your printer.)
Memo
• Do not remove the USB media from the
machine until data output is finished.
PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING EMBROIDERY PATTERNS AND PRINTED DESIGNS)
226
■ Using a USB Cable
a
Plug the USB cable connectors into the
corresponding USB ports on the computer
and on the machine.
a USB port for computer
b USB cable connector
→ The “Removable Disk” icon appears in “Computer
(My computer)” on the computer.
b
Select the pattern, and then press .
→ The select USB output screen appears.
c
Press .
→ Two files of the background image and one file for
aligning embroidery into position are copied (PDF
format) into “Removable Disk” under “Computer
(My computer)”.
d
Copy the image data saved in “Removable
Disk” into a different file before closing.
Printing the Background and
Embroidery Position Sheet
Print the PDF files of the background and
embroidery position sheet. The background file
that is printed differs depending on whether iron-
on paper or printable fabric is used.
To view the PDF file, Adobe
®
Reader
®
is needed.
If it is not installed on your computer, you can
download it from the Adobe Systems website:
http://www.adobe.com/
a
Open the PDF file to be printed, click
“File”-“Print”, and then set “Page Scaling”
to “None (100%)”.
b
Print the background image.
* When printing onto iron-on paper, print the file
named E_1r.pdf (an image flipped on a vertical axis).
When printing onto printable fabric, print the file
named E_1n.pdf (an image that is not flipped).
a Background image
Memo
• Do not disconnect the USB cable from the
machine until data output is finished.
Note
• Print the background and embroidery
position sheet in their original dimensions. If
an image is printed in a different size, the
sizes of the embroidery pattern and
background may not match. In addition, the
built-in camera cannot detect the
embroidery position mark. Make sure that
the print settings are correctly specified.
PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING EMBROIDERY PATTERNS AND PRINTED DESIGNS)
Embroidery
227
5
c
Print the embroidery position sheet (file
named E_1p.pdf) onto plain paper.
a Embroidery position sheet
d
If an iron-on transfer sheet is used, transfer
the image onto fabric.
Sewing Embroidery Patterns
a
Hoop in the embroidery frame the fabric
with the background image ironed on.
b
Cut the paper printed with the center
positioning image so it can easily be
positioned aligned with the background
image on the fabric.
* Lines or color changes in the image can help you
find the correct alignment position.
c
Place the paper printed with the positioning
image on top of the fabric so that the
pattern is aligned, and then affix the paper
to the fabric with cellophane tape to
prevent the paper from moving.
a Cellophane tape
Note
• Before printing onto iron-on paper or
printable fabric, we recommend performing
a test print to check the print settings.
• For details on printing on iron-on transfer
sheets or printable fabric, refer to the
instructions for the iron-on transfer sheets
and printable fabric.
• Some printers will automatically print an
image flipped if an iron-on transfer sheet is
selected as the paper. For details, refer to
the instructions for the printer being used.
Note
• When printing the PDF file for the
embroidery position sheet, specify the
highest image quality possible for full-color
printing. In addition, we recommend printing
on matte paper. If this is not done, the built-
in camera may not be able to correctly
detect the embroidery positioning mark.
Memo
• For details on transferring from iron-on
transfer sheets, refer to the instructions for
the iron-on transfer sheets.
• If necessary, cut the iron-on transfer sheet
to the size of the pattern before transferring
the image.
PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING EMBROIDERY PATTERNS AND PRINTED DESIGNS)
228
d
After checking that a pattern is selected,
press .
→ The sewing screen appears.
e
Align the embroidering position according
to steps
b through f of “Using the Built-
In Camera to Align the Embroidering
Position” on page 213.
f
Remove the positioning sheet and press the
“Start/Stop” button to begin embroidering.
Note
• Before embroidering, check that the
embroidery position sheet is perfectly
aligned with the background.
CAUTION
• Before pressing the “Start/Stop” button to
begin embroidering, remove the positioning
sheet taped to the fabric in step
c.
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS
Embroidery
229
5
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS
If the Bobbin Runs Out of Thread
When the bobbin begins to run out of thread
during embroidering, the machine will stop and
the message below will appear. Press and
follow the directions below to rethread the lower
threading. If very little sewing remains, you can
embroider 10 final stitches without rethreading the
machine by pressing . The machine will stop
after sewing the 10 stitches.
a
Press .
→ After the thread is automatically cut, the carriage
will move.
b
Unlock the frame-securing lever and
remove the embroidery frame.
* Be careful not to apply strong force to the fabric at
this time. Otherwise, the fabric may loosen in the
frame.
c
Insert a wound bobbin into the machine.
(see page 54 for Setting the bobbin.)
d
Press .
→ The carriage will return to its original position.
e
Attach the embroidery frame.
f
To return to the spot in the pattern where
you stopped sewing, follow steps
c
through
i in the next section.
Note
• Be careful not to bump the embroidery unit carriage or the presser foot when removing or attaching the
embroidery frame. Otherwise, the pattern will not embroider correctly.
Note
• If “Upper and Bobbin Thread Sensor” in the
General settings screen of the machine
setting mode is set to “OFF”, the message
shown above does not appear.
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS
230
If the Thread Breaks During
Sewing
a
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop the
machine.
b
If the upper thread is broken, redo the
upper threading. If the bobbin thread is
broken, press and follow the
directions in steps
a through e from the
previous section to reset the bobbin.
c
Press .
d
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
lower the presser foot.
e
Press
→ The camera view window appears.
f
Press , , or to move the
needle back the correct number of stitches
before the spot where the thread broke.
* If you cannot move back to the spot where the
thread broke, press to select the color and
move to the beginning position of that color, then
use , , or to move ahead to
slightly before where the thread broke.
* Press to enlarge the image in the screen.
* Press to remove “ “ from the screen.
g
Press to close the camera view
window.
h
Press to return to the original screen.
i
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
lower the presser foot, and press the “Start/
Stop” button to continue sewing.
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS
Embroidery
231
5
Restarting from the Beginning
a
Press .
b
Press .
→ The embroidery frame moves, returning the needle
to the pattern’s beginning position.
c
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
lower the presser foot and start sewing.
Resuming Embroidery After
Turning Off the Power
The current color and stitch number are saved
when embroidery is stopped. The next time the
machine is turned on, you have the option to
continue or delete the pattern.
a Current stitch number when embroidery was
stopped
a
Turn the main power to ON.
b
Follow the instructions shown on the screen
and remove the embroidery frame.
→ The following message will appear.
Memo
• Even if the power goes out in the middle of
embroidery, the machine returns to the point
where embroidery was stopped when the
machine is turned on again.
Note
• Do not remove the embroidery unit or the
memory will no longer remember your
design.
a
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS
232
c
Attach the embroidery frame and press
.
→ The previous sewing screen displayed before the
machine was turned off appears.
d
Continue embroidering.
a Stitch number when embroidery is resumed
Memo
• If you want to start a new embroidery pat-
tern, press so the pattern selection
screen appears.
a
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
Embroidery
233
5
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
Adjusting Thread Tension
When embroidering, the thread tension should be
set so that the upper thread can slightly be seen on
the wrong side of the fabric.
■ Correct Thread Tension
The pattern can be seen from the wrong side of the
fabric. If the thread tension is not set correctly, the
pattern will not finish well. The fabric may pucker or
the thread may break.
a Right side
b Wrong side
Follow the operations described below to adjust
thread tension according to the situation.
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight
The tension of the upper thread is too tight, resulting
in the bobbin thread being visible from the right side
of the fabric.
a Right side
b Wrong side
a
Press .
b
Press to weaken the upper thread
tension. (The tension number will
decrease.)
c
Press .
Note
• If the thread tension setting is made
extremely weak, the machine may stop dur-
ing sewing. This is not the sign of a malfunc-
tion. Increase the thread tension slightly,
and begin sewing again.
Memo
• If you turn the main power to OFF or select a
different pattern, the thread tension will reset
to the automatic setting.
• When you retrieve a saved pattern, the
thread tension setting will be the same as
when the pattern was saved.
Note
• If the bobbin thread was incorrectly
threaded, the upper thread may be too tight.
In this case, refer to “Setting the Bobbin”
(page 54) and rethread the bobbin thread.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
234
■ Upper Thread is Too Loose
The tension of the upper thread is too loose,
resulting in a loose upper thread, loose thread locks,
or loops appearing on the right side of the fabric.
a Right side
b Wrong side
a
Press .
b
Press to tighten the upper thread
tension. (The tension number will increase.)
c
Press .
Adjusting the Alternate Bobbin
Case (with No Color on the
Screw)
When using the embroidery bobbin thread
provided, please be sure to choose the green
marked bobbin case when performing utility stitch
sewing and embroidery functions. When in the
embroidery function mode, the alternate bobbin
case (with no color on the screw) should be
selected when substitute embroidery bobbin
threads (other than what is accompanied with your
machine) are being used. The alternate bobbin
case (with no color on the screw) can be easily
adjusted when bobbin tension changes are
required to accommodate different bobbin
threads. See “Sewing Attractive Finishes” on page
218.
To adjust the bobbin tension for embroidery
function, using the alternate bobbin case (with no
color on the screw), turn the slotted screw (-) with
a (small) screwdriver.
a Do not turn a phillips screw (+).
b Adjust with a screwdriver (small).
■ Correct Tension
Upper thread slightly appears on the wrong side of
fabric.
a Right side
b Wrong side
Note
• If the upper thread was incorrectly threaded,
the upper thread may be too loose. In this
case, refer to “Upper Threading” (page 57)
and rethread the upper thread.
Note
• With “Embroidery Tension” on page 6/8 of
the setting screen, the tension of the upper
thread can be adjusted for embroidering.
The selected setting will be applied to all
patterns.
When embroidering, if the overall tension of
the upper thread is too tight or too loose,
adjust it from the setting screen. Press
to tighten the upper thread tension and
press to loosen the upper tension. If an
individual embroidery pattern needs
additional fine tuning, refer to “Adjusting
Thread Tension” on page 233.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
Embroidery
235
5
■ Bobbin Thread is Too Loose
Bobbin thread appears slightly on the right side of
fabric.
a Right side
b Wrong side
If this occurs, turn the slotted screw (-) clockwise,
being careful not to over-tighten the screw,
approximately 30-45 degrees to increase bobbin
tension.
■ Bobbin Thread is Too Tight
Upper thread on the right side of fabric seems to be
lifting/looping and bobbin thread is not seen on the
wrong side of fabric.
a Right side
b Wrong side
If this occurs, turn the slotted screw (-)
counterclockwise, being careful not to over-loosen
the screw, approximately 30-45 degrees to decrease
bobbin tension.
Using the Automatic Thread
Cutting Function
(END COLOR TRIM)
The automatic thread cutting function will
cut the thread at the end of sewing each color.
This function is initially turned on. To turn this
function off, press key and then . This
function can be turned on or off during
embroidering.
* This setting returns to its default
when the machine is turned off.
a
Press .
b
Press to turn off the automatic thread
cutting function.
→ The key will display as
* When one color thread is sewn, the machine will
stop without cutting the thread.
CAUTION
• When adjusting the alternate bobbin case, be
sure to remove the bobbin from the alternate
bobbin case.
• DO NOT adjust the position of the phillips (+)
screw on the alternate bobbin case as this may
result in damage to the bobbin case, rendering
it unusable.
• If the slotted screw (-) is difficult to turn, do
not use force. Turning the screw too much or
providing force in either (rotational) direction
may cause damage to the bobbin case. Should
damage occur, the bobbin case may not
maintain proper tension.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
236
Using the Thread Trimming
Function (JUMP STITCH TRIM)
The thread trimming function will
automatically trim any excess thread jumps within
the color. This function is initially turned on. To
turn this function off, press key and then
. This function can be turned on or off during
embroidering.
* Your customized setting remains after turning the
machine off and on.
a Jump stitch
a
Press .
b
Press to turn off the thread trimming
function.
→ The key will display as
* The machine will not trim the thread before moving
to the next stitching.
■ Selecting the Length of Jump Stitch
Not to Trim
When the thread trimming function is turned
on, you can select the length of the jump stitch not
to trim the thread. This function can be turned on or
off during embroidering.
Select a setting from 5 mm to 50 mm in 5 mm
increments.
* Your customized setting remains after turning the
machine off and on.
Press or to select the length of jump stitch.
For example: Press to select 25 mm (1 inch)
and the machine will not trim a jump stitch of 25
mm or less before moving to the next stitching.
Note
• When this function is turned on, use the
included ball point needle 75/11 for embroi-
dering patterns with short jump stitches such
as alphabet characters. Using other needles
may cause the thread to break.
Note
• If design has many trims it is recommended
to select a higher jump stitch trim setting in
order to reduce the amount of excess tails
on backside of fabric.
• The higher number of the jump stitch length
selected, the fewer number of times the
machine will trim. In this case, more jump
stitches remain on the surface of the fabric.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
Embroidery
237
5
Adjusting the Embroidery Speed
a
Press and .
b
In the “Max Embroidery Speed” display, use
to change the maximum
embroidery speed.
* You can choose from 3 different speed levels.
c
Press .
Changing the Thread Color
Display
You can display the name of the thread colors or
embroidery thread number.
a
Press .
b
Press .
c
In the “Thread Color Display”, use
to display the name of the thread colors or
the embroidery thread number.
Memo
• SPM is the number of stitches sewn in one
minute.
• Decrease the sewing speed when embroi-
dering on thin, thick, or heavy fabrics.
• The sewing speed can be changed while
embroidery is being sewn.
• The maximum sewing speed setting does
not change until a new setting is selected.
The setting specified before the main power
is set to OFF remains selected the next time
that the machine is turned on.
• Decrease the sewing speed to 600 spm
when using a speciality thread like a metallic
thread.
Memo
• Colors on the screen may vary slightly from
actual spool colors.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
238
d
When the thread number is
displayed, use to select from six
embroidery thread brands pictured below.
* Depending on the country or area, cotton-like
polyester thread is sold.
e
Press .
Changing the Embroidery Frame
Display
a
Press .
b
Press .
c
In the “Embroidery Frame Display”, use
to change the embroidery frame display
mode.
* There are 16 choices.
EMBROIDERY / POLYESTER
THREAD#
COUNTRY/COTTON THREAD#*
MADEIRA /POLYESTER
THREAD#
MADEIRA RAYON THREAD#
SULKY THREAD#
ROBISON-ANTON/POLYESTER
THREAD#
#123
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
Embroidery
239
5
* For the optional embroidery frame.
a Extra large frame embroidering area
30 cm × 20 cm (12 inches × 8 inches)
b Center mark
c Quilt frame embroidering area
20 cm × 20 cm (8 inches × 8 inches)
d Embroidery area for optional large embroidery
frame
18 cm × 13 cm (7 inches × 5 inches)
e Embroidering area for optional border embroidery
frame
18 cm × 10 cm (7 inches × 4 inches)
f Embroidering area for optional medium frame
15 cm × 15 cm (6 inches x 6 inches)
g Medium frame embroidering area
10 cm × 10 cm (4 inches × 4 inches)
h Small frame embroidering area
2 cm × 6 cm (1 inch × 2-1/2 inches)
i Grid lines
d
Press .
REVISING THE PATTERN
240
REVISING THE PATTERN
Moving the Pattern
Use to move the pattern in the direction
shown by the arrow.
Press to center the pattern.
a Distance from the center
The pattern can also be moved by dragging it.
If a USB mouse is connected, move the mouse to
position the pointer on the desired pattern, and
then select and drag the pattern. The pattern can
also be dragged by selecting it directly in the
screen with your finger or the touch pen.
Aligning the Pattern and the
Needle
Example: Aligning the lower left side of a
pattern and the needle
CAUTION
• When you have revised the pattern, check the display of available embroidery frames and use an
appropriate frame. If you use an embroidery frame not displayed as available for use, the presser foot may
strike the frame and possibly cause injury.
Memo
• Patterns cannot be moved in screens where
does not appear.
a
REVISING THE PATTERN
Embroidery
241
5
a
Mark the embroidery start position on the
fabric, as shown.
b
Press .
c
Press .
a Start position
b This key is used for aligning linked characters (see
page 245).
→ The needle position moves to the bottom left corner
of the pattern (the embroidery frame moves so that
the needle is positioned correctly).
d
Press .
e
Use to align the needle and the mark
on the fabric, and begin embroidering the
pattern.
Changing the Size of the Pattern
a
Press .
b
Select the direction in which to change the
size.
* Press to enlarge the pattern proportionately.
* Press to shrink the pattern proportionately.
* Press to stretch the pattern horizontally.
* Press to compact the pattern horizontally.
a
b
REVISING THE PATTERN
242
* Press to stretch the pattern vertically.
* Press to compact the pattern vertically.
* Press to return the pattern to its original
appearance.
a Size of the pattern
c
Press to return to the original screen.
Rotating the Pattern
a
Press .
b
Select the angle of rotation for the pattern.
* Press to rotate the pattern 90 degrees to the
left.
* Press to rotate the pattern 90 degrees to the
right.
* Press to rotate the pattern 10 degrees to the
left.
* Press to rotate the pattern 10 degrees to the
right.
* Press to rotate the pattern 1 degree to the left.
* Press to rotate the pattern 1 degree to the
right.
Memo
• Some patterns or characters can be
enlarged more than others.
• Some patterns or characters can be
enlarged to a greater degree if they are
rotated 90 degrees.
• You can change the size of the pattern by
rotating the mouse wheel. Rotate the mouse
wheel away from you to shrink the pattern.
Rotate the mouse wheel toward you to
enlarge the pattern.
a
REVISING THE PATTERN
Embroidery
243
5
* Press to return the pattern to its original
position.
a Degree of rotation
c
Press to return to the original screen.
Creating a Horizontal Mirror
Image
Press so it appears as to create a
horizontal mirror image of the selected pattern.
Press again to return the pattern to normal.
0°
Memo
• You can rotate the pattern by rotating the
mouse wheel. Rotate the mouse wheel
away from you to rotate the pattern 10
degrees to the left. Rotate the mouse wheel
toward you to rotate the pattern 10 degrees
to the right.
a
REVISING THE PATTERN
244
Changing the Density
(Alphabet Character and Frame
Patterns Only)
The thread density for some alphabet character
and frame patterns can be changed.
A setting between 80% and 120% in 5%
increments can be specified.
a
Press .
b
Change the density.
* Press to make the pattern less dense.
* Press to make the pattern more dense.
a Normal
b Fine (stitches closer together)
c Coarse (stitches farther apart)
→ The pattern density changes each time you press a
button.
c
Press to return to the pattern
selection screen.
REVISING THE PATTERN
Embroidery
245
5
Changing the Colors of Alphabet
Character Patterns
Combined alphabet character patterns can be
sewn with each letter in a different color. If
“MULTI COLOR” is set, the machine stops after
each character is sewn so that the thread can be
changed to a different color.
a
Press so that it appears as .
* Press the key again to return to the original setting.
b
After a character is sewn, change the thread
color, and then sew the next character.
Embroidering Linked Characters
Follow the procedure described below to
embroider linked characters in a single row when
the entire pattern extends beyond the embroidery
frame.
Example: Linking “DEF” to the characters
“ABC”
a
Select the character patterns for “ABC”.
Note
• For details on selecting character patterns,
refer to “Selecting Alphabet Character Pat-
terns” on page 194.
REVISING THE PATTERN
246
b
Press .
c
Press .
→ The needle is positioned in the lower-left corner of
the pattern. The embroidery frame moves so that the
needle is positioned correctly.
d
Press .
e
Press .
Note
• To cancel the starting point setting and
return the starting point to the center of the
pattern, press .
• Use to select a different starting
point for embroidering.
REVISING THE PATTERN
Embroidery
247
5
f
Press to turn off the thread cutting
function and then press .
g
Press the “Start/Stop” button.
h
After the characters are embroidered, cut
the threads to a generous length, remove
the embroidery frame, and then attach the
embroidery frame again so that the
remaining characters (“DEF”) can be
embroidered.
a End of the embroidering
i
As in step a, select the character patterns
for “DEF”.
j
Press .
k
Press .
→ The needle is positioned in the lower-left corner of
the pattern. The embroidery frame moves so that the
needle is positioned correctly.
l
Press .
m
Use to align the needle with the end
of embroidering for the previous pattern.
REVISING THE PATTERN
248
n
Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering the remaining character
patterns.
Uninterrupted Embroidering
(Using a Single Color)
A selected pattern can be stitched out in one color
instead of multicolor. The machine will hesitate
but not stop between color steps, and then
continue till the pattern is completed. Press
for the multicolor steps to become shaded and the
selected pattern will embroider in a single color,
instead of changing the thread while
embroidering. Press again to return to the
pattern’s original settings.
→ The thread color displayed on the screen will be
grayed out.
Memo
• Even if uninterrupted embroidering has
been set, the automatic thread cutting
function and the thread trimming function
can be used (see page 235 and 236).
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Embroidery
249
5
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Embroidery Data Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using embroidery data other than that created and saved in this
machine.
■ Types of Embroidery Data that can be Used
• Only .pes,.pha,.phb,.phc, and .dst embroidery data files can be used with this machine. Using data other
than that saved using our data design systems or sewing machines may cause the embroidery machine to
malfunction.
■ Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used
Stitch data can be saved to or recalled from USB media. Use media that meets the following specifications.
• USB Flash drive (USB Flash memory)
• USB Floppy disk drive
Stitch data can be recalled only.
• USB CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW drives
You can also use the following types of USB media with the USB Memory Card Reader/USB card writer module.
• Secure Digital (SD) Card
• CompactFlash
• Memory Stick
•Smart Media
• Multi Media Card (MMC)
• XD-Picture Card
CAUTION
• When using embroidery data other than our original patterns, the thread or needle may break when
sewing with a stitch density that is too fine or when sewing three or more overlapping stitches. In that
case, use one of our original data design systems to edit the embroidery data.
Note
• The processing speed may vary by port selection and quantity of data stored.
• Some USB media may not be usable with this machine. Please visit our website for more details.
• The access lamp will begin blinking after inserting USB devices/media, and it will take about 5 to 6 sec-
onds to recognize the devices/media. (Time will differ depending on the USB device/media).
Memo
• To create file folders, use a computer.
• Letters and numerals can be used in the file names. In addition, if the file name contains no more than
eight characters, the entire file name will appear on the screen.
If the file name is more than eight characters long, only the first six characters followed by “~” and a
number appear as the file name.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
250
■ Computers and Operating Systems with the Following Specifications can be
Used
• Compatible models:
IBM PC with a USB port as standard equipment
IBM PC-compatible computer equipped with a USB port as standard equipment
• Compatible operating systems:
Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8
■ Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data
• If the name of the embroidery data file/folder cannot be identified, for example, because the name contains
special characters, the file/folder is not displayed. If this occurs, change the name of the file/folder. We
recommend using the 26 letters of the alphabet (uppercase and lowercase), the numbers 0 through 9,”-”, and
“_”.
• If embroidery data larger than 300 mm (H) × 200 mm (W) (approx.12 inches (H) × 8 inches (W)) is selected, a
message is shown asking if you wish to rotate the pattern 90 degrees.
Even after being rotated 90 degrees, embroidery data larger than 300 mm (H) × 200 mm (W) (approx.
12 inches (H) × 8 inches (W)) cannot be used. (All designs must be within the 300 mm (H) × 200 mm (W)
(approx. 12 inches (H) × 8 inches (W)) design field size.)
• .pes files saved with the number of stitches or the number of colors exceeding the specified limits cannot be
displayed. The combined design can not exceed a maximum number of 500,000 stitches or a maximum
number of 125 color changes (Above numbers are approximate, depending on the overall size of the design).
Use one of our design software programs to edit the embroidery pattern so that it meets these specifications.
• Embroidery data stored in a folder created in USB media can be retrieved.
• Do not create folders in “Removable Disk” on a computer. If embroidery data is stored in a folder in
“Removable Disk”, that embroidery data cannot be retrieved by the machine.
• Even if the embroidery unit is not attached, the machine will recognize embroidery data.
■ Tajima (.dst) Embroidery Data
• .dst data is displayed in the pattern list screen by file name (the actual image cannot be displayed). Only the
first eight characters of the file name can be displayed.
• Since Tajima (.dst) data does not contain specific thread color information, it is displayed with our default
thread color sequence. Check the preview and change the thread colors as desired.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Embroidery
251
5
Saving Embroidery Patterns in
the Machine’s Memory
You can save embroidery patterns that you have
customized and will use often; for example, your
name, patterns that have been rotated or had the
size changed, patterns that have had the sewing
position changed, etc. A total of about 2 MB of
patterns can be saved in the machine's memory.
a
Press when the pattern you want to
save is in the sewing screen.
b
Press .
* Press to return to the original screen without
saving.
→ The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the pattern
is saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.
■ If the Memory is Full
If the screen below displays, either the maximum
number of patterns have been saved or the pattern
you want to save takes a lot of memory, and the
machine cannot save it. If you delete a previously
saved pattern, you can save the current pattern.
a
Press .
* Press to return to the original screen
without saving.
→ The machine displays the patterns currently saved.
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
the pattern you are saving.
Memo
• It takes a few seconds to save a pattern to
the machine’s memory.
• See page 254 for information on retrieving a
saved pattern.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
252
b
Select the pattern you want to delete.
c
Press .
a Amount of memory used by the pattern to be
deleted
b Amount of memory needed to save the current
pattern
d
Press .
* If you decide not to delete the pattern, press
.
→ The “Saving” screen displays. When the pattern is
saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.
Saving Embroidery Patterns to
USB Media
When sending embroidery patterns from the
machine to USB media, plug the USB media into
the machine’s USB port.
a
Press when the pattern you want to
save is in the sewing screen.
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
the pattern you are saving.
b
a
Memo
• If there is enough memory available after
deleting the pattern, the pattern you want to
save will be saved automatically. If there is
not enough memory available after deleting
the pattern, repeat the steps above to delete
another pattern from the machine’s memory.
• It takes a few seconds to save a pattern.
• See page 254 for more information about
retrieving saved patterns.
Memo
• USB media is commercially available, but
some USB media may not be usable with
this machine. Please visit our website for
more details.
• Depending on the type of USB media being
used, either directly plug the USB device
into the machine’s USB port or plug the USB
media Reader/Writer into the machine’s
USB port.
• The USB media can be inserted or removed
at any time.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Embroidery
253
5
b
Insert the USB media into the primary (top)
USB port on the machine.
a Primary (top) USB port for media
b USB media
c
Press .
* Press to return to the original screen without
saving.
→ The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the pattern
is saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.
Saving Embroidery Patterns in
the Computer
Using the included USB cable, the machine can
be connected to your computer, and the
embroidery patterns can be temporarily retrieved
from and saved in the “Removable Disk” folder in
your computer. A total of about 3 MB of
embroidery patterns can be saved in the
“Removable disk”, but the saved embroidery
patterns are deleted when the machine is turned
OFF.
a
Plug the USB cable connector into the
corresponding USB ports for the computer
and for the machine.
b
Turn on your computer and select
“Computer (My computer)”.
* The USB cable can be plugged into the USB ports
on the computer and embroidery machine whether
or not they are turned on.
a USB port for computer
b USB cable connector
→ The “Removable Disk” icon will appear in
“Computer (My computer)” on the computer.
Note
• The processing speed may vary by port
selection and quantity of data. The primary
(top) USB port processes the data faster
than the center port. It is recommended to
use the primary (top) USB port.
• Two USB media cannot be used with this
machine at the same time. If two USB media
are inserted, only the USB media inserted
first is detected.
• Do not insert anything other than USB
media into the USB media port. Otherwise,
the USB media drive may be damaged.
Note
• Do not insert or remove USB media while
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
some or all of the pattern you are saving.
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
the pattern you are saving.
Note
• The connectors on the USB cable can only
be inserted into a port in one direction. If it is
difficult to insert the connector, do not insert
it with force. Check the orientation of the
connector.
• For details on the position of the USB port
on the computer (or USB hub), refer to the
instruction manual for the corresponding
equipment.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
254
c
Press when the pattern you want to
save is in the sewing screen.
d
Press .
* Press to return to the original screen without
saving.
→ The pattern will be temporarily saved to
“Removable Disk” under “Computer (My
computer)”.
e
Select the pattern’s .phc file in “Removable
Disk” and copy the file to the computer.
Retrieving Patterns from the
Machine’s Memory
a
Press .
→ The machine displays the patterns currently in the
memory.
b
Press the key of the pattern you want to
retrieve.
* Press to return to the original screen.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Embroidery
255
5
c
Press .
→ The sewing screen is displayed.
Recalling from USB Media
You can recall a specific embroidery pattern from
either direct USB media or a folder in the USB
media. If the pattern is in a folder, check each
folder to find the embroidery pattern.
a
Insert the USB media into the primary (top)
USB port on the machine (see page 252).
a Primary (top) USB port for media
b USB media
b
Press .
→ Embroidery patterns and a folder in a top folder are
displayed.
c
Press when there is a subfolder to
sort two or more stitch patterns to USB
media, the embroidery pattern in the
subfolder is displayed.
* Press to return to the original screen without
recalling.
a Folder name
b Embroidery patterns in USB media
c Path
* The path to shows the current folder at the top of the
list.
Embroidery patterns and subfolders within a folder
are displayed.
* Press to return to the previous folder.
* Use the computer to create folders. Folders cannot
be created with the machine.
Note
• The processing speed may vary by port
selection and quantity of data.
a
b
c
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
256
d
Press the key of the pattern you want to
retrieve.
* Press to return to the original screen.
e
Press .
* Press to delete the pattern. The pattern will
be deleted from the USB media.
→ The sewing screen is displayed.
Recalling from the Computer
a
Plug the USB cable connector into the
corresponding USB ports for the computer
and for the machine (see page 253).
b
On the computer, open “Computer (My
computer)” then go to “Removable Disk”.
c
Move/copy the pattern data to “Removable
Disk”.
→ Pattern data in “Removable Disk” is written to the
machine.
d
Press .
→ The patterns in the computer are displayed on the
selection screen.
Note
• While data is being written, do not discon-
nect the USB cable.
• Do not create folders within “Removable
Disk”. Since folders are not displayed, stitch
pattern data within folders cannot be
recalled.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Embroidery
257
5
e
Press the key of the pattern you want to
recall.
* Press to return to the original screen.
f
Press .
→ The sewing screen is displayed.
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
258
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
Using a Frame Pattern to Make
an Appliqué (1)
You can use framed patterns of the same size and
shape to create an appliqué. Embroider one
pattern with a straight stitch and one pattern with a
satin stitch.
a
Select a straight stitch frame pattern.
Embroider the pattern onto the appliqué
material, then cut neatly around the outside
of the shape.
b
Embroider the same pattern from step a
onto the base fabric.
c
Apply a thin layer of fabric glue or a
temporary spray adhesive to the rear of the
appliqué created in step
a. Attach the
appliqué to the base fabric matching the
shapes.
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
Embroidery
259
5
d
Select the satin stitch frame pattern of the
same shape as the appliqué. Embroider over
the appliqué and base fabric from step
c to
create the appliqué.
Using a Frame Pattern to Make
an Appliqué (2)
This is a second method to make appliqué using
embroidery patterns. You do not have to change
the fabric in the embroidery frame using this
method. Embroider one pattern with a straight
stitch and one pattern with a satin stitch.
a
Select a straight stitch frame pattern, and
embroider the pattern onto the base fabric.
b
Place the appliqué fabric over the pattern
embroidered in step
a.
* Be sure that the appliqué fabric completely covers
the seam.
Note
• If you change the size or position of the pat-
terns when selecting them, make a note of
the size and location.
a Appliqué material
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
260
c
Embroider the same pattern on the appliqué
fabric.
d
Remove the embroidery frame from the
embroidery unit, and cut around the
outside of the stitches.
e
Select the satin stitch frame pattern of the
same shape as the appliqué.
f
Reattach the embroidery frame to the
embroidery unit, and embroider the satin
stitch pattern to create an appliqué.
Note
• Do not remove the fabric from the embroi-
dery frame to cut it. Also, do not pull strongly
on the fabric. Otherwise, the fabric may
loosen in the frame.
Note
• Do not change the size or position of the
pattern.
• If you change the size or position of the pat-
terns when selecting them, make a note of
the size and location.
a Appliqué material
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
Embroidery
261
5
Sewing Split Embroidery Patterns
Split embroidery patterns created with PE-DESIGN
Ver.7 or later can be sewn. With split embroidery
patterns, embroidery designs larger than the
embroidery hoop are divided into multiple
sections, which combine to create a single pattern
after each section is sewn.
For details on creating split embroidery patterns
and for more detailed sewing instructions, refer to
the operation manual included with PE-DESIGN
Ver.7 or later.
The following procedure describes how to read
the split embroidery pattern shown below from
USB media and embroider it.
a
Connect to the machine the media
containing the created split embroidery
pattern, and then select the split
embroidery pattern to be embroidered.
* For details on recalling patterns, refer to “Selecting
Patterns from Embroidery Cards” on page 197,
“Recalling from USB Media” on page 255, or
“Recalling from the Computer” on page 256.
→ A screen appears so that a section of the split
embroidery pattern can be selected.
b
Select section to be embroidered.
* Select the sections in alphabetical order.
* A maximum of 12 sections can be displayed in one
page. If there are 13 or more sections in the pattern,
press or to display the previous or next
page.
c
Press .
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
262
d
If necessary, edit the pattern.
* For details, refer to “REVISING THE PATTERN” on
page 240.
e
Press the “Start/Stop” button to embroider
the pattern section.
f
When embroidering is finished, the
following screen appears. Press .
→ A screen appears so that a section of the split
embroidery pattern can be selected.
g
Repeat steps b through f to embroider
the remaining sections of the pattern.
Memo
• The pattern can be rotated 90° to either the
left or right when is pressed.
Chapter 6
Embroidery Edit
EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS..................264
SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT ..................265
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Brother “Exclusives”/Greek
Alphabet Patterns/Floral Alphabet Patterns/Utility Embroidery
Patterns/Frame Patterns.................................................. 266
Selecting Alphabet Character Patterns............................ 266
EDITING PATTERNS.....................................268
■ Key Functions......................................................................... 269
Moving the Pattern ......................................................... 270
Rotating the Pattern........................................................ 270
Changing the Size of the Pattern..................................... 270
Changing the Pattern Size While Maintaining the Desired
Thread Density (Stitch Recalculator) .............................. 270
Deleting the Pattern........................................................ 272
Displaying Patterns in the Screen Magnified by 200% ... 272
Changing the Configuration of Alphabet Character
Patterns...................................................................273
Changing Alphabet Character Spacing............................ 273
Reducing Character Spacing ........................................... 274
Separating Combined Character Patterns ....................... 275
Changing the Color of Each Alphabet Character in a
Pattern ....................................................................276
Embroidering Linked Characters..................................... 277
Changing the Thread Color............................................. 277
Creating a Custom Thread Table..................................... 278
■ Adding a Color to the Custom Thread Table from the List ..... 280
■ Saving the Custom Thread Table to USB media...................... 280
■ Recalling the Custom Thread Table data from USB media ..... 281
Choosing a Color from the Custom Thread Table ........... 282
Find New Color Schemes With the Color Shuffling
Function..................................................................283
Designing Repeated Patterns .......................................... 285
■ Sewing Repeated Patterns ...................................................... 285
■ Repeating One Element of a Repeated Pattern....................... 287
■ Color Sorting Repeated Patterns.............................................289
■ Assigning Thread Marks..........................................................290
Embroidering the Pattern Repeatedly ............................. 291
Duplicating a Pattern...................................................... 293
After Editing.................................................................... 294
COMBINING PATTERNS..............................295
Editing Combined Patterns.............................................. 295
■ Selecting combined embroidery patterns ............................... 297
Sewing Combined Patterns ............................................. 298
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS....299
Uninterrupted Embroidering (Using a Single Color) ....... 299
Basting Embroidery......................................................... 299
Creating an Appliqué Piece............................................. 300
■ Creating an Appliqué Piece.....................................................300
■ Using a Frame Pattern for the Outline....................................304
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION ............. 306
PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING
EMBROIDERY PATTERNS AND PRINTED
DESIGNS) .................................................... 306
EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS
264
EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS
With the Embroidery Edit functions, you can combine embroidery patterns and character patterns,
change the size of patterns, rotate patterns, and perform many other editing functions. This machine can
perform the 11 functions listed below.
■ Print and Stitch (Combining Embroidery Patterns and Printed Designs)
You can create beautiful three-dimensional embroidered designs by ironing a background onto fabric or printing
it onto printable fabric, then sewing complementary embroidery on top of the background.
■ Create Appliqué Piece
You can create an appliqué piece from the built-in patterns and patterns on embroidery cards.
■ Combine Patterns
You can easily create combinations of embroidery patterns, frame patterns, character patterns, patterns from the
machine’s memory, patterns from separately sold embroidery cards, and many other patterns.
■ Move Patterns
Within the 30 cm × 20 cm (approx. 12 inches × 8 inches) wide embroidery area, you can change the position of
patterns, and check the position on the LCD.
■ Rotate Patterns
You can rotate patterns one degree, ten degrees or ninety degrees at a time.
■ Enlarge or Reduce Patterns
You can make patterns larger or smaller.
• This function is not available for some patterns.
■ Create Mirror Images
You can create horizontal mirror images.
• This function is not available for some patterns.
■ Change Alphabet Character Spacing
You can increase or decrease the spacing between characters in combined patterns.
■ Change Alphabet Character Appearance/Layout
You can change the layout of the characters to a curved line, diagonal, etc. There are 6 choices total.
■ Change the Thread Colors of Patterns
You can change the thread colors of the pattern to your favorite colors.
■ Creating a Repeating Pattern
You can add copies of a pattern to create a pattern that repeats in a vertical or horizontal direction.
SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT
Embroidery Edit
265
6
SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT
Prepare the machine for embroidery according to the instructions on page 186, and press , then
to display the screen below.
a Embroidery patterns
b Brother “Exclusives”
c Greek alphabet patterns
d Floral alphabet patterns
e Utility embroidery patterns
f Frame patterns
g Alphabet characters
h Patterns saved in the machine’s memory (see page 254)
i Patterns saved in USB media (see page 255)
j Patterns saved on the computer (see page 256)
k Press this key to position the embroidery unit for storage.
Memo
• See page 191 for more information on each category’s selection screen.
Note
• You can also sew Utility Stitches or Character/Decorative Stitches with the embroidery unit attached by
pressing and (a confirmation message for moving the carriage will appear). Attach the
appropriate presser foot before sewing.
a
c
d
f
i
h
b
e
j
g
k
SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT
266
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/
Brother “Exclusives”/Greek
Alphabet Patterns/Floral
Alphabet Patterns/Utility
Embroidery Patterns/Frame
Patterns
a
Select the category of the pattern.
b
Press the key of the pattern you want to
edit.
* See pages 193 and 196 for more information on
selecting patterns.
→ The pattern is displayed in the top part of the screen.
c
Press .
→ The pattern selected for editing is outlined in red on
the embroidery edit display.
d
Proceed to “EDITING PATTERNS” on
page 268 to edit the pattern.
Selecting Alphabet Character
Patterns
When you select character patterns from the
embroidery edit screen, you can edit the
appearance of the pattern at the same time.
a
Press .
b
Select the font, then enter the characters.
(Example: A B C D)
* See page 194 for more information about selecting
characters.
SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT
Embroidery Edit
267
6
c
Press to change the layout of the
pattern.
* If the characters are too small to see, press to
view a display of all entered characters.
d
Select the layout. (Example: )
When selecting an arc, use and to
change the degree of the arc.
* Press to make the arc flatter.
* Press to make the arc rounder.
e
Press to return to the original screen.
f
After you finish your selections, press
.
→ The embroidery edit screen will appear.
g
Proceed to “EDITING PATTERNS” on
page 268 to edit the pattern.
Memo
• When selecting , and
change to and . You can
increase or decrease the incline.
EDITING PATTERNS
268
EDITING PATTERNS
a Shows the size of the entire combined pattern.
b Shows the size of the pattern currently selected.
c Shows the distance from the center of the frame.
d Shows the color sequence and times of each step of the pattern currently selected.
e Shows the degree of rotation for the pattern.
Memo
• If a key display is light gray, you cannot use that function with the selected pattern.
a
c
b
d
e
a
e
d
b
c
EDITING PATTERNS
Embroidery Edit
269
6
■ Key Functions
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
a Thread palette key Press this key to change the colors of the displayed pattern. 277
b Rotate key Press this key to rotate the pattern. You can rotate a pattern one degree, ten
degrees or ninety degrees at a time.
242
c Size key Press this key to change the size of the pattern. Patterns can be enlarged or
reduced.
241
d Horizontal mirror
image key
Press this key to make a horizontal mirror image of the selected pattern. 243
e Density key Press this key to change the density of frame patterns or character patterns. 244
f Multi color key Press this key to change the color of individual characters in a pattern. 276
g Add key Press this key to add another pattern to the editing pattern. 294
h Delete key Press this key to delete the selected pattern (the pattern outlined by the red
box).
272
i Pattern select key When a combined pattern is selected, use these keys to select a part of the
pattern to edit.
297
j Sewing key Press this key to call up the sewing screen. 294
k Array key Press this key to change the configuration of a character pattern. 273
l Character spacing key Press this key to change the spacing of character patterns. 273
m Duplicate key Press this key to duplicate a pattern. 293
n Border key Press this key to make and edit a repeating pattern. 285
o Arrow keys
( Center key)
Press these keys to move the pattern in the direction indicated by the arrow on
the key. (Press to return the pattern to its original position.)
240
p Magnify key Press this key to magnify the pattern by 200% in the screen. 272
a
b
c
d
f
o
e
g
h
k
n
m
l
j
i
p
EDITING PATTERNS
270
Moving the Pattern
For details on moving the pattern, refer to “Moving
the Pattern” on page 240.
Rotating the Pattern
For details on rotating the pattern, refer to
“Rotating the Pattern” on page 242.
Changing the Size of the Pattern
For details on changing the size of the pattern,
refer to “Changing the Size of the Pattern” on
page 241.
Changing the Pattern Size While
Maintaining the Desired Thread
Density (Stitch Recalculator)
In the embroidery edit screen, the size of the
pattern can be changed while the desired thread
density is maintained.
With this function, the pattern will be enlarged or
reduced at a larger ratio than with normal pattern
resizing.
a
Press .
b
Select the pattern to be resized, and then
press .
c
Press .
d
Press to enter Stitch Recalculator
mode ( ).
Note
• Be sure to sew trial embroidery using same
fabric and threads as project in order to
check the sewing results.
Note
• This function cannot be used with alphabet
character patterns, frame patterns or border
patterns. However, a border pattern can be
edited after this function has been used.
• Patterns with a large number of stitches
(about 100,001 or more) cannot be resized
while maintaining a desired thread density.
The maximum limit for the number of
stitches differs depending on the data size of
pattern.
• If this function is used, thread density is
maintained while the pattern is enlarged/
reduced. However, the needle drop point
pattern is not entirely maintained. Use the
normal resizing mode depending
on the results of trial embroidering.
Memo
• Stitch Recalculator cannot be used if the key
appears as .
EDITING PATTERNS
Embroidery Edit
271
6
e
When the following message appears, press
.
→ The pattern will be returned to its original size,
angle, and position as it was before it was edited.
f
Select how to change the pattern size.
* Press to enlarge the pattern proportionately.
* Press to shrink the pattern proportionately.
* Press to stretch the pattern horizontally.
* Press to compact the pattern horizontally.
* Press to stretch the pattern vertically.
* Press to compact the pattern vertically.
* Press to return the pattern to its original
appearance.
g
Press .
h
Press .
Memo
• With the density scale bar, the thread den-
sity can be changed.
A setting between 80% and 120% in 5%
increments can be specified.
* Press to make the pattern less dense.
* Press to make the pattern more dense.
Note
• Depending on the pattern, embroidering
may not be possible at the appropriate
thread density. Before sewing on your
project, be sure to sew trial embroidery on a
piece of scrap fabric that is the same as the
fabric used in the project using the same
needle and embroidery thread.
• If the pattern is enlarged and there is space
between stitches, a better effect can be
achieved by increasing the thread density.
• If the pattern is reduced and the stitching is
too thick, a better effect can be achieved by
reducing the thread density.
CAUTION
• Depending on the pattern, the stitching may
become entangled or the needle may break
when the pattern is reduced. If this occurs,
enlarge the pattern slightly.
EDITING PATTERNS
272
Deleting the Pattern
Press to delete the pattern from the screen.
Displaying Patterns in the Screen
Magnified by 200%
a
Press .
→ changes to , and the pattern is
magnified by 200%.
b
Check the displayed pattern.
→ Use to scroll through the
display in any direction.
c
To display the pattern back to the normal
size (100%), press .
EDITING PATTERNS
Embroidery Edit
273
6
Changing the Configuration of
Alphabet Character Patterns
a
Press .
b
Press the key of the layout you want to
embroider.
* See page 267 for more information about layout
types.
→ The display will show the selected layout.
c
Press .
Changing Alphabet Character
Spacing
a
Press .
EDITING PATTERNS
274
b
Use to change the spacing.
* Press to increase the character spacing.
* Press to decrease the character spacing.
* Press to return the pattern to its original
appearance.
c
Press to return to the original screen.
Reducing Character Spacing
The spacing between characters can be reduced to
50% of the narrowest character in the group.
Note
• It is not recommended to edit data and
transfer to other or older version machines.
Same features do not apply in other
machines, so problems may occur.
• Character spacing can be reduced only
when characters are arranged normally on a
straight line.
EDITING PATTERNS
Embroidery Edit
275
6
Separating Combined Character
Patterns
Combined character patterns can be separated to
adjust the character spacing or to separately edit
the patterns after all characters have been entered.
a
Press .
b
Press .
→ The key appears as .
c
Use to select where the pattern is
to be separated, and then press to
separate it. For this example, the pattern
will be separated between “T” and “a”.
Note
• A separated character pattern cannot be
combined again.
EDITING PATTERNS
276
d
Use to select a pattern, and
then use to adjust the character
spacing.
e
Press .
Changing the Color of Each
Alphabet Character in a Pattern
a
Press so you can assign a thread color
to each character.
b
Change the thread to sew each character in
a different color.
* Press to change the colors in the sewing order.
a Color for each character
a
EDITING PATTERNS
Embroidery Edit
277
6
Embroidering Linked Characters
You can embroider linked characters exampled
below, in a single row when the pattern extends
beyond the embroidery frame.
For details on embroidering linked characters,
refer to “Embroidering Linked Characters” on
page 245.
Example: Linking “DEF” to the characters
“ABC”
Changing the Thread Color
You can change the thread color by moving the
color to be changed to the top of the sewing order
and selecting a new color from the thread colors in
the machine.
a
In the pattern editing screen, press .
→ The thread color palette screen displays.
b
Press or to put the color you want
to change at the top of the sewing order.
a 64 Embroidery threads table
c
Press to choose a new
color from the color palette.
* To return to the original color, press . If
multiple colors have been changed, this command
will return all colors to their original colors.
* You can select colors from the color palette by
directly touching the color selection with the touch
pen.
a Color palette
→ The selected color appears at the top of the sewing
order.
a
a
EDITING PATTERNS
278
d
Press .
→ The display shows the changed colors.
Creating a Custom Thread Table
You can create a custom thread table containing
the thread colors that you most often use. You can
select thread colors from the machine’s extensive
list of thread colors from nine different thread
brands. You can select any color and move the
color to your custom thread table.
a
In the pattern editing screen, press and
then press .
b
Use to choose where to
add a color on the custom thread table.
* You can choose colors from the custom thread from
the custom thread table by directly touching the
screen with the touch pen.
* You can scroll through 100 colors at a time using
and on the custom thread table.
a Custom thread table
b Press to recall the custom thread table
data (See page 281)
Memo
• To select a color from the Custom Thread
Table, “Choosing a Color from the Custom
Thread Table” on page 282.
Note
• Some machines may already have an
additional 300 Robison-Anton thread colors
contained in the custom thread table. 300
Robison-Anton thread colors table data can
be downloaded from our website “ http://
solutions.brother.com ”.
a
b
EDITING PATTERNS
Embroidery Edit
279
6
c
Use to select one of the thread
brands in the machine.
d
Use
to enter a color’s 4-digit number.
* If you make a mistake, press to erase the
entered number, and then enter the correct number.
a Thread brand
e
Press .
a Thread brand
b Entered thread color number
→ The selected thread color is set in the custom thread
table.
f
Repeat the previous steps until all desired
thread colors are specified.
* To delete a specified color from the palette, press
.
* To delete all the specified color from the palette,
press .
a
Note
• If is not pressed, the thread color
number will not be changed.
Note
• You can save the created custom thread
table data. Refer to “Saving the Custom
Thread Table to USB media” on page 280
for the detailed procedure.
b
a
EDITING PATTERNS
280
g
Press to return to the original screen.
■ Adding a Color to the Custom
Thread Table from the List
a
Repeat the previous steps a through c on
page 278.
b
Press to display the thread list.
c
Use to select a thread color.
a Thread list
b Thread brand
d
Press .
e
Repeat the previous steps until all desired
thread colors are specified.
* To delete a specified color from the palette, press
.
* To delete all the specified color from the palette,
press .
f
Press to return to the original screen.
■ Saving the Custom Thread Table to
USB media
You can save a custom thread table data file to USB
media.
a
Press and then press .
b
Set your desired colors in the custom thread
table according to the procedure in
“Creating a Custom Thread Table” on
page 278.
b
a
Note
• Custom thread table data can only be saved
to USB media. You cannot save the data in
the machine’s memory or in the computer.
• Custom thread table data is saved as “.pcp”
data file.
EDITING PATTERNS
Embroidery Edit
281
6
c
Insert the USB media into the primary (top)
USB port on the machine.
a Primary (top) USB port for media
b USB media
d
Press .
→ The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the data is
saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.
■ Recalling the Custom Thread Table
data from USB media
You can recall a custom thread table data from USB
media.
a
Insert the USB media containing the custom
thread table data into the primary (top)
USB port.
a Primary (top) USB port for media
b USB media
b
Press and then press .
Note
• Two USB media cannot be used with this
machine at the same time. If two USB media
are inserted, only the USB media inserted
first is detected.
Note
• Do not insert or remove USB media while
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
some or all of the data you are saving.
Note
• Do not store two or more “.pcp” data file in
USB media. You can only recall one custom
thread table data at a time.
EDITING PATTERNS
282
c
Press .
→ The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the data is
loaded to the machine, the display returns to the
original screen automatically.
d
The recalled custom thread table is
displayed on the screen.
Choosing a Color from the
Custom Thread Table
You can select a color from the up to 300 thread
colors you have set in the custom thread table.
a
Press .
→ The thread color palette screen displays.
b
Press or to put the color you want
to change at the top of the sewing order.
Note
• Do not insert or remove USB media while
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
some or all of the data you are saving.
EDITING PATTERNS
Embroidery Edit
283
6
c
Press .
a Custom thread change key
→ The custom thread table will appear.
d
Press to choose a new
color from the custom thread table.
* Use and to scroll through the custom
thread table.
* Press to return to the original color.
* You can choose colors from the custom thread table
by directly touching the screen with the touch pen.
a Custom thread table
→ The display shows the changed colors.
e
Press .
Find New Color Schemes With
the Color Shuffling Function
With the color shuffling function, the machine
suggests new color schemes for the embroidery
pattern that you have selected. After you select the
desired effect from the four available
(“RANDOM”, “VIVID”, “GRADIENT” and
“SOFT”), sample color schemes for the selected
effect are displayed.
a
Press .
→ The thread color palette screen appears.
b
Press .
* You can select the color shuffling function either
from thread table (64 colors) or custom thread table
(300 colors). The thread table (64 colors) is the
preset color table, and the custom thread table (300
colors) is the color table that you can set as you like.
By setting the embroidery thread colors of the brand
you have, you can create your embroidery pattern
with your own thread colors.
a Thread table (64 colors)
b Custom thread table (300 colors)
a
a
Note
• This function may not be available
depending on the pattern you select (ex. a
bordered embroidery pattern, a pattern
which can not be flipped).
If the color shuffling key is grayed out, select
another pattern.
• If you have not set any color in the custom
thread table, the color shuffling key will be
grayed out. In that case, use the thread
table (64 colors) instead or set some colors
in the custom thread table. Refer to
“Creating a Custom Thread Table” on the
operation manual of the machine for the
detail.
a
b
EDITING PATTERNS
284
c
Select the number of colors you want to use
and then select the desired effect.
a Number of colors to be used in the pattern
b Effects for schemes
d
Press the desired color scheme from
samples.
* Press to display the new schemes.
a Press to review the previous schemes.
Note
• Selection for the desired number of colors
must stay within the range for the number of
thread changes for the pattern you selected.
• If an error message appears in this step,
refer to page 355.
a
b
Note
• Maximum 10 pages of schemes can be
reviewed. After 10 pages of schemes, the
oldest page is deleted every time you press
.
a
EDITING PATTERNS
Embroidery Edit
285
6
e
Press to select the displayed color
scheme.
* Press to return to the previous screen.
* You can continue selecting color schemes from the
selected page prior to pressing .
* Press or to display the other color schemes.
→ The embroidery edit screen will appear.
Designing Repeated Patterns
■ Sewing Repeated Patterns
Using the border function, you can create stitches
using repeated patterns. You can also adjust the
spacing of the patterns within a repeated pattern
stitch.
a
Select a pattern, and then press .
b
Press .
EDITING PATTERNS
286
c
Select the direction in which the pattern
will be repeated.
a Vertical direction
b Horizontal direction
c Repeating and deleting vertical keys
d Repeating and deleting horizontal keys
e Spacing keys
→ The pattern direction indicator will change
depending on the direction selected.
d
Use to repeat the pattern on top and
to repeat the pattern at the bottom.
* To delete the top pattern, press .
* To delete the bottom pattern, press .
e
Adjust the spacing of the repeated pattern.
* To widen spacing, press .
* To tighten spacing, press .
a Press to change a repeated pattern back to
one single pattern.
f
Complete repeated patterns by repeating
steps
c through e.
a
c
e
b
d
e
Memo
• You can only adjust the spacing of patterns
included in the red frame.
a
EDITING PATTERNS
Embroidery Edit
287
6
g
Press to finish repeating.
■ Repeating One Element of a
Repeated Pattern
By using the Cut function, you can select one
element of a repeated pattern and repeat only that
single element. This function allows you to design
complex repeated patterns.
a
Choose the direction in which the repeated
pattern will be cut.
* Press to cut horizontally.
* Press to cut vertically.
→ The pattern direction indicator will change
depending on the direction selected.
Memo
• When there are two or more patterns, all
patterns will be grouped together as one
pattern in the red frame.
• When changing the direction in which the
pattern will be repeated, all of the patterns in
the red frame will automatically be grouped
as one repeating unit. Press to change
a repeated pattern back to one single pat-
tern. See the following section on how to
repeat one element of a repeated pattern.
EDITING PATTERNS
288
b
Use and to select the cut line.
→ The cut line will move.
c
Press .
→ The repeated pattern will be divided into separate
elements.
d
Press .
e
Use and to select the element to
repeat.
EDITING PATTERNS
Embroidery Edit
289
6
f
Repeat the selected element.
g
Press to finish repeating.
■ Color Sorting Repeated Patterns
Press to automatically change the sewing
order of colors in combined border embroidery
patterns so that the same color can be continuously
sewn. This allows you to continue sewing without
repeatedly changing the upper thread or changing
the sewing order manually.
Note
• Once you have cut a repeated pattern into
separate elements, you cannot return to the
original repeated pattern.
• Each element can be edited separately in
the edit screen. See “Selecting combined
embroidery patterns” on page 297.
Memo
• In combined stitch patterns that contain two
or more border patterns or other patterns
combined with border patterns, the sewing
order of only the border patterns is changed.
• When a group of two or more patterns using
border patterns is repeated, the sewing
order is changed so that the same color can
be sewn continuously in each pattern.
EDITING PATTERNS
290
■ Assigning Thread Marks
By sewing thread marks, you can easily align
patterns when sewing a series. When sewing is
finished on a pattern, a thread mark in the shape of
an arrow will be sewn using the final thread. When
sewing a series of patterns, use the point of this
arrow for positioning the following designs to be
sewn.
a
Press .
b
Press .
c
Press to select the thread mark to be
sewn.
d
Press .
Memo
• When repeatedly sewing individual patterns,
thread marks can be sewn around the
perimeter of the pattern only.
Memo
• When there are two or more elements, use
and or and to select a
pattern that you want to assign a thread
mark(s) to.
EDITING PATTERNS
Embroidery Edit
291
6
Embroidering the Pattern
Repeatedly
After creating the repeated pattern, rehoop the
embroidery frame and keep sewing for the next
pattern.
a
Create the repeated pattern with the thread
mark at the center of the end of the pattern.
* Refer to “Assigning Thread Marks” on page 290.
b
Press , then .
c
Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering.
→ When embroidering is finished, the thread mark is
sewn with the last thread color.
d
Remove the embroidery frame.
e
Rehoop the fabric in the embroidery frame.
Memo
• The optional border frame allows you to
easily rehoop the fabric without removing
the embroidery frame from the machine.
Note
• Adjust the position of the fabric so that the
embroidering area for the next pattern is
within the embroidering area of the
embroidery sheet.
a Pattern embroidered first
b Position of pattern to be embroidered next
c Embroidering area of embroidery sheet
EDITING PATTERNS
292
f
Attach the embroidery frame to the
machine, and then touch .
g
Touch to set the starting point to the
left side of the pattern.
h
Touch .
i
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
lower the presser foot.
j
Press .
k
Press .
l
Press the positioning keys to move the
embroidery frame until the thread mark on
the fabric is aligned on the starting point in
the camera view window.
a Grid lines
b Thread mark on the fabric
c Positioning keys
* Press to check the embroidering position.
a
c
b
EDITING PATTERNS
Embroidery Edit
293
6
m
If the pattern position cannot be aligned
using the positioning keys, rehoop the
fabric, and then try again to align the
position with the positioning keys.
n
Press to return to the previous
screen.
o
Remove the thread mark.
p
Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering.
Duplicating a Pattern
a
Press .
→ The duplicate is positioned over the original pattern.
a Duplicated pattern
Memo
• Press to enlarge the camera view. By
enlarging the camera view, you can make a
close adjustment for the needle drop
position moving the embroidery frame little
by little.
Note
• When embroidering the repeated pattern,
you cannot rotate the pattern in the camera
view window. If the pattern is rotated in the
camera view window, you cannot sew the
pattern properly aligned even if the thread
mark and the starting point are aligned in the
camera view window.
Note
• If multiple patterns are displayed in the
screen, only the pattern selected using
and is duplicated.
• Move and edit each duplicated pattern
individually.
a
EDITING PATTERNS
294
After Editing
a
Press .
* To combine the pattern with other patterns, select
(see page 295).
* See page 218 for more information about sewing
patterns.
Memo
• If you want to return to the edit screen after
pressing , press .
COMBINING PATTERNS
Embroidery Edit
295
6
COMBINING PATTERNS
Editing Combined Patterns
Example: Combining alphabet characters
with an embroidery pattern and
editing
a
Press to select an embroidery
pattern.
b
Use to view 2/7, then select .
c
Press .
COMBINING PATTERNS
296
d
Press .
e
Press to enter the alphabet
characters.
* Press to return to the previous screen.
f
Select and enter “Spring”.
* After selecting , press to change the
character case, then enter the remaining characters.
→ The characters you enter will be displayed in the
center of the display.
g
Press .
h
Use to move the characters.
* With a USB mouse, your finger or the touch pen,
drag the characters to move them.
COMBINING PATTERNS
Embroidery Edit
297
6
i
Press to change the layout of the
characters. Press .
* See page 273 for more information about changing
the layout.
j
Press to change the color of the
characters.
* See page 277 for more information about changing
the color.
k
When all editing is finished, press .
■ Selecting combined embroidery pat-
terns
If multiple patterns have been combined, use
to select the pattern to be edited. If a
USB mouse is connected, the pattern can be
selected by clicking it. Move the mouse to position
the pointer over the desired pattern, and then click
the left mouse button. In addition, patterns can be
selected by directly touching the screen with your
finger or touch pen.
Memo
• Use to select patterns that are
overlapping and cannot be selected by click-
ing them or by touching the screen.
COMBINING PATTERNS
298
Sewing Combined Patterns
Combined patterns will be embroidered in the
order they were entered. In this example, the
embroidery order will be as follows:
→
a
Embroider by following the
color order on the right side of the display.
→ After the flowers are embroidered, the [+] cursor
will move to the “Spring” part of the pattern.
b
Embroider .
→ When “Spring” is embroidered, the display returns
to the sewing screen.
Note
• Follow the directions in “Sewing Embroidery
Patterns” on page 219.
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
Embroidery Edit
299
6
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
Uninterrupted Embroidering
(Using a Single Color)
A selected pattern can be stitched out in one color
instead of multicolor. The machine will hesitate
but not stop between color steps, and then
continue till the pattern is completed. Press
for the multicolor steps to become shaded and the
selected pattern will embroider in a single color,
instead of changing the thread while
embroidering. Press again to return to the
pattern’s original settings.
Basting Embroidery
Before embroidering, basting stitches can be sewn
along the outline of the pattern. This is useful for
embroidering fabric that cannot have stabilizer
material affixed with an iron or adhesive. By
stitching stabilizer material to the fabric, shrinkage
of the stitching or misaligned pattern can be
minimized.
a
Press , and then display 7/8 of the
settings screen.
b
Use and to specify the distance
from the pattern to the basting stitching.
Note
• It is recommended to finish combining and
editing the pattern before selecting the bast-
ing setting. If the pattern is edited after
selecting the basting setting, the basting and
pattern may become misaligned, and the
basting under the pattern may be difficult to
remove after embroidering is complete.
Memo
• The higher the setting, the farther the bast-
ing is from the pattern.
• The setting remains selected even if the
machine is turned off.
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
300
c
Press to return to the previous
screen.
d
Press .
e
Press to select the basting setting.
→ Basting is added to the beginning of the sewing
order.
f
Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering.
g
When embroidering is finished, remove the
basting stitching.
Creating an Appliqué Piece
Appliqué pieces can be created from the built-in
patterns and patterns on embroidery cards. This is
convenient for fabrics that cannot be embroidered
or when you wish to attach an appliqué to a
garment.
■ Creating an Appliqué Piece
The following pattern will be used to create an
appliqué piece.
Note
• When is pressed, the pattern is moved
to the center. After selecting the basting
setting, move the pattern to the desired
position.
Memo
• To cancel the setting, press .
• If no pattern is selected, the key appears
gray and cannot be selected.
Note
• Felt or denim fabrics are recommended to
make the appliqué piece. Depending on the
pattern and fabric used, lighter weight
fabrics may cause the stitching to appear
smaller.
• For best results, be sure to use stabilizer
material for embroidering.
• Select a frame that matches the pattern
size. Frame options are displayed on the
LCD screen.
• When making appliqué pieces, do not use
the border embroidery frame. Depending on
the pattern density and fabric used,
shrinkage of the stitching may occur.
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
Embroidery Edit
301
6
a
Select the pattern, and edit it if necessary.
b
Press , and then display 7/8 of the
settings screen.
c
Use and to specify the distance
between the pattern and the appliqué
outline.
d
Press to return to the previous
screen.
e
Press .
Note
• Finish combining and editing the pattern
before selecting the appliqué setting. If the
pattern is edited after selecting the appliqué
setting, the appliqué stitching and pattern
may become misaligned.
• Since an outline is added, the pattern for an
appliqué piece (when the appliqué setting is
selected) will be larger than the original pat-
tern. First, adjust the size and position of the
pattern as shown below.
a Embroidering area
b Approx. 1 cm
c Pattern size
Memo
• Three settings are available: 1 (narrow), 2
(normal) and 3 (wide).
• The setting remains selected even if the
machine is turned off.
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
302
f
Press to select the appliqué setting.
→ The steps for creating the appliqué piece are added
to the sewing order.
g
Fuse or stick a piece of stabilizer to the
back of the felt or denim fabric to be used
as the appliqué piece.
Note
• When is pressed, the pattern is moved
to the center. After selecting the appliqué
setting, move the pattern to the desired
position.
Memo
• To cancel the setting, press .
• If no pattern is selected, the key appears
gray and cannot be selected.
Memo
• Three steps are added to the sewing order:
appliqué cutting line, position of pattern
placement on the garment, and appliqué
stitching.
a Cutting line for appliqué
b Position of pattern placement on garment
c Appliqué stitching
Note
• An appliqué piece cannot be created if the
pattern is too large or too complicated or a
combined pattern is separated. Even if the
selected pattern fits within the embroidering
area, the entire appliqué pattern may
exceed the embroidering area when the out-
line is added. If an error message appears,
select a different pattern or edit it.
Note
• For best results, be sure to use stabilizer
material for embroidering.
a
b
c
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
Embroidery Edit
303
6
h
Hoop the appliqué fabric in the embroidery
frame, attach the embroidery frame to the
machine, and then start embroidering.
i
After the pattern is embroidered, thread the
machine with the thread for the cutting
line, and then sew the cutting line
(APPLIQUE MATERIAL).
a Cutting line for appliqué
j
Remove the appliqué material from the
embroidery frame, and then carefully cut
along the stitching. After cutting, carefully
remove all of the cutting line thread.
k
Use two layers of adhesive water-soluble
stabilizer material with their sticky sides
together, and then hoop them in the
embroidery frame.
l
Thread the machine with the thread for the
outline from step
n, and then sew the
placement line for the appliqué position
(APPLIQUE POSITION).
a Pattern placement line
m
Lightly apply glue or spray adhesive, and
paste the appliqué piece so that it aligns
with the placement line.
Memo
• We recommend using thread for the cutting
line that is closest to the color of the fabric.
Note
• Depending on the pattern density and fabric
used, there may be shrinking of the pattern
or the appliqué may be misaligned with the
placement line. We recommend cutting
slightly outside of the cutting line.
• When using patterns that are vertically and
horizontally symmetrical, use a chalk pencil
to indicate the pattern orientation before cut-
ting it out.
• Carefully cut out the pattern on the outline
you just sewed. Do not cut inside the cutting
line, otherwise the appliqué fabric will not be
caught by the appliqué stitch.
Note
• If water-soluble stabilizer is used, it is not
necessary to remove the stabilizer material
after sewing the appliqué outline. To reduce
shrinkage of the pattern, we recommend
using water-soluble stabilizer.
• Put together two layers of water-soluble sta-
bilizer, otherwise the stabilizer material may
tear during embroidering.
Note
• Before pasting the appliqué piece down,
make sure the appliqué piece is positioned
correctly within the placement line.
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
304
n
With the machine threaded using the thread
for the outline from step
l, sew the outline
(APPLIQUE).
a Outline of appliqué piece
o
After embroidering is finished, remove the
stabilizer material from the embroidery
frame.
p
Use scissors to cut the excess water-soluble
stabilizer from outside the appliqué outline.
q
Soak the appliqué piece in water to dissolve
the water-soluble stabilizer.
r
Dry the appliqué piece, and then iron it if
necessary.
■ Using a Frame Pattern for the Out-
line
Using a frame pattern, the desired shape can be
added as the outline of the appliqué.
a
Perform the operations described in steps
a through d of “Creating an Appliqué
Piece” on page 300.
b
Select the desired frame shape and pattern,
and add it to the appliqué pattern.
Memo
• The outline is sewn using satin stitching.
• Some glue may get onto the presser foot,
needle, and needle plate at this time. Finish
embroidering the appliqué pattern, and then
clean off the glue.
Note
• Do not apply a strong force when ironing,
otherwise the stitching may be damaged.
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
Embroidery Edit
305
6
c
Edit the frame pattern to fit the size of the
appliqué pattern.
d
Press and then press .
e
Press to select the appliqué piece
setting.
f
Press .
g
Use to select the frame pattern,
and then press and .
→ The frame pattern is deleted.
h
Press .
i
Continue with step g of “Creating an
Appliqué Piece” on page 300 to complete
the appliqué piece.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
306
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
In the same way as embroidery patterns in Chapter 5, you can save and retrieve edited embroidery
patterns to and from the machine’s memory, a personal computer, or USB media. Refer to the relevant
sections in Chapter 5 on saving and retrieving embroidery patterns and follow the same procedures in
order to save and retrieve edited embroidery patterns.
See page 249 for more information about the MEMORY FUNCTION.
PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING EMBROIDERY
PATTERNS AND PRINTED DESIGNS)
Completed embroidery patterns combined with printed designs are built into this machine.
Beautiful three-dimensional embroidered designs can be created by ironing a background onto fabric or
printing it onto printable fabric, then sewing complementary embroidery on top of the background.
For details on Print and Stitch function, refer to “PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING EMBROIDERY
PATTERNS AND PRINTED DESIGNS)” on page 223.
Using iron-on paper
Using printable fabric
Chapter 7
How to Create Bobbin Work
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK ...................................................................308
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK ....................................................309
Required Materials ................................................................................................309
■ Bobbin case and bobbin cover ......................................................................................309
■ Lower thread.................................................................................................................309
■ Upper thread.................................................................................................................309
■ Needle...........................................................................................................................309
■ Presser foot ...................................................................................................................309
■ Fabric ............................................................................................................................309
Upper Threading ...................................................................................................310
Preparing the Bobbin Thread ................................................................................310
■ When tension is applied to the bobbin thread...............................................................312
■ When tension is not applied to the bobbin thread.........................................................312
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING).............................................314
Positioning the Fabric and Sewing.........................................................................314
■ Finishing the thread ends...............................................................................................316
Bobbin Work Free Motion Sewing ........................................................................317
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY) ....................................318
Selecting the Pattern .............................................................................................318
Start Embroidering ................................................................................................320
ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION................................................322
■ Adjusting the upper thread tension ...............................................................................322
■ Adjusting the tension of the bobbin thread ...................................................................322
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................323
■ The thread was accidentally cut automatically and the bobbin
thread is caught inside the machine ..............................................................................323
■ The pattern is misaligned...............................................................................................323
■ The bobbin thread catches on the tension spring of the bobbin case ............................323
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK
308
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK
Beautiful embroidery work, with a three-dimensional appearance, can be created by winding the bobbin
with heavy weight thread or ribbon, which is too thick to be threaded through the machine’s needle. The
decorative thread or ribbon will stitch out on the underneath side of fabric while sewing with the fabric
wrong side facing up.
Bobbin work embroidery is sewn using the bobbin work patterns included with this product in addition to
some of the utility stitches.
1. Utility stitches 2. Decorative stitches 3. Free motion sewing
How to Create Bobbin Work
7
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
309
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
Required Materials
■ Bobbin case and bobbin cover
a Bobbin case (gray)
There is a notch at the location indicated by the
letter “A”.
a Bobbin cover
There are two small v-shaped tabs on the back of
the bobbin cover as indicated by the letter “B”.
The tabs help hold the bobbin in place so it does
not lift up while thick thread is being pulled through.
■ Lower thread
We recommend the following types of threads for
bobbin work.
* When wide ribbon or heavy weight threads are being used, we
recommend test sewing with and without bobbin case tension
being applied to see which gives the best stitching results.
If wide ribbon such as 3.5mm (approx. 1/8 inch) is to be used,
we recommend that bobbin case tension not be applied. Refer
to page 312 for more detailed instructions.
■ Upper thread
Sewing machine embroidery thread (polyester
thread) or monofilament (transparent nylon) thread.
If you do not wish for the upper thread to be visible,
we recommend using transparent nylon
monofilament thread or polyester light weight
thread (50wt. or above) that is the same color as the
lower thread.
■ Needle
Use a needle appropriate for the upper thread and
fabric being used. Refer to “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” on page 69 and “Embroidery Step by
Step” on page 186.
■ Presser foot
Utility stitches or decorative stitches:
Monogramming foot “N”
Free motion sewing: Free motion quilting foot “C”,
Free motion open toe quilting foot “O” or Free
motion echo quilting foot “E”
Embroidery: Embroidery foot “W2” or Embroidery
foot “W” (optional)
■ Fabric
Be sure to sew trial stitches on a piece of scrap
fabric, which includes the same threads and fabric
as what is being used in your project.
<Sewing/Embroidery>
No.5 or finer hand embroidery
thread or decorative thread
Flexible woven ribbon
(When embroidering: approx. 2mm
(approx. 5/64 inch) recommended)
<Sewing only>
Fine embroidery ribbon (silk or
silk-like material) (3.5 mm (approx.
1/8 inch) or less, recommended)
Note
• Do not use thread heavier than No.5 hand
embroidery thread.
• Some threads may not be appropriate for
bobbin work. Be sure to sew trial stitches
before sewing on your project.
Note
• The sewing results may be affected by the
type of fabric used. Before sewing your
project, be sure to sew trial stitches on a
piece of scrap fabric that is the same as the
fabric used in the project.
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
310
Upper Threading
a
Install a needle appropriate for the upper
thread and fabric to be used.
For details on installing the needle, refer to
“CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page 67.
b
Attach the presser foot.
→ “CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT” on page 65
→ “Using Free motion Quilting Foot “C”” on page 116
→ “Using free motion Open Toe Quilting Foot “O”” on
page 118
→ “Echo Quilting Using the Free Motion Echo Quilting
Foot “E”” on page 119
→ “Attaching Embroidery Foot “W2”” on page 186
c
Thread the machine with the upper thread.
For details on threading the machine, refer to
“Upper Threading” on page 57.
Preparing the Bobbin Thread
In order to create bobbin work, the bobbin case
must be replaced with the one for bobbin work.
Before creating bobbin work, clean the bobbin case
and the race.
a
Raise the needle and presser foot, and then
turn off the machine.
b
Remove the flat bed attachment or
embroidery unit.
c
Grasp both sides of the needle plate cover,
and then slide it toward you to remove it.
a Needle plate cover
d
Remove the bobbin case.
a Bobbin case
e
Use the cleaning brush included with the
machine or a vacuum cleaner to remove
any lint and dust from the race and its
surrounding area.
a Cleaning brush
b Race
f
Wipe the bobbin case (gray) with a soft lint
free cloth to clean it.
g
Insert the bobbin case so that the S mark
on the bobbin case aligns with the z mark
on the machine.
* Align the S and z marks.
a
b
b
a
How to Create Bobbin Work
7
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
311
a S mark
b z mark
c Bobbin case
h
Wind a decorative thread around the
bobbin by hand. After winding the bobbin
so it is filled as shown below (about 80%),
cut the thread.
For precautions on winding the bobbin for
embroidering, refer to step
b of “Selecting the
Pattern” on page 318.
i
Using scissors carefully trim the thread tail
as close to the bobbin as possible.
a Beginning of wound thread
j
Install the bobbin wound with thread.
Whether or not tension should be applied to the
bobbin thread depends on the type of thread being
used.
Note
• The bobbin case (gray) cannot be used for
sewing in any way other than bobbin work.
After sewing bobbin work, refer back to the
steps in “Preparing the Bobbin Thread” on
page 310 for removing and cleaning the
bobbin case (gray), and then reinstall the
standard bobbin case (black).
CAUTION
• Be sure to use the bobbin case (gray) when
creating bobbin work. Using any other bobbin
case may result in the thread becoming
tangled or damage to the machine.
• Make sure that the bobbin case is correctly
installed. If the bobbin case is incorrectly
installed, the thread may become tangled or
the machine may be damaged.
CAUTION
• Be sure to use the machine’s included bobbin
or one designed specifically for this machine.
Using any other bobbin may result in damage
or injuries.
* Actual size
a This model
b Other models
c 11.5 mm (approx. 7/16 inch)
Note
• Slowly and evenly wind the thread around
the bobbin.
• For best results, wind the bobbin so the
thread is snug and not twisted.
CAUTION
• If thread extends beyond the top of the bobbin
too much, the thread may become tangled or
the needle may break.
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
312
■ When tension is applied to the bob-
bin thread
Insert bobbin into bobbin case so the thread
unwinds from the left side.
Then correctly pass the thread through the tension
spring as shown below.
a Tension spring
■ When tension is not applied to the
bobbin thread
If the bobbin thread in the trial stitching is too tight
and adjusting the bobbin case tension does not help,
do not pass the thread through the tension spring.
Hold the bobbin with your left hand so the thread
unwinds from the right side and hold the end of the
thread with your right hand.
k
Pull out about 8 cm (approx. 3 inches) of
bobbin thread.
l
Lightly hold the end of the upper thread
while turning the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) until the mark on the
handwheel aligns with the center top of
machine.
CAUTION
• When winding the bobbin, make sure the
thread is not frayed. Sewing with frayed
thread may result in the thread catching on
the tension spring of the bobbin case, the
thread completely becoming tangled or
damage to the machine.
• Do not guide the bobbin thread through the
groove in the needle plate cover, otherwise
the lower threading cannot be done correctly.
How to Create Bobbin Work
7
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
313
m
Gently pull the upper thread to bring the
bobbin thread up through the needle plate.
→ A loop of the bobbin thread comes out through the
hole in the needle plate.
n
Insert tweezers through bobbin thread loop
and pull bobbin thread above the needle
plate.
o
Align the upper thread and bobbin thread,
and then pull out about 10 cm (approx.
4 inches) of the threads and pass them
under the presser foot toward the rear of
the machine.
p
Install the needle plate cover and bobbin
cover with tabs.
For details on installing the needle plate cover, refer to
“Cleaning the Race” on page 338.
a Bobbin cover
b Bobbin cover with tabs
q
Install the flat bed attachment or
embroidery unit.
→ This completes the upper and lower threading.
CAUTION
• When creating bobbin work, use the bobbin
cover with tabs, otherwise the thread may
become tangled or the needle may break.
Note
• When installing the needle plate cover, do
not allow it to pinch the thread.
Note
• When installing the flat bed attachment or
embroidery unit, do not allow it to pinch the
thread.
• When the bobbin thread is replaced with a
new one, be sure to repeat the procedure
from
a, otherwise the lower threading will
not be done correctly.
Note
• If utility stitches are to be used, refer to
“CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING)” on
page 314. If embroidery patterns are to be
used, refer to “CREATING BOBBIN WORK
(EMBROIDERY)” on page 318.
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING)
314
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING)
Positioning the Fabric and
Sewing
a
Turn on the machine.
b
Select a stitch in the Utility and Decorative
Stitches mode. For this example, press .
c
Adjust the upper thread tension.
For details on adjusting the upper thread tension,
refer to “Setting the Thread Tension” on page 79.
d
Make sure the automatic thread cutting
( ) and automatic reinforcement/
reverse stitching ( ) have been turned
off.
e
Place stabilizer on top (wrong side) of the
fabric.
f
If thread is too thick to pull through fabric
to machine surface use an awl to punch a
small hole in the fabric at the beginning of
stitching so the bobbin thread can be fed
through the opening.
g
Press .
→ The screen changes, and all keys and operation
buttons are locked.
Note
• Recommended stitches for bobbin work are
open “airy” type stitches.
• Be sure to sew trial stitches using same
fabric and threads as project in order to
check the sewing results.
• The bobbin thread may become tangled due
to the type of pattern and thread that are
being used. Since this may cause the
needle to break, immediately stop sewing if
this occurs. Turn off the machine and cut out
the tangled thread with scissors. Then, clean
the race and bobbin case as described in
“Preparing the Bobbin Thread” on page 310.
Memo
• For best results, select a longer stitch length
and a wider stitch width. Depending on the
selected stitch, it may not be possible to
change the stitch length and stitch width
settings.
• Depending on the fabric, bunched stitches
may result. We recommend selecting a
simple stitch and sewing trial stitches to
check the sewing results.
Examples of simple stitches: , ,
Memo
We recommend a setting between 6 and 8 for the
upper thread tension.
CAUTION
• Before sewing, make sure the automatic thread
cutting has been turned off. If sewing is started with
automatic thread cutting turned on, the thread may
become tangled or the machine may be damaged.
Note
• Type and weight of stabilizer will depend on
fabric and thread being used.
How to Create Bobbin Work
7
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING)
315
h
Use the presser foot lever to raise the
presser foot.
i
With the wrong side facing up, place the
fabric under the presser foot.
a Wrong side of fabric
j
Turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to feed the needle into
the fabric or punched hole. Position the
upper thread over the presser foot and
lightly hold then, lower the presser foot
lever.
a Punched hole
b Upper thread over the presser foot
k
Pulling the upper thread gently, turn the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)
until the mark on the handwheel aligns with
the center top of machine.
→ A loop of the bobbin thread comes out through the
hole in the fabric.
l
Raise the presser foot lever, and then use
tweezers to pull up the bobbin thread and
bring the end of the thread to the top of the
fabric.
m
Align the upper thread and bobbin thread,
and then pass them under the presser foot
toward the rear of the machine.
n
While gently holding threads at the rear of
the machine, turn the handwheel to feed
the needle into the fabric or punched hole
again, and then lower the presser foot lever.
o
Press at lower right of LCD screen.
→ All keys and operation buttons are unlocked, and
the previous screen is displayed.
Note
• If the bobbin thread does not come up, hold
the upper thread as shown below to pull up
the bobbin thread.
a Upper thread
Note
• Pull the thread while holding down the fabric
so it does not move out of place.
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING)
316
p
Select a low speed, gently hold the threads
behind the presser foot and start sewing.
Threads can be released after several
stitches have been made.
q
When you have reached the end of the
stitching area, stop the machine.
r
Raise the needle and presser foot.
s
Leaving about 10 cm (approx. 4 inches) of
thread at the ends, use scissors to cut the
threads.
a 10 cm (approx. 4 inches)
■ Finishing the thread ends
a
At the end of the stitching, use a hand
sewing needle to bring the bobbin thread
up to the wrong side of the fabric.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Bobbin thread
b
Working from the wrong side of the fabric,
tie the bobbin and upper threads together
by hand. Cut away excess threads with
scissors.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
c
If the desired results could not be achieved,
adjust the tension of the bobbin thread and
of the upper thread, and then try sewing the
stitching again.
For more details, refer to “ADJUSTING THE
THREAD TENSION” on page 322.
Note
• Before sewing, check that there is enough
thread in the bobbin.
Note
• Do not sew reinforcement/reverse stitches
at the end of the stitching, otherwise the
threads may become tangled or the needle
may break. In addition, it will be difficult to
pull the bobbin thread up to the wrong side
of the fabric.
Note
• Do not press the “Thread Cutter” button to
cut the threads, otherwise the machine may
be damaged.
Note
• If it is difficult to place bobbin thread through
the eye of a hand sewing needle, use a
ribbon embroidery needle to pull the thread
up to the wrong side of the fabric. Otherwise,
use an awl to pull up the bobbin thread.
Note
• To ensure threads do not come undone after
being tied place a drop of fabric glue on
knots.
How to Create Bobbin Work
7
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING)
317
Bobbin Work Free Motion
Sewing
If so desired, use a template or draw your design
on the stabilizer to allow for ease of stitching.
Remember, your stitches with your decorative
thread will be on the underneath side of your
fabric and the stabilizer will be on the top of the
wrong side of your fabric.
* For bobbin work free motion sewing use the
instructions for “CREATING BOBBIN WORK
(SEWING)” on page 314.
* For information about using the free motion quilting
foot “C”, free motion open toe quilting foot “O”, or
free motion echo quilting foot “E” refer to “Free
Motion Quilting” on page 116.
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY)
318
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY)
Selecting the Pattern
a
Attach the embroidery foot “W2” or “W”
and the embroidery unit.
b
Install a bobbin wound with an adequate
amount of thread for pattern.
c
Pull up the bobbin thread above the needle
plate.
d
Turn on the machine.
e
Press .
→ The carriage will move to the initialization position.
f
To select a bobbin work embroidery
pattern, press (Embroidery).
g
Press , then advance to page 10 or 11
(page numbers are for small thumbnail size)
of the pattern selection screen for bobbin
work patterns.
h
Select one of the bobbin work embroidery
patterns.
Embroidery patterns for bobbin work appear with
the letter “B” in the lower-left corner of the key.
a “B” mark
→ Regardless of the setting that had been selected, the
automatic thread cutting function is turned off.
→ When a bobbin work embroidery pattern is selected
the embroidery sewing speed is automatically set at
350 spm.
Note
• Prepare the machine for bobbin work as
described in “PREPARING FOR BOBBIN
WORK” on page 309.
Note
• For an estimated length of bobbin thread
required for each pattern, refer to the Quick
Reference Guide included with the machine.
Be sure to use a bobbin wound with enough
thread. If the bobbin runs out of thread while
sewing, the embroidery cannot be
completed.
• Depending on the thread thickness, it may
not be possible to wind the bobbin with the
necessary length of thread. In this case, try
winding the bobbin again, or use a lighter
weight thread.
Note
• Embroidery patterns for bobbin work cannot
be used in the embroidery edit screen
().
Note
• The beginning and end of stitching are
specified for bobbin work patterns. They
cannot be used for normal embroidering.
a
How to Create Bobbin Work
7
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY)
319
i
Press .
→ The sewing screen is displayed.
j
Press , and then adjust the tension of
the upper thread.
For details on adjusting the tension of the upper
thread, refer to “Adjusting Thread Tension” on
page 233.
CAUTION
• When sewing bobbin work, be sure to select an
embroidery pattern for bobbin work. If any other
type of pattern is selected, the machine may be
damaged.
Note
• Embroidery sewing speed defaults to 350
spm when a bobbin work embroidery pattern
is selected. The Settings screen will not
allow speed to be adjusted.
Memo
• When an embroidery pattern for bobbin work
is selected, the automatic thread cutting
function is turned off. Afterward, if a pattern
other than one for bobbin work is selected,
the automatic thread cutting function is
returned to the setting that was selected
before the embroidery pattern for bobbin
work was chosen.
Note
• Since bobbin work is sewn from the wrong
side of the fabric, the pattern shown in the
screen appears as a mirror image of the
final sewn embroidery. If necessary, flip the
image to preview it. In addition, when
sewing with the thread colors shown in the
sewing screen, select a bobbin thread that
matches what is shown in the screen.
a Image shown in screen b Sewn embroidery
(Right side of fabric)
Memo
• With embroidery patterns for bobbin work,
the size and thread density cannot be
changed. In addition, the automatic thread
cutting function cannot be turned on.
Memo
• We recommend a setting between 6 and 8
for the upper thread tension.
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY)
320
Start Embroidering
a
Hoop the fabric so the right side of the
fabric is facing down with the stabilizer
lying on the top. Use an embroidery frame
that fits the size of the pattern and then
attach the frame to the machine. These
patterns are embroidered from the wrong
side of the fabric so technically you are
working in “reverse” of normal
embroidering.
a Wrong side of fabric
b
It is necessary to move to the beginning of
stitching so press , and then press .
→ The embroidery frame moves to the beginning of
stitching.
c
Press .
d
Press .
→ The screen changes, and all keys and operation
buttons are locked.
e
Using the presser foot lever, raise the
presser foot.
f
To bring the bobbin thread above the
fabric, rotate the handwheel
counterclockwise while holding the upper
thread.
g
As shown below, pull the upper thread to
pull the bobbin thread up through the
fabric.
a Upper thread
b Bobbin thread
CAUTION
• Always use a stabilizer material for embroidery.
Otherwise, the needle may break and cause
injuries. Not using a stabilizer material may result
in a poor finish to your project.
Memo
• If the bobbin thread cannot be pulled up, use
an awl to create small hole to help pull bob-
bin thread to surface.
How to Create Bobbin Work
7
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY)
321
h
Press to unlock all keys and
buttons.
i
Lower the presser foot.
j
While holding both the upper thread and
the bobbin thread, sew a section of the
pattern.
k
Stop the machine, and then tie the upper
thread and the bobbin thread together to
secure the threads.
l
Start sewing again to finish the pattern.
m
Raise the needle and presser foot, remove
the embroidery frame, and then cut the
upper thread and the bobbin thread.
When cutting the threads, be sure to leave an
adequate length of thread so they can be
properly secured.
n
Using a hand sewing needle such as a
ribbon embroidering needle, pull the
bobbin thread to the top (wrong side) of the
fabric, and then tie the upper thread and
the bobbin thread together.
o
Remove the fabric from the embroidery
frame, and check the finished embroidery.
p
If the desired results could not be achieved,
adjust the tension of the bobbin thread and
of the upper thread, and then try sewing the
pattern again.
For more details, refer to “ADJUSTING THE THREAD
TENSION” on page 322.
Memo
• If there is a gap between the start point and
end point of the pattern, cut the threads,
remove the fabric from the machine, and
then use a ribbon embroidering needle to
hand sew stitches to connect the starting
and ending points.
a Right side of fabric b Wrong side of fabric
Memo
• Check bobbin after each bobbin work
embroidery pattern is sewn to make sure
there is adequate bobbin thread for the next
pattern.
ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION
322
ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION
After sewing trial stitches and checking the sewing results, adjust the thread tensions if necessary. After adjusting the
tensions, be sure to sew trial stitches again in order to check the sewing results.
■ Adjusting the upper thread tension
We recommend a setting between 6 and 8 for the upper
thread tension.
If utility stitches are being used, refer to “Setting the
Thread Tension” on page 79. If embroidery patterns are
being used, refer to “Adjusting Thread Tension” on
page 233.
■ Adjusting the tension of the bobbin
thread
If the desired stitching cannot be achieved after
adjusting the upper thread tension, adjust the tension of
the bobbin thread. The tension of the bobbin thread can
be adjusted by turning the slotted-head (–) screw on the
bobbin case (gray) for bobbin work.
a Do not turn the phillips screw (+).
b Adjust with a small screwdriver.
To increase the tension of the bobbin thread, turn the
slotted-head (–) screw 30° to 45° clockwise.
To decrease the tension of the bobbin thread, turn the
slotted-head (–) screw 30° to 45° counterclockwise.
Note
• Turning the screw on the bobbin case (gray)
may push up the spring plate, as shown
below.
If this occurs, gently press down the spring
plate with a screwdriver so it is lower than
the top surface of the bobbin case (gray),
and then insert the bobbin case into the
machine.
a Spring plate
CAUTION
• DO NOT adjust the position of the phillips (+)
screw on the bobbin case (gray) as this may result in
damage to the bobbin case, rendering it useless.
• If the slotted screw (-) is difficult to turn, do not use
force. Turning the screw too much or providing
force in either (rotational) direction may cause
damage to the bobbin case. Should damage occur,
the bobbin case may not maintain proper tension.
Note
• If the bobbin thread tension is tight, the
thread cannot be passed through the
tension spring when the bobbin is installed
in the bobbin case. (Refer to “When tension
is not applied to the bobbin thread” on
page 312.)
How to Create Bobbin Work
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
323
TROUBLESHOOTING
Several solutions for minor problems are described below. If the problem persists, contact your nearest authorized
Brother dealer.
■ The thread was accidentally cut
automatically and the bobbin thread
is caught inside the machine
a
Cut the thread near the fabric above the
needle plate, and then remove the fabric.
a Thread
b
Remove the bobbin, and then hold it out
toward the left side of the machine.
c
Lower the presser foot.
d
Apply slight tension on bobbin thread by
holding thread out to the left side of presser
foot. Press the “Thread Cutter” button
again.
■ The pattern is misaligned
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE THREAD TENSION” and
increase the upper thread tension. If the pattern is
still misaligned, reduce the tension of the bobbin
thread.
Example: Decorative Stitch
a Correct tension
b The upper thread tension is too loose, or the
bobbin thread tension is too tight.
■ The bobbin thread catches on the
tension spring of the bobbin case
Sew with no tension applied to the bobbin thread.
(Refer to “When tension is not applied to the bobbin
thread” on page 312.)
Note
• If an embroidery pattern was sewn, remove
the embroidery frame.
CAUTION
• Do not pull on the thread with excessive force,
otherwise the machine may be damaged.
TROUBLESHOOTING
324
Chapter 8
MY CUSTOM STITCH
DESIGNING A STITCH......................................................................326
ENTERING STITCH DATA .................................................................328
■ Key Functions................................................................................................................328
■ Moving a Point ..............................................................................................................331
■ Moving Part or All of the Design ...................................................................................331
■ Inserting New Points .....................................................................................................332
USING STORED CUSTOM STITCHES ...............................................334
Storing Custom Stitches in Your List .....................................................................334
■ If the Memory is Full .....................................................................................................334
Retrieving Stored Stitches .....................................................................................335
DESIGNING A STITCH
326
DESIGNING A STITCH
By using the MY CUSTOM STITCH function, you
can register stitches you have created yourself.
You can also sew designs combining MY
CUSTOM STITCH creations with built-in
characters (see page 170).
a
Draw the stitch design on the grid sheet
(part code SA507, GS3:X81277-151).
b
Decide the spacing of the stitch.
* By adjusting the spacing of a stitch, you can create
various patterns with one stitch.
c
Place points where the pattern intersects
with the grid, and connect all the points
with a line.
d
Determine the x and y coordinates of each
of the marked points.
Memo
• Stitches that you create with MY CUSTOM
STITCH can be a maximum of 7 mm
(approx. 9/32 inch) wide and 37 mm
(approx. 1-1/3 inches) long.
• Stitches can be designed more easily with
MY CUSTOM STITCH if you first draw the
stitch on the included grid sheet.
Memo
• Simplify the design so that it can be sewn as
a continuous line. For a more attractive
stitch, close the design by intersecting lines.
If the design is to be repeated and linked,
the start point and end point of the design
should be at the same height.
Memo
• This will determine the stitch design that will
be sewn.
DESIGNING A STITCH
327
MY CUSTOM STITCH
8
Examples of Custom Stitches
Stitch123456789101112131415
01218222321171412963136
003610131413111314131063
Stitch 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
12 41 43 40 41 38 35 32 30 32 35 41 45 47 44
00471113141310630047
Stitch 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
45 47 50 54 56 55 51 45 70
11131413106300
Stitch123456789101112131415
0 3032323233353537353230302926
0017101211812141411538
Stitch 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
24 18 13 12 13 10 12 8 12 7 12 6 10 5 10
1013141412111098663202
Stitch 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
16 19 23 22 17 22 23 19 42
1006106000
Stitch123456789101112131415
03581217202427293132302724
0581113141413121196310
Stitch 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
21 18 16 15 15 16 18 21 25 28 33 37 41 43 44
0135810121314141311850
Stitch 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
Stitch123456789101112131415
05458781111111611740
773770773773037
Stitch 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
4 7 11 16 21 20 21 24 23 24 27 27 27 32 27
11 14 11 7 7 11 7 7 14 7 7 11 7 7 11
Stitch 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
23 20 16 20 23 27 32
141173037
ENTERING STITCH DATA
328
ENTERING STITCH DATA
■ Key Functions
a This area displays the stitch being created.
b Displays the number of the present set point over the total number of points in the stitch.
c Displays the y-coordinate of over the x-coordinate of .
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
d Single/triple stitching key Press this key to select whether one or three stitches will be sewn
between two points.
330
e Point delete key Press this key to delete a selected point. 330
f Return key Press this key to exit the entering stitch data screen. —
g Test key Press this key to sew a test of the stitch. 330, 334
h MY CUSTOM STITCH
memory key
Press this key to store the stitch being created. 334
i Block move key Press this key to group points together and move them together. 331
j Insert key Press this key to insert new points on the stitch design. 332
k Set key Press this key to set a point on the stitch design. 329-331
l
Arrow keys
Use these keys to move over the display area.
329-333
m
Point-to-point key
Use these keys to move from point to point on the stitch, or to the
first or last point entered on the stitch.
331-332
n Grid direction key Press this key to change the direction of the grid sheet. 329
o Enlarger key Press this key to see an enlarged version of the stitch being created. 329
p Image key Press this key to view an image of the stitch. 330
a
m
i
h
g
b
d
f
c
e
p
l
k
j
o
n
ENTERING STITCH DATA
329
MY CUSTOM STITCH
8
a
Press and then .
b
Press .
c
Use to move to the coordinates
of the first point on the grid sheet.
* Press to change the direction of the grid
sheet.
* Press to enlarge the image of the stitch being
created.
a Currently selected point/Total number of points
b Coordinates of
d
Press to add the point indicated by .
* To insert coordinates with the touch pen, move the
tip of the pen to a desired point. Once you release
the pen from the screen a point will be entered into
the graph at those coordinates. The number of the
currently selected points along with the total
number of points will be displayed.
a
b
ENTERING STITCH DATA
330
e
Select whether one stitch or three stitches
will be sewn between the first two points.
* To sew three stitches, press the key so that it appears
as .
f
Use to move to the second point
and press .
g
Repeat the steps above for each point that
you have drawn on the grid sheet until the
stitch design is drawn on the screen as a
continuous line.
* Press to delete a selected point entered.
* Press to sew a test-run of the stitch.
* Press to return to the original screen.
* Press to view an image of the stitch.
Memo
• If you have entered points that are too close
together, the fabric may not feed properly.
Edit the stitch data to leave a larger space
between points.
• If the stitch design is to be repeated and
linked, make sure that linking stitches are
added so that the stitch designs will not
overlap.
a Linking stitches
• You can touch on the grid sheet to set the
point, or you can also use a USB mouse.
ENTERING STITCH DATA
331
MY CUSTOM STITCH
8
■ Moving a Point
a
Press or to move to the point
that you want to move.
* To move to the first point, press .
* To move to the last point, press .
b
Use to move the point.
* You can also move by using the touch pen.
■ Moving Part or All of the Design
a
Press or to move to the first
point of the section that you want to move.
* To move to the first point, press .
* To move to the last point, press .
b
Press .
→ The selected point and all points that were entered
after it are selected.
ENTERING STITCH DATA
332
c
Press or to move the section.
d
Press .
→ The section will be moved.
■ Inserting New Points
a
Press or to move to a place on
the design where you want to add a new
point.
* To move to the first point, press .
* To move to the last point, press .
b
Press .
→ A new point is entered and moves to it.
ENTERING STITCH DATA
333
MY CUSTOM STITCH
8
c
Use to move the point.
* You can also move by using the touch pen.
USING STORED CUSTOM STITCHES
334
USING STORED CUSTOM STITCHES
Storing Custom Stitches in Your
List
Stitch patterns created using the MY CUSTOM
STITCH function can be stored for later use. Once
you finish entering the stitch data, press .
The “Saving” message appears and the stitch will
be stored.
Before storing a stitch, press to sew a test-
run of the stitch.
■ If the Memory is Full
If the following message appears after is
pressed, the stitch pattern cannot be stored because
either the machine’s memory is full or the stitch
pattern being stored is larger than the amount of
space available in the memory. To be able to store
the stitch pattern in the machine’s memory, a
previously stored stitch pattern must be deleted.
Memo
• Storing a stitch pattern takes a few seconds.
• For details on retrieving a stored stitch pat-
tern, see page 335.
Note
• Do not turn off the machine while the “Sav-
ing” message is displayed, otherwise the
stitch pattern data being saved may be lost.
Note
• To save custom stitches to USB media or in
the computer, follow the previously
described procedure to store the custom
stitch, and then press to select the
stitch (see the following “Retrieving Stored
Stitches” section). Press to save the
stitch to USB media or in the computer. (For
details, “Saving Stitch Patterns to USB
Media” on page 178 or “Saving Stitch
Patterns in the Computer” on page 179.)
USING STORED CUSTOM STITCHES
335
MY CUSTOM STITCH
8
Retrieving Stored Stitches
a
Press .
→ A list of stored stitch patterns is displayed.
b
Select the stitch pattern.
* Press to return to the previous screen
without retrieving.
c
Press .
* To delete the stored stitch pattern, press .
* To edit the stored stitch pattern, press .
USING STORED CUSTOM STITCHES
336
Chapter 9
Appendix
CARE AND MAINTENANCE.........................338
Restrictions on oiling ...................................................... 338
Precautions on storing the machine................................ 338
Cleaning the LCD Screen ................................................ 338
Cleaning the Machine Casing.......................................... 338
Cleaning the Race ........................................................... 338
Cleaning the Cutter in the Bobbin Case Area.................. 340
About the Maintenance Message .................................... 341
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN ............................342
Adjusting the Brightness of the Screen Display............... 342
Touch Panel is Malfunctioning........................................ 342
TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................343
Frequent troubleshooting topics ..................................... 343
Upper thread is too tight ................................................ 343
■ Symptom ................................................................................ 343
■ Cause ..................................................................................... 343
■ Remedy .................................................................................. 343
Tangled thread on wrong side of fabric .......................... 344
■ Symptom ................................................................................ 344
■ Cause ..................................................................................... 344
■ Remedy .................................................................................. 344
Incorrect thread tension ................................................. 346
■ Symptoms............................................................................... 346
■ Cause/remedy ........................................................................346
Fabric is caught in the machine and cannot be removed 347
■ Removing the fabric from the machine .................................. 347
■ Checking machine operations ................................................ 349
List of Symptoms............................................................. 350
ERROR MESSAGES........................................354
■ Alarm Sounds ......................................................................... 361
SPECIFICATIONS..........................................362
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S
SOFTWARE...................................................363
Upgrade Procedure Using USB Media ............................ 363
Upgrade Procedure Using Computer.............................. 364
STITCH SETTING CHART.............................365
INDEX...........................................................374
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
338
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
Restrictions on oiling
In order to prevent damaging this machine, it must
not be oiled by the user. This machine was
manufactured with the necessary amount of oil
applied to ensure correct operation, making
periodic oiling unnecessary.
If problems occur, such as difficulty turning the
handwheel or an unusual noise, immediately stop
using the machine, and contact your authorized
dealer or the nearest authorized service center.
Precautions on storing the
machine
Do not store the machine in any of the locations
described below, otherwise damage to the
machine may result, for example, rust caused by
condensation.
* Exposed to extremely high temperatures
* Exposed to extremely low temperatures
* Exposed to extreme temperature changes
* Exposed to high humidity or steam
* Near a flame, heater or air conditioner
* Outdoors or exposed to direct sunlight
* Exposed to extremely dusty or oily environments
Cleaning the LCD Screen
If the screen is dirty, gently wipe it with the
included LCD cleaning cloth or a soft, dry cloth.
Do not use organic solvents or detergents.
Cleaning the Machine Casing
If the surface of the machine is dirty, lightly soak a
cloth in a neutral detergent, squeeze it out firmly,
and then wipe the surface. Then wipe again with a
dry cloth.
Cleaning the Race
If dust or bits of dirt collect in the race or bobbin
case, the machine will not run well, and the
bobbin thread detection function may not operate.
Keep the machine clean for best results.
Press → → →
→ in this order to display a
video example of cleaning the race (see page 46).
Follow the steps explained below to complete the
operation.
CAUTION
• Be sure to unplug the machine before cleaning it. Otherwise, electric shock or injury may result.
Note
• In order to extend the life of this machine,
periodically turn it on and use it. Storing this
machine for an extended period of time
without using it may reduce its efficiency.
Note
• Do not wipe the LCD screen with a damp
cloth.
Memo
• Occasionally, condensation may form on the
LCD screen or it may become fogged up;
however, this is not a malfunction. After a
while, the cloudiness will disappear.
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
339
Appendix
9
a
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.
b
Turn the main power to OFF.
c
Remove the needle and the presser foot
holder (see pages 66 through 67).
d
Remove the flat bed attachment or the
embroidery unit if either is attached.
e
Grasp both sides of the needle plate cover,
and then slide it toward you.
a Needle plate cover
→ The needle plate cover is removed.
f
Grasp the bobbin case, and then pull it out.
a Bobbin case
g
Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner
to remove any lint and dust from the race
and bobbin thread sensor and the
surrounding area.
a Cleaning brush
b Race
c Bobbin thread sensor
h
Insert the bobbin case so that the S mark
on the bobbin case aligns with the z mark
on the machine.
* Align the S and z marks.
a S mark
b z mark
c Bobbin case
Note
• Do not apply oil to the bobbin case.
• If lint or dust collects on the bobbin thread
sensor, the sensor may not operate cor-
rectly.
a
b
b
a
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
340
* Make sure that the indicated points are aligned
before installing the bobbin case.
i
Insert the tabs on the needle plate cover
into the needle plate, and then slide the
cover back on.
Cleaning the Cutter in the Bobbin
Case Area
The cutter below the needle plate should be
cleaned. If dust or lint accumulate on the cutter, it
will be difficult to cut the thread when the “Thread
Cutter” button is pressed or the automatic thread
cutting function is used. Clean the cutter when the
thread is not easily cut.
a
Follow steps a through e in “Cleaning the
Race” to remove the needle plate cover.
b
Use the screwdriver included with the
machine to unscrew and remove the needle
plate.
c
Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner
to remove any lint and dust from the cutter
in the bobbin case area.
a Cutter
CAUTION
• Never use a bobbin case that is scratched;
otherwise, the upper thread may become
tangled, the needle may break, or sewing
performance may suffer. For a new bobbin
case (part code: XE5342-101 (green marking
on the screw), XC8167-551 (no color on the
screw), XE8298-001 (gray, for bobbin work)),
contact your nearest authorized dealer.
• Make sure that you fit the bobbin case
properly, otherwise the needle may break.
Note
• If the needle plate has been removed it is
especially important to reinstall the needle
plate and tighten the screws prior to
installing the bobbin case.
CAUTION
• Do not touch the cutter, otherwise injuries
may result.
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
341
Appendix
9
d
Use the screwdriver included with the
machine to screw and attach the needle
plate.
e
Insert the tabs on the needle plate cover
into the needle plate, and then slide the
cover back on.
About the Maintenance Message
Once this message appears, it is recommended to
take your machine to an authorized dealer or
nearest authorized service center for a regular
maintenance check. Although this message will
disappear and the machine will continue to
function once you press , the message will
display several more times until the appropriate
maintenance is performed.
Please take the time to arrange the maintenance
your machine requires once this message appears.
Such steps will help to ensure you receive
continued, uninterrupted hours of machine
operation for the future.
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
342
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
Adjusting the Brightness of the
Screen Display
If the screen is not looks very clear under certain
situation, you can adjust the brightness of the
screen display.
a
Press .
→ The Sewing settings screen appears.
b
Press .
→ The General settings screen appears.
c
Display 4/8 (page 4 of 8) of the General
settings screen.
d
Press or to adjust the brightness of
the screen display.
* The screen appears dim as the number on the
settings screen decreases. The screen appears
brighter as the number increases.
Touch Panel is Malfunctioning
If the screen does not respond correctly when you
touch a key (the machine does not perform the
operation or performs a different operation), follow
the steps below to make the proper adjustments.
a
Holding your finger on the screen, turn the
main power switch to OFF and back to ON.
→ The touch panel adjustment screen is displayed.
b
Using the included touch pen, lightly touch
the center of each +, in order from 1 to 5.
c
Turn the main power to OFF, then turn it
back to ON.
Note
• Only use the included touch pen to touch the
screen. Do not use a mechanical pencil, pin,
or other sharp object. Do not press too hard
on the screen. Otherwise, damage may
result.
Note
• If you finish the screen adjustment and the
screen still does not respond, or if you
cannot do the adjustment, contact your
authorized dealer.
+1
+4
+2
+5
+3
TROUBLESHOOTING
343
Appendix
9
TROUBLESHOOTING
If the machine stops operating correctly, check the following possible problems before requesting service.
You can solve most problems by yourself. If you need additional help, the Brother Solutions Center offers
the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips. Visit us at “ http://solutions.brother.com
”.
If the problem persists, contact your dealer or the nearest authorized service center.
Frequent troubleshooting topics
Detailed causes and remedies for common troubleshooting topics are described below. Be sure to refer to
this before contacting your dealer.
Upper thread is too tight
■ Symptom
* The upper thread appears as a single continuous
line.
* The lower thread is visible from the upper side of the
fabric. (Refer to the illustration below.)
* The upper thread has tightened up, and comes out
when pulled.
* The upper thread has tightened up, and wrinkles
appear in the fabric.
* The upper thread tension is tight, and the results do
not change even after the thread tension is adjusted.
a Lower side of fabric
b Lower thread visible from upper side of fabric
c Upper thread
d Upper side of fabric
e Lower thread
■ Cause
Incorrect lower threading
If the lower thread is incorrectly threaded, instead of
the appropriate tension being applied to the lower
thread, it is pulled through the fabric when the
upper thread is pulled up. For this reason, the thread
is visible from the upper side of the fabric.
■ Remedy
Correctly install the lower thread.
a
Turn off the sewing machine.
b
Remove the bobbin from the bobbin case.
c
Place the bobbin in the bobbin case so that
the thread unwinds in the correct direction.
* Hold the bobbin with your right hand with the
thread unwinding to the left, and hold the end of the
thread with your left hand. Then, with your right
hand, place the bobbin in the bobbin case.
If the bobbin is inserted with the thread unwinding
in the wrong direction, sewing will be done with
an incorrect thread tension.
■ Upper thread is too tight
page 343
■ Tangled thread on wrong side of fabric
page 344
■ Incorrect thread tension
page 346
■ Fabric is caught in the machine and cannot be
removed
page 347
TROUBLESHOOTING
344
d
While holding the bobbin in place with
your finger, pass the thread through the slit
in the needle plate.
* Hold down the bobbin with your right hand, and
then pull the end of the thread around the tab with
your left hand.
a Tab
b Hold down the bobbin with your right hand.
Pull the thread to pass it through the slit in the
needle plate, then cut it with the cutter.
c Slit
d Cutter
Sewing with the correct thread tension is possible
after the bobbin has been correctly installed in the
bobbin case.
Tangled thread on wrong side of
fabric
■ Symptom
* The thread becomes tangled on the lower side of the
fabric.
* After starting sewing, a rattling noise is made and
sewing cannot continue.
* Looking under the fabric, there is tangled thread in
the bobbin case.
■ Cause
Incorrect upper threading
If the upper thread is incorrectly threaded, the upper
thread passed through the fabric cannot be firmly
pulled up and the upper thread becomes tangled in
the bobbin case, causing a rattling noise.
■ Remedy
Remove the tangled thread, and then correct the
upper threading.
a
Remove the tangled thread. If it cannot be
removed, cut the thread with scissors.
* Refer to “Cleaning the Race” in “CARE AND
MAINTENANCE” on page 338.
b
Remove the upper thread from the
machine.
c
Refer to the following steps to correct the
upper threading.
* If the bobbin was removed from the bobbin case,
refer to “Setting the Bobbin” on page 54 and
“Remedy” in the section “Upper thread is too tight”
on page 343 to correctly install the bobbin.
TROUBLESHOOTING
345
Appendix
9
d
Raise the presser foot using the presser foot
lever.
* If the presser foot is not raised, the sewing machine
cannot be threaded correctly.
e
Raise the needle by turning the handwheel
toward you (counterclockwise) so that the
mark on the wheel points up, or press
“Needle Position” button once or twice to
raise the needle.
or
a Mark
f
While holding the thread with both hands,
pull the thread up from under the thread
guide plate.
a Thread guide plate
g
While holding the thread in your right
hand, pass the thread through the thread
guide in the direction indicated.
h
Guide the thread down, up, then down
through the groove, as shown in the
illustration.
i
Pass the thread through the needle bar
thread guide (marked “6”) by holding the
thread with both hands and guiding it as
shown in the illustration.
a Needle bar thread guide
j
Thread the needle according to steps j
and
o in “UPPER THREADING” on
page 57.
Memo
• Look in the upper groove area to check if
the thread catches on the take-up lever
visible inside the upper groove area.
a Look in the upper groove area
TROUBLESHOOTING
346
Incorrect thread tension
■ Symptoms
• Symptom 1: The lower thread is visible from the upper side of the fabric.
• Symptom 2: The upper thread appears as a straight line on the upper side of the fabric.
• Symptom 3: The upper thread is visible from the lower side of the fabric.
• Symptom 4: The lower thread appears as a straight line on the lower side of the fabric.
• Symptom 5: The stitching on the lower side of the fabric is loose or has slack.
■ Cause/remedy
□ Cause 1
The machine is not correctly threaded.
<With symptoms 1 and 2 described above>
The lower threading is incorrect.
Adjust the upper thread tension and then refer to “Upper Thread is Too Tight” on page 80.
<With symptoms 3 through 5 described above>
The upper threading is incorrect.
Adjust the upper thread tension and then refer to “Tangled thread on wrong side of fabric” on page 344 to
correct the upper threading.
□ Cause 2
A needle and thread appropriate for the fabric are not being used.
The sewing machine needle that should be used depends on the type of fabric sewn and the thread thickness.
If a needle and thread appropriate for the fabric are not being used, the thread tension will not be adjusted
correctly, causing wrinkles in the fabric or skipped stitches.
* Refer to “Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations” on page 69 to check that a needle and thread appropriate for the fabric
are being used.
□ Cause 3
An appropriate upper tension is not selected.
Adjust the upper thread tension to select an appropriate thread tension.
The appropriate thread tension differs according to the type of fabric and thread being used.
* Adjust the thread tension while test sewing on a piece of scrap fabric that is the same as that used in your project.
* When the lower thread is visible on the upper side
of the fabric. Set the upper thread tension to a lower
number. (Loosen the thread tension.)
* When the upper thread is visible on the lower side
of the fabric. Set the upper thread tension to a higher
number. (Tighten the thread tension.)
□ Symptom 1 □ Symptom 3
a Lower side of fabric
b Lower thread visible on
upper side of fabric
c Upper thread
d Upper side of fabric
e Lower thread
f Upper thread visible from
lower side of fabric
Note
• If the upper threading and lower threading are incorrect, the thread tension cannot be adjusted
correctly, even by adjusting the upper thread tension. Check the upper threading and lower threading
first, and then adjust the thread tension.
TROUBLESHOOTING
347
Appendix
9
Fabric is caught in the machine
and cannot be removed
If the fabric is caught in the sewing machine and
cannot be removed, the thread may have become
tangled under the needle plate. Follow the
procedure described below to remove the fabric
from the machine. If the operation could not be
completed according to the procedure, instead of
attempting to complete it forcefully, contact your
dealer or nearest authorized service center.
■ Removing the fabric from the
machine
a
Immediately stop the sewing machine.
b
Turn off the sewing machine.
c
Remove the needle.
If the needle is lowered into the fabric, turn the
handwheel away from you (clockwise) to raise the
needle out of the fabric, and then remove the needle.
* Refer to “CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page 67.
d
Remove the presser foot and presser foot
holder.
* Refer to “CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT” on
page 65.
e
Lift up the fabric and cut the threads below
it.
If the fabric can be removed, remove it. Continue with
the following steps to clean the race.
f
Remove the needle plate cover.
a Needle plate cover
g
Cut out the tangled threads, and then
remove the bobbin.
h
Remove the bobbin case.
If threads remain in the bobbin case, remove them.
a Bobbin case
i
Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner
to remove any dust or loose threads from
the race and its surrounding area.
a Cleaning brush
b Race
j
Use the enclosed disc-shaped screwdriver
to loosen the two screws on the needle
plate.
If the fabric could be removed
Continue with
step
p.
If the fabric could not be
removed
Continue with
step
j.
Note
• Be careful not to drop the removed screws
in the machine.
TROUBLESHOOTING
348
k
Slightly lift up the needle plate, cut any
tangled threads, and then remove the
needle plate.
Remove the fabric and threads from the needle plate.
If the fabric cannot be removed, even after completing
these steps, contact your dealer or nearest authorized
service center.
l
Remove any threads in the race and around
the feed dogs.
m
Turn the handwheel to raise the feed dogs.
n
Align the two screw holes in the needle
plate with the two holes at the needle plate
mounting base, and then fit the needle plate
onto the machine.
o
Lightly finger-tighten the screw on the right
side of the needle plate. Then, use the disc-
shaped screwdriver to firmly tighten the
screw on the left side. Finally, firmly tighten
the screw on the right side.
Turn the handwheel to check that the feed dogs move
smoothly and do not contact the edges of the slots in
the needle plate.
a Correct position of feed dogs
b Incorrect position of feed dogs
p
Insert the bobbin case so that the S mark
on the bobbin case aligns with the ● mark
on the machine.
* Align the S and ● marks.
a S mark
b ● mark
c Bobbin case
* Make sure that the indicated points are aligned
before installing the bobbin case.
Note
• Be careful not to drop the removed screws
in the machine.
CAUTION
• Never use a bobbin case that is scratched;
otherwise, the upper thread may become
tangled, the needle may break, or sewing
performance may suffer. For a new bobbin
case (part code: XE5342-101 (green marking
on the screw), XC8167-551 (no color on the
screw), XE8298-001 (gray, for bobbin work)),
contact your nearest authorized dealer.
• Make sure that you fit the bobbin case
properly, otherwise the needle may break.
a
b
b
a
TROUBLESHOOTING
349
Appendix
9
q
Insert the tabs on the needle plate cover
into the needle plate, and then slide the
cover back on.
r
Check the condition of the needle, and then
install it.
If the needle is in a poor condition, for example, if it is
bent, be sure to install a new needle.
* Refer to “CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page 67.
■ Checking machine operations
If the needle plate has been removed, check
machine operations to confirm that installation has
been completed correctly.
a
Turn on the machine.
b
Select .
c
Slowly turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise), and look from all sides
to check that the needle falls at the center
of the hole in the needle plate.
If the needle contacts the needle plate, remove the
needle plate, and then install it again, starting with
step
m in “Removing the fabric from the machine” on
page 347.
a Hole in the needle plate
b Handwheel
d
Select zigzag stitch . At this time,
increase the stitch length and width to their
maximum settings.
e
Slowly turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) and check that the
needle bar and feed dogs operate correctly.
If the needle or feed dogs contact the needle plate, the
machine may be malfunctioning; therefore, contact
your dealer or nearest authorized service center.
f
Turn off the machine, and then install the
bobbin and presser foot.
* Refer to “Setting the Bobbin” and “CHANGING THE
PRESSER FOOT” on page 65.
g
Correctly thread the machine.
* For details on the machine, refer to “UPPER
THREADING” on page 57.
h
Perform trial sewing with normal fabric.
Note
• If the needle plate has been removed it is
especially important to reinstall the needle
plate and tighten the screws prior to
installing the bobbin case.
CAUTION
• Never use bent needles. Bent needles can
easily break, possibly resulting in injuries.
Note
• After completing this procedure, continue
with the following procedure in “Checking
machine operations” to check that the
machine is operating correctly.
Memo
• Since the needle may have been damaged
when the fabric was caught in the machine,
we recommend replacing it with a new one.
Note
• Do not yet install the presser foot and
thread.
Note
• The thread may have become tangled as a
result of incorrect upper threading. Make
sure that the machine is correctly threaded.
Note
• Incorrect sewing may be the result of
incorrect upper threading or sewing thin
fabrics. If there are poor results from the
trial sewing, check the upper threading or
the type of fabric being used.
TROUBLESHOOTING
350
List of Symptoms
If you have a minor problem with your sewing machine, check the following solutions. If the solutions
suggested do not correct the problem, contact your authorized dealer. Press → →
for advice about minor sewing problems during sewing. Press at any time to return to
the original screen.
Problem Cause Solution Page
The thread is tangled
on the wrong side of
the fabric.
Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine
and rethread the machine.
57
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” chart.
69
The upper thread is
too tight.
The bobbin thread is incorrectly installed. Correctly install the bobbin thread. 54
Cannot thread the
needle
Needle is not in the correct position. Press the “Needle Position” button to raise the
needle.
15
Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. 67
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. 67
Cannot lower the
presser foot with the
presser foot lever
Presser foot was raised using the “Presser Foot
Lifter” button.
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to lower
the presser foot.
15
Thread tension is
incorrect
Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine
and rethread the machine.
57
Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin. (If needle plate was
removed, reinstall needle plate and tighten
screws prior to installing bobbin case.)
54
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combination” chart.
69
Presser foot holder is not attached correctly. Reattach the presser foot holder correctly. 66
Thread tension is set incorrectly. Adjust the thread tension. 79, 233
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. Use a correctly wound bobbin. 48
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. 67
Upper thread breaks Machine is not threaded correctly (used the
wrong spool cap, spool cap is loose, the thread
did not catch the needle bar threader, etc.)
Rethread the machine correctly. 57
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. 67
There are scratches on the race. Replace the race, or consult your authorized
dealer.
338
Upper thread tension is too strong. Adjust the thread tension. 79, 233
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” chart.
69
Thread is twisted. Use scissors, etc., to cut the twisted thread
and remove it from the race, etc.
—
There are scratches near the hole of the needle
plate.
Replace the needle plate, or consult your
authorized dealer.
97
There are scratches near the hole in the presser
foot.
Replace the presser foot, or consult your
authorized dealer.
65
Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. 67
Thread is knotted or tangled. Rethread upper and lower thread. 54, 57
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine
is not used.
Incorrect bobbins will not work properly. Only
use a bobbin designed specifically for this
machine.
54
Bobbin thread breaks Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin thread correctly. 54
There are scratches on the bobbin or it doesn’t
rotate properly.
Replace the bobbin. 54
Thread is twisted. Use scissors, etc. to cut the twisted thread
and remove it from the race, etc.
—
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine
is not used.
Incorrect bobbins will not work properly. Only
use a bobbin designed specifically for this
machine.
54
TROUBLESHOOTING
351
Appendix
9
Bobbin thread does
not wind neatly on the
bobbin.
The thread is not passed through the bobbin
winding thread guide correctly.
Correctly pass the thread through the bobbin
winding thread guide.
49
Bobbin spins slowly. Press [+] in the bobbin winding window to
increase the bobbin winding speed.
50
The thread that was pulled out was not wound
onto the bobbin correctly.
Wind the thread that was pulled off around the
bobbin 5 or 6 times clockwise.
50
Skipped stitches Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. 67
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combination” chart.
69
Machine is threaded incorrectly. Check the steps for threading the machine
and rethread it correctly.
57
Dust or lint has collected under the needle plate. Remove the dust or lint with the brush. 338
Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. 67
Needle is defective. Replace the needle. 67
Thin or stretch fabrics are being sewn. Sew with one sheet of thin paper under the
fabric.
76
Needle breaks Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. 67
Needle clamp screw is not tightened. Tighten the needle clamp screw. 68
Needle is turned or bent. Replace the needle. 67
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combination” chart.
69
Wrong presser foot was used. Use the recommended presser foot.
“STITCH SETTING
CHART”
Upper thread tension is too strong. Adjust the thread tension setting. 79, 233
Fabric is pulled during sewing. Do not pull the fabric during sewing. —
Spool cap is set incorrectly. Check the method for attaching the spool cap,
then reattach the spool cap.
57
There are scratches around the holes in the
needle plate.
Replace the needle plate, or consult your
authorized dealer.
97
There are scratches around the hole(s) in the
presser foot.
Replace the presser foot, or consult your
authorized dealer.
65
There are scratches on the race. Replace the race, or consult your authorized
dealer.
338
Needle is defective. Replace the needle. 67
Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine
and rethread the machine.
57
Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin thread correctly. 54
Presser foot is attached incorrectly. Attach the presser foot correctly. 65
Screw of the presser foot holder is loose. Securely tighten the screw of the presser foot. 66
Fabric is too thick. Use fabric that the needle can pierce when
the handwheel is turned.
75
Fabric is fed forcefully when sewing thick fabric
or thick seams.
Allow the fabric to be fed without being
forcefully pushed.
Stitch length is too short. Adjust the stitch length. 79
Stabilizer is not attached to fabric being
embroidered.
Attach stabilizer. 161, 200
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. Use a correctly wound bobbin. 48
Fabric does not feed
through the machine
Feed dogs are set in the down position.
Press , and then turn the handwheel to
raise the feed dogs.
116
Stitches are too close together. Lengthen the stitch length setting. 79
Wrong presser foot was used. Use the correct presser foot.
“STITCH SETTING
CHART”
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. 67
Thread is entangled. Cut the entangled thread and remove it from
the race.
—
Problem Cause Solution Page
TROUBLESHOOTING
352
Fabric puckers There is a mistake in the upper or bobbin
threading.
Check the steps for threading the machine
and rethread it correctly.
54, 57
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combination” chart.
69
Thread tension is set incorrectly. Adjust the thread tension. 79, 233
Stitches are too long when sewing thin fabrics. Shorten the stitch length. 79
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. 67
Spool cap is set incorrectly. Check the method for attaching the spool cap,
then reattach the spool cap.
57
Wrong presser foot. Use the correct presser foot. “STITCH SETTING
CHART”
High-pitched sound
while sewing
Dust or lint is caught in the feed dogs. Remove the dust or lint. 338
Pieces of thread are caught in the race. Clean the race. 338
Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine
and rethread the machine.
57
There are scratches on the race. Replace the race, or consult your authorized
dealer.
338
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine
is not used.
Incorrect bobbins will not work properly. Only
use a bobbin designed specifically for this
machine.
54
Character pattern
does not turn out
Wrong presser foot was used. Attach the correct presser foot. “STITCH SETTING
CHART”
Pattern adjustment settings were set incorrectly. Revise the pattern adjustment settings. 162
Did not use a stabilizer material on thin fabrics
or stretch fabrics.
Attach a stabilizer material. 161
Thread tension is set incorrectly. Adjust the thread tension. 79, 233
Fabric was pulled, pushed or fed at an angle
while it was being sewn.
Sew while guiding the fabric with your hands
so that the fabric is fed in a straight line.
72
Embroidery pattern
does not sew out
correctly
Thread is twisted. Use scissors, etc., to cut the twisted thread
and remove it from the race, etc.
—
Fabric was not inserted into the frame correctly
(fabric was loose, etc.).
If the fabric is not stretched tight in the frame,
the pattern may turn out poorly or there may
be shrinkage of the pattern. Set the fabric into
the frame correctly.
203
Stabilizing material was not attached. Always use stabilizing material, especially
with stretch fabrics, lightweight fabrics, fabrics
with a coarse weave, or fabrics that often
cause pattern shrinkage. See your authorized
dealer for the proper stabilizer.
200
There was an object placed near the machine,
and the carriage or embroidery frame hit the
object during sewing.
If the frame bumps something during sewing,
the pattern will turn out poorly. Do not place
anything in the area where the frame may
bump it during sewing.
218
Fabric outside the frame edges interferes with
the sewing arm, so the embroidery unit cannot
move.
Reinsert the fabric in the embroidery frame so
that the excess fabric is away from the sewing
arm, and rotate the pattern 180 degrees.
203
Fabric is too heavy, so the embroidery unit
cannot move freely.
Place a large thick book or similar object
under the arm head to lightly lift the heavy
side and keep it level.
—
Fabric is hanging off the table. If the fabric is hanging off the table during
embroidery, the embroidery unit will not move
freely. Place the fabric so that it does not hang
off the table or hold the fabric to keep it from
dragging.
218
Fabric is snagged or caught on something. Stop the machine and place the fabric so that
it does not get caught or snagged.
—
Embroidery frame was removed during sewing
(for example, to reset the bobbin). The presser
foot was bumped or moved while removing or
attaching the embroidery frame, or the
embroidery unit was moved.
If the presser foot is bumped or the
embroidery unit is moved during sewing, the
pattern will not turn out. Be careful when
removing or reattaching the embroidery frame
during sewing.
229
St
abilizer is incorrectly attached, for example, it
is smaller than the embroidery frame.
Attach the stabilizer correctly. 200
Problem Cause Solution Page
TROUBLESHOOTING
353
Appendix
9
Loops appear on the
surface of the fabric
when embroidering
The thread tension is incorrectly set. Adjust the thread tension. 233 - 235
The tension of the upper thread is incorrectly set
for the combination of the fabric, thread and
pattern being used.
Use the embroidery needle plate cover. 219
The combination of the bobbin case and bobbin
thread is incorrect.
Change the bobbin case or bobbin thread so
that the correct combination is used.
218
Machine does not
operate
There is no pattern selected. Select a pattern. 91, 156, 190, 265
“Start/Stop” button was not pushed. Press the “Start/Stop” button. 15
Main power switch is not turned on. Turn the main power to ON. 26
Presser foot is not lowered. Lower the presser foot. 15
“Start/Stop” button was pushed with the foot
controller attached.
Remove the foot controller, or use the foot
controller to operate the machine.
73
The “Start/Stop” button was pressed while the
machine is set for the sewing speed controller to
control the zigzag stitch width.
Use the foot controller instead of the “Start/
Stop” button to operate the machine, or set
the Width control to OFF in the Sewing
settings.
35, 73
All keys and buttons have been locked by
.
Press to unlock all keys and
buttons.
65, 67
Embroidery unit does
not operate
There is no pattern selected. Select a pattern. 190, 265
Main power switch is not turned on. Turn the main power to ON. 26
Embroidery unit is not attached correctly. Reattach the embroidery unit correctly. 188
Embroidery frame was attached before the unit
was initialized.
Perform the initialization process correctly. 188
Nothing happens,
even if the LCD
display is pressed
The screen has been locked. Press either of the following keys to unlock the
screen.
—
The fabric feeds in the
opposite direction.
The feed mechanism is damaged. Contact your dealer or the nearest authorized
service center.
—
The LCD screen is
fogged up.
Condensation has formed on the LCD screen. After a while, the cloudiness will disappear. —
CAUTION
• This machine is equipped with a thread detection device. If the “Start/Stop” button is pushed before the
upper threading is done, the machine will not operate properly. Also, depending on the pattern selected,
the machine may feed the fabric even if the needle is raised. This is due to the needle bar release
mechanism. At these times, the machine will make a sound different from what is made during normal
sewing. This is not the sign of a malfunction.
• If the power is disconnected during sewing:
Turn the main power to OFF and unplug the machine.
If you restart the machine, follow the instructions for operating the machine correctly.
Problem Cause Solution Page
ERROR MESSAGES
354
ERROR MESSAGES
If the machine is not properly set and the “Start/Stop” button or the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button
is pressed, or if the operation procedure is incorrect, the machine does not start. An alarm sounds and an
error message is displayed on the LCD. If an error message displays, follow the instructions in the
message.
Below is an explanation of error messages. Refer to these when necessary (if you press or do the
operation correctly while the error message is displayed, the message disappears).
CAUTION
• Be sure to rethread the machine. If you press the “Start/Stop” button without rethreading the machine,
the thread tension may be wrong or the needle may break and cause injury.
This message is displayed
when the motor locks due to
tangled thread or for other
reasons related to thread
delivery.
This message is displayed
when the embroidery unit is
initializing.
This message is displayed
when you try to sew with a
stitch other than a middle
needle position stitch while
the single-hole needle plate is
installed.
This message is displayed
when the needle plate is
removed with the machine on
or when the machine is
turned on and embroidery or
embroidery edit mode is
selected (see page 54).
This message is displayed
when the machine needs to
be maintained. (see page
341)
This message is displayed
when the needle plate cover
is not attached.
This message is displayed
when you try to combine
more than 71 patterns.
This message is displayed
when the buttonhole lever is
up, a buttonhole stitch is
selected, and the “Start/
Stop” button or “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button
is pushed.
This message is displayed
when the speed control lever
is set to control the zigzag
stitch width, and the “Start/
Stop” button is pushed. Use
the foot controller to operate
the machine.
ERROR MESSAGES
355
Appendix
9
This message appears when
there are not enough colors in
the custom thread table, to
display the color scheme you
have selected to display.
In this case, set more colors
in the custom thread table
(See page 278), or select
less colors in the color
shuffling function. (See
page 283.)
This message appears when
there are not enough colors in
the thread table, to display
the color scheme effect you
have selected.
In this case, select another
effect or the custom thread
table (300 color palette) or
less colors in the Color
Shuffling function. (See
page 283.)
If there are not enough
number of colors set in the
custom thread table, set more
colors in the table. (See
page 278.)
This message is displayed
when the automatic needle
threading button is pushed
while twin needle sewing is
set.
This message is displayed
when the “Start/Stop” button
is pressed before the edge of
the fabric is detected. To
detect the edge of the fabric
using the built-in camera,
press , raise the
presser foot, and then
perform the operation again.
(see page 148)
This message is displayed
when the built-in camera
cannot detect the edge of the
fabric.
If this message appeared
after sewing has reached 1 to
2 cm (about 3/8 to 3/4 inch)
from the edge of the fabric,
refer to step
m in “Edge
Sewing” on page 154.
If this message appeared
during edge sewing, the edge
of the fabric cannot be
detected by the built-in
camera. Press , raise
the presser foot, raise the
needle if it is lowered, and
then perform the procedure
described in “Edge Sewing”
on page 150 starting from
step
f.
If this error message appears
again, sew without using
edge sewing function.
This message appears when
you try to save more than 100
camera image or settings
screen image files in the USB
media. In this case, delete a
file from the USB media or
use different USB media.
(See page 39 and 87)
This message appears when
or is
pressed to delete the settings
for a utility stitch. To delete
the selected settings, press
.
This message is displayed
when an unusable
embroidery card is inserted.
ERROR MESSAGES
356
This message is displayed
when the “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button
is pushed while the
embroidery unit is attached.
This message is displayed
when the foot controller is
pressed while the embroidery
unit is attached and machine
is set up for embroidering.
This message is displayed
when the patterns you are
editing take up too much
memory, or if you are editing
too many patterns for the
memory.
This message is displayed
when a key on the LCD
display is touched while the
needle is in the down
position.
This message is displayed
when there are too many
characters and the curved
character configuration is
impossible.
This message is displayed
when the machine is in
embroidery mode, and the
character pattern
combination is too large to fit
in the embroidery frame.
This message is displayed
when the machine is in
embroidery mode and the
combined character pattern is
too large for the embroidery
frame. You can rotate the
pattern 90 degrees and
continue combining
characters.
This message is displayed
when the machine is in
embroidery mode and the
embroidery unit tries to
initialize while the embroidery
frame is attached.
This message is displayed
when the machine is ready to
sew an embroidery pattern,
and the “Start/Stop” button is
pushed while the embroidery
frame is not attached.
ERROR MESSAGES
357
Appendix
9
This message is displayed
when the machine is in
embroidery edit mode, and
you try to use an editing
function when the pattern is
not completely within the red
outline.
This message is displayed
when you try to save a
copyright protected pattern to
USB media/Computer.
According to copyright laws,
patterns that are illegal to
reproduce or edit cannot be
saved to USB media or
computer. If this message
displays, save the pattern in
the machine’s memory.
This message is displayed
when the machine is in
embroidery mode and the
small frame is attached, and
the selected pattern does not
fit in the small frame.
This message appears when
embroidery frame (small) is
attached while aligning the
embroidery position using the
built-in camera.
This message is displayed
when is pressed
when changing thread colors.
This message appears if the
machine is turned off while
sewing, then turned on again.
Press to return the
machine to the condition
(pattern position and number
of stitches) when it was
turned off. Follow the
procedure described in “If the
Thread Breaks During
Sewing” on page 230 to align
the needle position and sew
the remainder of the pattern.
This message is displayed
when the “Start/Stop” button
is pushed and the machine is
in embroidery mode, but the
embroidery unit is not
attached.
This message is displayed
when replacing the
embroidering bobbin thread.
This message is displayed
when rotating a saved
combined pattern in the
Embroidery screen.
This message is displayed
when the embroidery frame is
attached.
ERROR MESSAGES
358
This message is displayed
when the machine failed to
recognize the embroidery
positioning mark.
- Confirm that the embroidery
positioning mark is in the
selected area. If problem
persists, see page 215 to
reposition mark.
- Machine failed to recognize
printed positioning mark.
Set “Page Scaling” to “None
(100%)”, and try printing the
embroidery positioning
mark again. (see page 226)
This message is displayed
when the machine has
recognized the embroidery
position mark. Remove the
embroidery positioning
sticker and press to
continue. To remove the
embroidery positioning
sticker more easily, press
. (see page 215)
This message appears when
the built-in camera is being
used to align the embroidery
position, but the embroidery
positioning sticker is too near
an edge or the pattern
extends from the embroidery
frame. Change the
positioning of the embroidery
position sticker, and then try
aligning the position again.
See page 208.
This message is displayed
when the upper thread is
broken or not threaded
correctly, and the “Start/Stop”
button or the “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button
is pressed.
This message is displayed
when the “Presser Foot Lifter”
button is pushed while the
presser foot lever is raised/
the needle is lowered.
This message is displayed
when the “Start/Stop” button
is pushed to sew Utility
stitches or Character/
Decorative stitches while the
foot controller is connected.
(This message does not
appear when embroidering).
This message is displayed
when the “Start/ Stop” button
is pushed while the machine
is in embroidery edit mode
and a pattern is being edited.
This message is displayed
when there is no stitch or
embroidery pattern selected
and the “Start/Stop” button or
the “Reverse/Reinforcement
Stitch” button is pressed.
This message is displayed
when the bobbin thread is
running out.
This message is displayed
when the memory is full and
the stitch or pattern cannot be
saved.
ERROR MESSAGES
359
Appendix
9
This message is displayed
when the machine is
retrieving a previously saved
pattern while in embroidery
edit mode.
This message is displayed
when, after selecting a
pattern, ,
, or is
pressed and the pattern is
about to be deleted.
This message is displayed
when the bobbin is being
wound, and the motor locks
because the thread is
tangled, etc.
This message is displayed
when there is a possibility
that the data for the selected
pattern is corrupted.
This message is displayed
when the buttonhole lever is
down, a stitch other than a
buttonhole is selected, and
the “Start/ Stop” button or the
“Reverse/Reinforcement
Stitch” button is pushed.
This message is displayed
when the embroidery unit is
attached and the power is
turned on with the needle in
the down position.
This message is displayed
when the selected stitch is
not available for the specific
function.
This message is displayed
when you try to recall or save
a pattern while no USB media
is loaded.
This message is displayed
when you try to use
incompatible media.
ERROR MESSAGES
360
This message is displayed
when you attempt to select a
pattern after the USB media
in which the pattern is saved
has been changed.
This message is displayed
when an error occurs with the
USB media.
This message is displayed
while the USB media is
transmitting.
This message is displayed
when the memory is full and a
pattern must be deleted.
This message is displayed
when a button, such as the
“Start/Stop” button, is pushed
while the presser foot is
raised.
This message is displayed if
some malfunction occurs.
This message is displayed
when you try to use
incompatible USB media.
For a list of compatible USB
media, visit “ http://
solutions.brother.com ”.
This message is displayed
when it seems that the upper
thread has not been threaded
correctly.
This message is displayed
when is pressed
(the presser foot is raised).
This message is displayed
when the file size exceeds
the data capacity of the
machine.
Confirm the file size and
format. (see page 40.)
ERROR MESSAGES
361
Appendix
9
■ Alarm Sounds
If the operation was performed incorrectly, an alarm
sounds to indicate that an error occurred. If the
operation was performed correctly, the machine
beeps to confirm the operation.
This message appears if the
file format is incompatible
with this machine. Check the
list of compatible file formats.
(see page 40.)
This message is displayed
when the image is deleted.
This message is displayed
when you press
in the screen
other than the Utility Stitch, or
press in the
screen other than the Utility
Stitch or Character/
Decorative Stitch.
This message appears when
you try to start sewing utility
or decorative/character
stitches using the embroidery
foot with the LED pointer
attached to the machine.
This message is displayed
when the “Start/Stop” button
is pushed while the multi-
function foot controller is not
connected correctly to the
machine.
Memo
• To cancel the operation beep or to change
the volume, press , display screen
3/8, and then change the setting for
“Speaker”. See page 36 for more details.
SPECIFICATIONS
362
SPECIFICATIONS
* Please be aware that some specifications may change without notice.
Item Specification
Sewing Machine
(Box 1 of 3)
Dimensions of machine Approx. 61.5 cm (W) × 33.2 cm (H) × 27.0 cm (D) (approx.
24-7/32 inches (W) × 13-5/64 inches (H) × 10-5/8 inches (D))
Dimensions of box Approx. 68.5 cm (W) × 47.0 cm (H) × 39.0 cm (D) (approx.
26-31/32 inches (W) × 18-1/2 inches (H) × 15-11/32 inches
(D))
Weight of machine Approx. 15 kg (approx. 33 lb)
Weight of box (for shipping) Approx. 20 kg (approx. 44 lb)
Sewing speed 70 to 1000 stitches per minute
Needles Home sewing machine needles (HA × 130)
Accessory Box
(Box 2 of 3)
Dimensions of box Approx. 68.5 cm (W) × 15.2 cm (H) × 39.4 cm (D) (approx.
26-31/32 inches (W) × 6 inches (H) × 15-33/64 inches (D))
Weight of box (for shipping) Approx. 5 kg (approx. 11 lb)
Embroidery Unit
(Box 3 of 3)
Dimensions of embroidery unit Approx. 51.0 cm (W) × 13.9 cm (H) × 46.2 cm (D) (approx.
20-5/64 inches (W) × 5-15/32 inch (H) × 18-3/16 inches (D))
Dimensions of machine with
embroidery unit attached
Approx. 81.6 cm (W) × 33.2 cm (H) × 46.2 cm (D) (approx.
32-1/8 inches (W) × 13-5/64 inches (H) × 18-3/16 inches (D))
Dimensions of box Approx. 68.5 cm (W) × 62.2 cm (H) × 23.6 cm (D) (approx.
26-31/32 inches (W) × 24-31/64 inches (H) × 9-19/64 inches
(D))
Weight of embroidery unit Approx. 4 kg (approx. 9 lb)
Weight of box (for shipping) Approx. 13 kg (approx. 29 lb)
Total Shipping Weight (Combination of all 3 boxes complete) Approx. 42 kg (approx. 93 lb)
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE
363
Appendix
9
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE
You can use USB media or a computer to upgrade software for your sewing machine.
When an upgrade program is available on “ http://solutions.brother.com ”, please download the files
following the instructions on the website and steps below.
Upgrade Procedure Using USB
Media
a
While pressing the “Automatic Threading”
button, turn the main power to ON.
→ The following screen will appear on the LCD.
b
Press .
c
Insert the USB media into the primary (top)
USB port on the machine. The media device
should only contain the upgrade file.
a Primary (top) USB port for media
b USB media
d
Press .
→ The upgrade file is loaded.
e
Remove the USB media, and turn the
machine off and on again.
Note
• When using USB media to upgrade the software, check that no data other than the upgrade file is
saved on the USB media being used before starting to upgrade.
Note
• The access lamp will begin blinking after
inserting USB media, and it will take about 5
to 6 seconds to recognize the media. (Time
will differ depending on the USB media).
Note
• If an error occurs, a red text error message
will appear. When the installation is
performed successfully, following message
will appear.
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE
364
Upgrade Procedure Using
Computer
a
While pressing the “Automatic Threading”
button, turn the main power to ON.
→ The following screen will appear on the LCD.
b
Press .
c
Plug the USB cable connector into the
corresponding USB ports for the computer
and for the machine.
→ “Removable Disk” will appear in “Computer (My
computer)”.
d
Copy the upgrade file to “Removable Disk”.
→ The following message will appear.
e
When the message disappears, press
.
→ The upgrade file is loaded.
f
Unplug the USB cable, and turn the
machine off and on again.
Note
• Do not connect any additional USB media
devices to your computer when using the
USB cable.
Note
• If an error occurs, a red text error message
will appear. When the installation is
performed successfully, following message
will appear.
STITCH SETTING CHART
365
STITCH SETTING CHART
The following chart shows information for each utility stitch concerning applications, stitch lengths, stitch
widths, and whether or not the twin needle mode can be used.
Note
• Quilting foot “C” is used when the straight stitch needle plate is attached to the machine. Refer to
“Using Free motion Quilting Foot “C”” on page 116.
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
Straight stitch
(Left)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc. Reverse stitch is
sewn while pressing “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Straight stitch
(Left)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc. Reinforcement
stitch is sewn while pressing
“Reverse/Reinforcement
Stitch” button.
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Straight stitch
(Middle)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc. Reverse stitch is
sewn while pressing “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Straight stitch
(Middle)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc. Reinforcement
stitch is sewn while pressing
“Reverse/Reinforcement
Stitch” button.
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Triple stretch
stitch
General sewing for
reinforcement and decorative
topstitching
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.5 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Stem stitch Reinforced stitching, sewing
and decorative applications
1.0
(1/16)
1.0 - 3.0
(1/16 - 1/8)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Decorative
stitch
Decorative stitching, top
stitching
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(
1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Basting stitch Basting
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
20
(3/4)
5 - 30
(3/16 - 1-3/
16)
NO
Zigzag stitch For overcasting, mending.
Reverse stitch is sewn while
pressing “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4
(1/16)
0.0 - 4.0
(0 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Zigzag stitch For overcasting, mending.
Reinforcement stitch is sewn
while pressing “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4
(1/16)
0.0 - 4.0
(0 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Zigzag stitch
(right)
Start from right needle
position, zigzag sew at left.
3.5
(1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.4
(1/16)
0.3 - 4.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Zigzag stitch
(left)
Start from left needle position,
zigzag sew at right.
3.5
(1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.4
(1/16)
0.3 - 4.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
2 steps elastic
zigzag
Overcasting (medium weight
and stretch fabrics), tape and
elastic
5.0
(3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
OK
( J )
STITCH SETTING CHART
366
2 steps elastic
zigzag
Overcasting (medium weight
and stretch fabrics), tape and
elastic
5.0
(3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
OK
( J )
3 steps elastic
zigzag
Overcasting (medium,
heavyweight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.0
(3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
OK
( J )
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforcing of light and
medium weight fabrics
3.5
(1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
2.0
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforcing of heavyweight
fabric
5.0
(3/16)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforcing of medium,
heavyweight and easily friable
fabrics or decorative stitching.
5.0
(3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforced seaming of stretch
fabric
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 9/32)
2.5
(3/32)
0.5 - 4.0
(1/32 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforcing of medium stretch
fabric and heavyweight fabric,
decorative stitching
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 9/32)
2.5
(3/32)
0.5 - 4.0
(1/32 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforcement of stretch fabric
or decorat
ive stitching
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Overcasting
stitch
Stretch knit seam
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Single diamond
overcast
Reinforcement and seaming
stretch fabric
6.0
(15/64)
1.0 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Single diamond
overcast
Reinforcement of stretch fabric
6.0
(15/64)
1.0 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.8
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
With side cutter Straight stitch while cutting
fabrics
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 2.5
(0 - 3/32)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
With side cutter Zigzag stitch while cutting
fabrics
3.5
(1/8)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
1.4
(1/16)
0.0 - 4.0
(0 - 3/16)
NO
With side cutter Overcasting stitch while cutting
fabrics
3.5
(1/8)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.0
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
With side cutter Overcasting stitch while cutting
fabrics
5.0
(3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
With side cutter Overcasting stitch while cutting
fabrics
5.0
(
3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Piecing stitch
(Right)
Piecework/patchwork 6.5 mm
(approx. 1/4 inch) left seam
allowance
5.5
(7/32)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Piecing stitch
(Middle)
Piecework/patchwork
— —
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
367
Piecing stitch
(Left)
Piecework/patchwork 6.5 mm
(approx. 1/4 inch) left seam
allowance
1.5
(1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Hand-look
quilting
Quilting stitch made to look like
hand quilting stitch
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Quilting
appliqué zigzag
stitch
Zigzag stitch for quilting and
sewing on appliqué quilt
pieces
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4
(1/16)
0.0 - 4.0
(0 - 3/16)
NO
Quilting
appliqué stitch
Quilting stitch for invisible
appliqué or attaching binding
1.5
(1/16)
0.5 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
1.8
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Quilting
stippling
Background quilting
7.0
(1/4)
1.0 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Blind hem stitch Hemming woven fabrics
0.0
(0)
+3.0 - -3.0
(+1/8 - -1/8)
2.0
(1/16)
1.0 - 3.5
(1/16 - 1/8)
NO
Blind hem stitch
stretch
Hemming stretch fabric
0.0
(0)
+3.0 - -3.0
(+1/8 - -1/8)
2.0
(1/16)
1.0 - 3.5
(1/16 - 1/8)
NO
Blanket stitch Appliqués, decorative blanket
stitch
3.5
(1/8)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.6 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Shell tuck edge S
hell tuck edge finish on
fabrics
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
OK
( J )
Satin scallop
stitch
Decorating collar of blouse,
edge of handkerchief
5.0
(3/16)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
0.5
(1/32)
0.1 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
OK
( J )
Scallop stitch Decorating collar of blouse,
edge of handkerchief
7.0
(1/4)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Patchwork join
stitch
Patchwork stitches, decorative
stitching
4.0
(1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.2
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
OK
( J )
Patchwork
double overlock
stitch
Patchwork stitches, decorative
stitching
5.0
(3/16)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Couching stitch Decorative stitching, attaching
cord and couching
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.2
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
OK
( J )
Smocking stitch Smocking, decorative stitching
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Feather stitch Fagoting, decorative stitching
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(
1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Fagoting cross
stitch
Fagoting, bridging and
decorative stitching
5.0
(3/16)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Tape attaching Attaching tape to seam in
stretch fabric
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/61 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
368
Ladder stitch Decorative stitching
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
2.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Rick-rack stitch Decorative top stitching
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Decorative
stitch
Decorative stitching
1.0
(1/16)
1.0 - 3.0
(1/16 - 1/8)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Decorative
stitch
Decorative stitching
5.5
(7/32)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Serpentine
stitch
Decorative stitching and
attaching elastic
5.0
(3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Decorative
stitch
Decorative stitching and
appliqué
6.0
(15/64)
1.0 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Decorative
stippling stitch
Decorative stitching
7.0
(1/4)
1.0 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Decorative hems, triple straight
at left
1.0
(1/16)
1.0 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.5 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemsti
tching Decorative hems, triple straight
at center
3.5
(1/8)
1.0 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.5 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching
zigzag
Decorative hems, top stitching
6.0
(15/64)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching Decorative hems, lace
attaching pin stitch
3.5
(1/8)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.6 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Decorative hems
3.0
(1/8)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
3.5
(1/8)
1.6 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Decorative hems daisy stitch
6.0
(15/64)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
1.5 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
5.0
(3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
3.5
(1/8)
1.6 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
5.0
(3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
3.5
(1/8)
1.5 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
5.0
(3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
3.5
(1/8)
1.6 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
5.0
(3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
4.0
(
3/16)
1.5 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
4.0
(3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.5 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
369
Honeycomb
stitch
Heirloom, decorative hems
5.0
(3/64)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.5 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Honeycomb
stitch
Heirloom, decorative hems
6.0
(15/64)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
3.5
(1/8)
1.5 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
6.0
(15/64)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
6.0
(15/64)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
1.5 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
6.0
(15/64)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
1.5 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
4.0
(3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.6 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
5.0
(3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
1.5 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching Decorative hems and bridging
stitch
6.0
(15/64)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
1.5 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching Decorative hems. Fagoting,
attaching ribbon
5.0
(3/16)
1.
5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
1.5 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching Decorative hems, smocking
6.0
(15/64)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Decorative hems, smocking
5.0
(3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Decorative hems, smocking
5.0
(3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Decorative hems
5.0
(3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Ladder stitch Decorative hems. Fagoting,
attaching ribbon
7.0
(1/4)
5.0 - 7.0
(3/16 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
1.0 - 2.5
(1/16 - 3/32)
NO
Narrow rounded
buttonhole
Buttonhole on light to medium
weight fabrics
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Wide round
ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with extra space
for larger buttons
5.5
(7/32)
3.5 - 5.5
(1/8 - 7/32)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Tapered round
ended
buttonhole
Reinforced waist tapered
buttonholes
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/
64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Round ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with vertical bar
tack in heavyweight fabrics
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
370
Round ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with bar tack
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Round double
ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes for fine, medium
to heavyweight fabrics
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Narrow squared
buttonhole
Buttonholes for light to medium
weight fabrics
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Wide squared
buttonhole
Buttonholes with extra space
for larger decorative buttons
5.5
(7/32)
3.5 - 5.5
(1/8 - 7/32)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Squared
buttonhole
Heavy-duty buttonholes with
vertical bar tacks
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Stretch
buttonhole
Buttonholes for stretch or
woven fabrics
6.0
(15/64)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
1.0
(1/16)
0.5 - 2.0
(1/32 - 1/16)
NO
Heirloom
buttonhole
Buttonholes for heirloom and
stretch fabrics
6.0
(15/64)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
1.5
(1/16)
1.0 - 3.0
(1/1 - 1/8)
NO
Bound
buttonhole
The first step in making bound
buttonholes
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 6.0
(0 - 15/64)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1
/64 - 3/16)
NO
Keyhole
buttonhole
Buttonholes in heavyweight or
thick fabrics for larger flat
buttons
7.0
(1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5
(1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Tapered keyhole
buttonhole
Buttonholes in medium to
heavy weight fabrics for larger
flat buttons
7.0
(1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5
(1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Keyhole
buttonhole
Buttonholes with vertical bar
tack for reinforcement in
heavyweight or thick fabrics
7.0
(1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5
(1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
4 steps
buttonhole 1
Left side of 4 step buttonhole
5.0
(7/32)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
4 steps
buttonhole 2
Bar tack of 4 step buttonhole
5.0
(7/32)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
4 steps
buttonhole 3
Right side of 4 step buttonhole
5.0
(7/32)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
4 steps
buttonhole 4
Bar tack of 4 step buttonhole
5.0
(7/32)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Darning Darning of medium weight
fabric
7.0
(1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 2.5
(1
/64 - 1/16)
NO
Darning Darning of heavyweight fabric
7.0
(1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 2.5
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Bar tack Reinforcement at opening of
pocket, etc.
2.0
(1/16)
1.0 - 3.0
(1/16 - 1/8)
0.4
(1/64)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
371
Button sewing Attaching buttons
3.5
(1/8)
2.5 - 4.5
(3/32 - 3/16)
— —NO
Eyelet For making eyelets, holes on
belts, etc.
7.0
(1/4)
7.0 6.0 5.0
(1/4 15/64
3/16)
7.0
(1/4)
7.0 6.0 5.0
(1/4 15/64
3/16)
NO
Star eyelet For making star-shaped
eyelets on holes.
— — — —NO
Diagonally left
up (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
— — — —NO
Reverse
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
— — — —NO
Diagonally right
up (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
— — — —NO
Sideways to left
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
— — — —NO
Sideways to
right (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
— — — —NO
Diagonally left
down (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
— — — —NO
Forward
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
— — — —NO
Diagonally right
down (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
— — — —NO
Sideways to left
(Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
— — — —N
O
Sideways to
right (Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
— — — —NO
Forward
(Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
— — — —NO
Reverse
(Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
— — — —NO
Piecing stitch
(Middle)
Piecework/patchwork
— —
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Piecing stitch
(Right)
Piecework/patchwork
6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) right
seam allowance
5.50
(7/32)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Piecing stitch
(Left)
Piecework/patchwork
6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) left
seam allowance
1.50
(1/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
372
Hand-look
quilting
Quilting stitch made to look like
hand quilting stitch
3.50
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Basting stitch Basting
3.50
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
20
(3/4)
5 - 30
(3/16 - 1-3/
16)
NO
Stem stitch Reinforced stitching, sewing
and decorative applications
1.00
(1/16)
1.00 - 3.00
(1/16 - 1/8)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Quilting
appliqué zigzag
stitch
Zigzag stitch for quilting and
sewing on appliqué quilt
pieces
3.50
(1/8)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
0.0 - 4.0
(0 - 3/16)
NO
Zigzag stitch
(Right)
Start from right needle
position, zigzag sew at left
3.50
(1/8)
2.50 - 5.00
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.6
0.3 - 4.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Zigzag stitch
(Left)
Start from left needle position,
zigzag sew at right
3.50
(1/8)
2.50 - 5.00
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.6
0.3 - 4.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
2 steps elastic
zigzag
Overcasting (medium weight
and stretch fabrics), tape and
elastic
5.00
(3/16)
1.50 - 7.00
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
3 steps elastic
zigzag
Overcasting (medium,
heavyweight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.00
(3/16)
1.50 - 7.00
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Quilting
a
ppliqué stitch
Quilting stitch for invisible
appliqué or attaching binding
2.00
0.50 - 5.00
(1/64 - 3/16)
2.0
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Shell tuck edge Shell tuck edge finish on
fabrics
4.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Blanket stitch Appliqués, decorative blanket
stitch
3.50
(1/8)
2.50 - 7.00
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.6 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Quilting
stippling
Background quilting
7.00
(1/4)
1.00 - 7.00
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Overcasting
stitch
Stretch knit seam
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Tape attaching Attaching tape to seam in
stretch fabric
5.50
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.4
0.2 - 4.0
(1/61 - 3/16)
NO
Serpentine
stitch
Decorative stitching and
attaching elastic
5.00
(3/16)
1.50 - 7.00
(1/16 - 1/4)
2.0
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Feather stitch Fagoting, decorative stitching
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Fagoting cross
stitch
Fagoting, bridging and
decorative stitching
5.00
(3/16)
2.50 - 7.00
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.
0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Couching stitch Decorative stitching, attaching
cord and couching
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.2
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
373
Patchwork
double overlock
stitch
Patchwork stitches, decorative
stitching
5.00
(3/16)
2.50 - 7.00
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Smocking stitch Smocking, decorative stitching
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Rick-rack stitch Decorative top stitching
4.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Decorative
stitch
Decorative stitching and
appliqué
6.00
(15/64)
1.00 - 7.00
(1/16 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Decorative
stitch
Decorative stitching
5.50
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
5.00
(3/16)
1.50 - 7.00
(1/16 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
1.5 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Decorative hems and bridging
stitch
6.00
(15/64)
1.50 - 7.00
(1/16 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
1.5 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Single diamond
overcast
Reinforcement and seaming
stretch fabric
6.00
(15/64)
1.00 - 7.00
(1/16 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforcement of stretch fabric
or decorative stitching
4.00
(3/
16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
INDEX
374
INDEX
A
Accessories
included accessories
.................................................................16
options
......................................................................................20
Accessory case
..............................................................................16
Accessory compartment
................................................................16
Adjustments
screen
.....................................................................................342
Air vent
.........................................................................................13
Alarm sounds
..............................................................................361
Aligning the position
................................................. 208, 211, 213
Alphabet characters
character/decorative stitches
...................................................158
embroidery
.............................................................................194
embroidery edit
.......................................................................266
Alternate bobbin case
.................................................................218
Appliqué
.....................................................................................125
embroidery patterns
................................................................221
quilting
...................................................................................114
using a zigzag stitch
................................................................102
using an embroidery frame pattern
..........................................258
Array key
........................................................................... 267, 273
Arrow keys
................................................................ 240, 296, 329
Automatic fabric sensor system
.....................................................85
Automatic reinforcement stitch key
...............................................81
Automatic thread cutting key
........................................................82
Automatic Threading button
.................................................. 15, 57
B
Back to beginning key .................................................................168
Ball point needle 75/107
...................................................... 69, 236
Bar tacks
.....................................................................................140
Basting
..........................................................................................98
Blind hem stitches
.......................................................................122
Block move key
..........................................................................331
Bobbin
pulling up the bobbin thread
.....................................................55
runs out of thread
....................................................................229
setting
.......................................................................................54
winding
.....................................................................................48
Bobbin case
alternate bobbin case (no color on the screw)
.........................218
cleaning
..................................................................................338
Bobbin clip
...................................................................................17
Bobbin cover
......................................................................... 14, 54
Bobbin holder (switch)
..................................................................50
Bobbin winder
..............................................................................13
Bobbin work
...............................................................................307
Border key
......................................................................... 285, 290
Built-in camera
.......................................................6, 87, 148, 213
Button sewing
.............................................................................142
4 hole buttons
.........................................................................143
shank
......................................................................................143
Buttonhole lever
......................................................... 14, 134, 139
Buttonholes
four-step
..................................................................................136
odd-shaped/buttons that do not fit the button holder plate
......135
one-step
..................................................................................132
C
Character spacing key .................................................................273
Character/Decorative Stitches
adjustments
.............................................................................162
combining
...............................................................................170
editing
.....................................................................................164
key functions
...........................................................................164
retrieving
........................................................................ 180, 181
saving
....................................................................177, 178, 179
selecting
................................................................................. 156
sewing
.................................................................................... 161
stitch selection screens
........................................................... 157
Cleaning
LCD screen
............................................................................. 338
machine casing
...................................................................... 338
race
........................................................................................ 338
Color shuffling function
.............................................................. 283
Combining Patterns
character/decorative stitches
................................................... 170
embroidery edit
...................................................................... 295
Cord guide bobbin cover
............................................................ 103
Crazy quilt
................................................................................. 103
Custom Thread Table
.........................................................278, 282
Cut/Tension key
......................................................................... 233
D
Darning ...................................................................................... 138
Dart seam
..................................................................................... 99
Density key
................................................................................ 244
E
Echo quilting .............................................................................. 119
Edge sewing
edge sewing using the built-in camera
................................6, 148
Editing
character/decorative stitches
................................................... 164
embroidery
............................................................................. 240
embroidery edit
...................................................................... 268
MY CUSTOM STITCH
............................................................ 328
Elastic zigzag stitches
................................................................. 104
Elongation key
............................................................................ 166
Embroidery
adjusting the speed
................................................................. 237
automatic thread cutting function (END COLOR TRIM)
.......... 235
edges or corners
..................................................................... 205
key functions
.......................................................................... 199
restarting from the beginning
.................................................. 231
resuming embroidery after turning off the power
.................... 231
ribbons or tape
....................................................................... 205
selecting patterns
.................................................................... 190
small fabrics
........................................................................... 205
thread color display
................................................................ 237
thread trimming function (JUMP STITCH TRIM)
...................... 236
Embroidery card
......................................................................... 197
Embroidery card reader
.............................................................. 197
Embroidery edit
changing the thread color
....................................................... 277
combined patterns
..........................................................295, 298
custom thread table
........................................................278, 282
explanation of functions
......................................................... 264
key functions
.......................................................................... 269
repeated patterns
.................................................................... 285
Embroidery foot “W2”
................................................................ 186
Embroidery frame display
........................................................... 238
Embroidery frames
attaching
................................................................................ 206
inserting fabric
........................................................................ 203
removing
................................................................................ 207
types
....................................................................................... 202
using the embroidery sheet
..................................................... 204
Embroidery needle plate cover
................................................... 219
Embroidery patterns
aligning the position
............................................................... 211
checking the position
............................................................. 216
combining
.............................................................................. 295
duplicating
............................................................................. 293
INDEX
375
editing .................................................................................... 268
linked characters
.................................................................... 245
pattern selection screens
......................................................... 191
patterns which use appliqué
................................................... 221
retrieving
....................................................................... 254, 255
revising
................................................................................... 240
saving
....................................................................251, 252, 253
selecting
........................................................................ 190, 265
sewing
.................................................................................... 218
using a frame pattern to make an appliqué
.................... 258, 259
Embroidery positioning sticker
.................................................... 213
Embroidery sheet
........................................................................ 204
Embroidery unit
................................................................... 15, 188
carriage
.................................................................................... 15
carrying case
............................................................................ 17
Enlarger key
................................................................................ 329
Error messages
............................................................................ 354
Eyelet
......................................................................................... 144
F
Fabrics
fabric/thread/needle combinations
............................................ 69
sewing heavyweight fabrics
...................................................... 75
sewing lightweight fabrics
......................................................... 76
sewing stretch fabrics
....................................................... 77, 135
Fagoting
..................................................................................... 128
Feed dogs
............................................................................ 14, 116
Flat bed attachment
............................................................. 13, 188
Flat fell Seam
.............................................................................. 100
Forward/Back key
.............................................................. 230, 231
Free motion quilting
free motion echo quilting foot “E”
........................................... 119
free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
................................... 118
free motion quilting foot “C”
................................................... 116
Free motion sewing mode
.......................................................... 116
G
Gathering ..................................................................................... 99
Grid direction key
...................................................................... 329
H
Handle ......................................................................................... 13
Handwheel
................................................................................... 13
Heirloom
.................................................................................... 130
Hemstitching
daisy stitch
.............................................................................. 130
drawn work
............................................................................ 131
Home page screen
........................................................................ 28
I
Image key ........................................................... 92, 168, 217, 330
Insert key
.................................................................................... 332
K
Key functions
character/decorative stitches
................................................... 164
embroidery
............................................................................. 199
embroidery edit
...................................................................... 269
MY CUSTOM STITCH
............................................................ 328
utility stitches
............................................................................ 30
Knee lifter
.............................................................................. 13, 83
L
LCD screen ............................................................................ 13, 28
cleaning
.................................................................................. 338
light
.......................................................................................... 36
locking
..................................................................................... 86
Lower threading
pulling up the bobbin thread
.................................................... 55
setting the bobbin
.....................................................................54
winding the bobbin
...................................................................48
M
Machine operation mode key .....................................................343
Main power switch
................................................................ 13, 26
Mirror image key
........................................................ 91, 167, 243
Multi color key
.................................................................. 245, 276
Multi-directional sewing
.............................................................145
Multi-function foot controller
................................................. 13, 73
My Custom Design
.........................................................................7
MY CUSTOM STITCH
designing
................................................................................326
entering data
...........................................................................328
key functions
...........................................................................328
retrieving
.................................................................................335
saving
.....................................................................................334
storing in your list
...................................................................334
N
Needle
changing the needle
..................................................................67
changing the needle position
....................................................96
checking the needle location
............................................... 6, 87
fabric/thread/needle combinations
............................................69
mode
........................................................................................28
twin needle
...............................................................................60
Needle bar thread guides
....................................................... 14, 61
Needle clamp screw
.....................................................................14
Needle mode selection key
...........................................................60
Needle plate
.................................................................................14
Needle position
..................................................................... 86, 96
Needle Position button
.................................................................15
O
Operation buttons ..................................................................13, 15
Overcasting
.............................................................. 102, 104, 105
P
Patchwork ...................................................................................103
Pen tablet
............................................................................... 23, 34
Piecing
........................................................................................113
Pintuck
.......................................................................................101
Pivoting
........................................................................................84
Point delete key
..........................................................................330
Power cord
...................................................................................27
Power cord receptacle
..................................................................13
Presser foot
attaching
...................................................................................65
pressure
....................................................................................85
removing
...................................................................................65
types
.......................................................................................365
Presser foot code
.................................................................. 29, 198
Presser foot holder
................................................................. 14, 65
Presser foot holder screw
..............................................................14
Presser foot lever
.................................................................... 13, 75
Presser Foot Lifter button
...............................................................15
Presser foot/Needle exchange key
....................61, 65, 66, 67, 187
Pre-tension disk
.............................................................. 13, 49, 52
Print and stitch
................................................................... 223, 306
Q
Quilting ......................................................................................110
free motion
.............................................................................116
with satin stitches
....................................................................115
R
Race ...........................................................................................338
Repeated patterns
.......................................................................285
INDEX
376
Retrieving
character/decorative stitch patterns
.........................................180
computer
....................................................................... 182, 256
embroidery patterns
................................................................254
machine’s memory
......................................................... 180, 254
MY CUSTOM STITCH designs
................................................335
stitch settings
.............................................................................93
USB media
..................................................................... 181, 255
utility stitches
............................................................................93
Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch button
............................... 15, 74, 81
Reverse/Reinforcement stitches
.............................................. 74, 81
Rotate key
.......................................................................... 242, 270
S
Satin stitches ...................................................................... 115, 167
Saving
character/decorative stitches
...................................................177
computer
....................................................................... 179, 253
embroidery patterns
................................................................251
machine’s memory
......................................................... 177, 251
MY CUSTOM STITCH designs
................................................334
stitch settings
.............................................................................92
USB media
..................................................................... 178, 252
utility stitches
............................................................................92
Scallop stitches
...........................................................................127
Screen saver
..................................................................................40
Set key
........................................................................................329
Settings
automatic reinforcement stitching
.............................................81
automatic thread cutting
..................................................82, 235
display language
.......................................................................41
embroidery settings
...................................................................37
general settings
.........................................................................36
machine setting mode key
....................................... 35, 237, 278
sewing settings
..........................................................................35
stitch length
..............................................................................79
stitch width
...............................................................................78
thread tension
..................................................................79, 233
thread trimming
......................................................................236
Sewing key
.................................................................................294
Sewing machine help key
.............................................................44
Sewing speed controller (speed control slide)
.................. 13, 15, 72
Sewing type selection key
.............................................................46
Shelltuck stitches
........................................................................126
Side cutter
...................................................................................107
Single/Repeat sewing key
............................................................167
Single/Triple stitching key
...........................................................330
Size key
............................................................................. 241, 270
Size selection key
.......................................................................166
Smocking stitches
.......................................................................128
Soft cover case
..............................................................................19
Speaker
.........................................................................................36
Specifications
..............................................................................362
Spool cap
......................................................................................13
Spool net
......................................................................................64
Spool pin
......................................................................................13
Spool stand
............................................................................ 52, 63
Stabilizer
.....................................................................................200
Start/Stop button
...........................................................................15
Starting point key
........................................................................241
Step stitch patterns
......................................................................174
Stitch recalculator
.......................................................................270
Stitch setting chart
.......................................................................365
Straight stitch foot
.........................................................................97
Straight stitch needle plate
............................................................97
Straight stitches
.............................................................................94
Supplemental spool pin
.................................................. 13, 48, 61
T
Tape attaching ............................................................................104
Tape or elastic attaching
.............................................................129
Test key
............................................................................. 330, 334
Thread
fabric/thread/needle combinations
............................................ 69
thread tension
...................................................................79, 233
Thread color display
................................................................... 237
Thread cutter
..........................................................................13, 73
Thread Cutter button
.................................................................... 15
Thread density key
..................................................................... 167
Thread guide
............................................................ 13, 49, 51, 61
Thread guide plate
..........................................................13, 51, 57
Thread marks
............................................................................. 290
Thread palette key
..................................................... 276, 277, 282
Top cover
..................................................................................... 13
Top stitching
.............................................................................. 127
Touch pen
.................................................................277, 329, 342
holder
....................................................................................... 13
Trial key
..................................................................................... 216
Troubleshooting
......................................................................... 343
Twin needle
................................................................................. 60
U
Uninterrupted embroidering ....................................................... 248
Upgrading
.................................................................................. 363
Upper threading
twin needle mode
..................................................................... 60
using the “Automatic Threading” button
................................... 57
using the spool net
................................................................... 64
USB cable
.........................................33, 179, 226, 253, 256, 364
USB media
recalling
.........................................................................181, 255
saving
.............................................................................178, 252
usable
.............................................................................176, 249
USB mouse
............................................................................33, 39
USB port connector
for computer
............................................................13, 179, 253
for media
................................................................. 13, 178, 252
Utility stitches
key functions
............................................................................ 30
pattern explanation key
............................................................ 47
retrieving
.................................................................................. 93
saving
....................................................................................... 92
selecting
................................................................................... 90
sewing type selection key
......................................................... 46
stitch selection screens
............................................................. 90
stitch setting chart
................................................................... 365
V
Vertical stitch alignment foot “V” ............................................... 149
W
Walking foot ................................................................................ 66
Z
Zigzag stitches ............................................................................ 102
Zipper insertion
centered
................................................................................. 146
side
........................................................................................ 147
XF6298-001
English
882-W07
Printed in Taiwan
Please visit us at http://solutions.brother.com where you can get
product support and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs).
